PA0001-CN000515 MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
Parks and Recreation Department
City of Coppall, Texas
PROJECT MANUAL
FOR
MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
~. Per
The City of Coppell Specifications
At
,--- The City of Coppell
Town Center
Purchasing Department
BID OPENING DATE: MONDAY, MAY 15, 2000
2:00 P.M.
Schrickel, Rollins and Associates, Inc.
Landscape Architecture- Planning. Engineering
1161 Corporate Drive West · Suite 200 - Arlington, Texas 76006
(817) 649-3216/Metro 640-8212/FAX (817) 649-7645
Project No. 4017
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS 75019
000002-CERTIFICATION
The Texas Board of Architectural Examiners, P.O. Box 12337, Austin, Texas 78711-2337 or 333 Guadalupe,
Suite 2-350, Austin, Texas 78701-3942, (512) 305-9000, has jurisdiction over individuals licensed under the
Landscape Architects Registration Law, Texas Civil Statutes, Article 249c, and the Architects Registration
Law, Article 249a, Vemon's Texas Civil Statutes.
PROJECT MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
00001 - Title Page
00002 - Certification Page
00003 - Table of Contents
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
~ 00030 - Invitation to Bid
00100 Instructions to Bidders
00200 Geotechnical Data
"" CONTRACT FORMS
00300 Bid Form
00410 List of Alternates
00420 Bidder's Statement of Qualifications
00510 Standard Fixed Price Agreement
00610 Performance Bond
,k 00620 Payment Bond
00630 Maintenance Bond
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00700 General Provisions
00810 Special Conditions
,', 00815 Contractor Safety Specification
00822 Temporary Erosion, Sediment and Water Pollution Control
00900 Addenda (to be added as issued)
" SPECIFI~ ;ATIONS
DIVISION I - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01010 Summary of the Work
01021 Cash Allowances
01340 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples
"' 01410 Testing Laboratory Services
01510 Temporary Utilities and Facilities
01532 Tree Protection
_ 01630 Substitutions and Product Options
General Contractor's Request for Substitution
01710 - Cleaning Up
DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK
02100 - Site Preparation
,._, 02200 - Earthwork
02240 - Lime Treated Subgrade
02545 Interlocking Concrete Pavers
02660 - Pavement Markings and Signs
4017
02800
02830
02861
02870
02900
02970
Turfgrass Planting
Galvanized Chain Link Fencing
Poured-in-Place Playground Safety Surfacing
Miscellaneous Park Equipment
Tree, Shrub and Groundcover Planting
Irrigation System
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03100 - Concrete Formwork
03200 - Concrete Reinforcement
03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04100 - Mortar and Grout
04200 - Unit Masonry
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05500 - Miscellaneous Metal
DIVISION 6 - WOOD
06100 - Rough Carpentry
06400 - Architectural Woodwork
DIVISION 7 -THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07150
07400
07920
- Liquid Water Repellent
- Preformed Metal Roofing
- Caulking and Sealants
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110
08334
08625
08710
08730
08810
Metal Doors and Frames
Rolling Counter Doors
Tubular Skylights
Finish Hardware
Weatherstripping and Thresholds
Glazing
DIVISION 9 * FINISHES
09800
09860
09900
Special Coatings
- Graffiti Resistant Coatings
- Painting
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10170 - Toilet Compartments
10800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories
10990 Miscellaneous Specialties
4017 2
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11452 - Appliances
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13122 Shade Structures
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15040
15050
15055
15056
15057
15100
15251
15371
15401
15405
15421
15424
15450
15760
15771
15829
15841
15860
15867
15950
15953
General Requirements for Mechanical Work
Basic Materials and Methods
Project Closeout
Submittal Data
Cleaning
Valves
Insulation
Refrigerant Piping
Domestic Water Piping System
Waste Water Piping System
Floor Drains
Domestic Water Heaters
Plumbing Fixtures
Electric Unit Heaters
Split System Heating and Cooling Units
Fans
Low Velocity Metal Ductwork
Ductwork Accessories
Air Diffusers
HVAC Control Sequence
HVAC Test-Adjust-Balance
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16040
16050
16053
16054
16055
16056
16059
16110
16120
16121
16140
16164
16170
16450
16510
16930
General Requirements for Electrical Work
Basic Materials and Methods
Electrical Standards and Symbols
Project Closeout
Submittal Data
Electrical Identification
Electrical Testing and Load Balancing
Raceways, Conduits and Boxes
Cable, Wire and Connectors, 600 Volt
Electrical Connections to Equipment
Wiring Devices
Branch Circuit Panelboards
Motor and Circuit Disconnects
Grounding
Lighting Fixtures
Lighting Control Equipment
4017
3
I
SECTION 00030
INVITATION TO BID
Return Bid To: City of Coppell
Purchasing Department
PO Box 478
Coppell, Texas 75019
The enclosed Invitation To Bid and accompanying Specifications with Bid Sheets are for
your convenience in bidding the enclosed referenced products and/or services for the City of
Coppell. Sealed bids shall be received no later than: 2:00 P.M., MONDAY, MAY 15, 2000.
Please reference Bid No. 0400-3, "MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION," in all
correspondence pertaining to this bid and affix this number to outside front of bid envelope for
identification. All bids shall be to the attention of the Purchasing Department.
The City of Coppelt appreciates your time and effort in preparing a bid. Please note that all
bids must be received at the designated location by the deadline shown. Bids received
after the deadline will be returned unopened and shall be considered void and unacceptable.
Bid opening is scheduled to be held in the Office of the Purchasing Agent, 255 Parkway
Boulevard, Coppell, Texas. You are invited to attend.
If Bidder desires not to bid at this time, but wishes to remain on the commodity bid list, please
submit a "NO BID" response (same time/location). The City of Coppell is always very
conscious and extremely appreciative of the time and effort expended to submit a bid.
However, on "NO BID" responses please communicate any bid requirement(s) which may have
influenced your decision to "NO BID."
If response is not received in the form of a "BID" or "NO BID" for three (3) consecutive Invitation
TO Bid, Bidder shall be removed from said bid list. However, if you choose to "NO BID" at this
time but desire to remain on the bid list for other commodities, please state the specific
product/service for which your firm wishes to be classified.
Awards should be made approximately three weeks following the bid opening date. To obtain
results, or if you have any questions, please contact the Purchasing Department at
972-304-3644.
Bid documents are available at the office of Schrickel, Rollins and Associates, Inc.,
1161 Corporate Drive West, Suite 200, Arlington, Texas 76006. Bid documents may be
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS 75019
Page 2
examined without charge. A set of Bid Documents consists of the project manual and
plans. A fee of $100.00 (nonrefundable) will be required for each set of Bid Documents.
A pre-bid conference will be held in the Council Chamber of Town Center, 255
Parkway Boulevard, at 2:00 P.M., Monday, May 8, 2000. After discussions at Town
Center are concluded, those who wish to participate will move to the MacArthur Park
site for the conclusion of the pre-bid conference.
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARK1NAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS 75019
Page 3
INVITATION TO BID
INSTRUCTIONS/TERMS OF CONTRACT
BID NO. Q-0400-3
MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
By order of the City Council of the City of Coppell, Texas, sealed bids will be received for:
MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
TO PROVIDE FOR an annual Contract commencing (30) thirty days after the date of the award
and continuing for a twelve (12) month period. The City of Coppell reserves the right to extend
this Contract for (4) four additional one year periods as it deems to be in the best interest of the
City.
IT IS UNDERSTOOD that the City Council of the City of Coppell, Texas reserves the right to
reject any and/or all bids for any/or all products and/or services covered in this bid request and
to waive informalities or defects in bids or to accept such bids as it shall deem to be in the best
interests of the City of Coppell.
BIDS MUST BE submitted on the pricing forms included for that purpose in this packet. Each
bid shall be placed in a separate sealed envelope, with each page manually signed by a
person having the authority to bind the firm in a Contract, and marked clearly on the
outside as shown below. FACSIMILE TRANSMI'I'I'ALS SHALL NOT BE ACCEPTED!
SUBMISSION OF BIDS: Sealed bids shall be submitted no later than 2:00 P.M.,
MONDAY, MAY 15, 2000 to the address as follows:
City of Coppell
Purchasing Department
255 Parkway Blvd.
Coppell, Texas 75019
MARK ENVELOPE: "BID NO. Q-0400-3, MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION"
ALL BIDS MUST BE RECEIVED IN THE CITY'S PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
BEFORE OPENING DATE AND TIME.
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARIGNAY BOULEVARD ° COPPELL, TEXAS 750t9 Pltge 4
BID Q-0400-3
MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
PUBLIC NOTICE STATEMENT FOR ADA COMPLIANCE
The City of Coppell acknowledges its responsibility to comply with the Americans With
Disabilities Act of 1990. Thus, in order to assist individuals with disabilities who require special
services (i.e. sign interpretative services, alternative audio/visual devices, and amanuenses) for
participation in or access to the City of Coppell sponsored public programs, services and/or
meetings, the City requests that individuals make request for these services forty-eight (46)
hours ahead of the scheduled program, service and/or meeting. To make arrangements,
contact Vivyon V. Bowman, ADA Coordinator or other designated official at (214) 462-0022, or
(TDD 1-800-RELAY, TX 1-800-735-2989).
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD * COPPELL, TEXAS 75019 Page 5
BID Q-0400-3 MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
FUNDING: Funds for payment have been provided through the City of Coppell budget
approved by the City Council for this fiscal year only. State of Texas statutes prohibit the
obligation and expenditure of public funds beyond the fiscal year for which a budget has been
approved. Therefore, anticipated orders or other obligations that may arise past the end of the
current fiscal year shall be subject to budget approval.
LATE BIDS: Bids received in the City of Coppell Purchasing Department after submission
deadline will be considered void and unacceptable. The City of Coppell is not responsible for
lateness or non-delivery of mail, carrier, etc., and the date/time stamp in the Purchasing
Department shall be the official time of receipt.
ALTERING BIDS: Bids cannot be altered or amended after submission deadline. Any
interlineat/on, alteration, or erasure made before opening time must be initialed by the signer of
the bid, guarenteeing authenticity.
WITHDRAWAL OF BID: A bid may not be withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder without the
permission of the City for a period of ninety (90) days following the date designated for the
receipt of bids, and Bidder so agrees upon submittal of their bid.
SALES TAX: The City of Coppell is exempt by law from payment of Texas State Sales Tax
and Federal Excise Tax. Bidder shall include any sales taxes from concession sales of taxable
items on City property in the total price of the sale, and shall be responsible to report and pay
such taxes in a timely manner.
BID AWARD: The City reserves the right to award any combination of the bid alternates as is
deemed in the best interest of the City. The City also reserves the right to not award one or any
of the sections.
CONTRACT: This bid, when properly accepted by the City of Coppell, shall constitute a
Contract equally binding between the successful Bidder and the City. No different or additional
terms will become a part of this Contract with the exception of Change Orders.
CHANGE ORDERS: No oral statement of any individual shall modify or otherwise change, or
affect the terms, conditions or Specifications stated in the resulting Contract. All Change
Orders to the Contract will be made in writing by the City's Purchasing Agent.
IF DURING THE life of the Contract, the successful Bidder's net prices to other customers for
items awarded herein are reduced below the Contracted price, it is understood and agreed that
the benefits of such reduction shall be extended to the City of CoppelL
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS 75019 Page 6
BID Q-0400-3
MACARTHURPARK CONSTRUCTION
A PRICE redetermination may be considered by the City only at the anniversary date of the
Contract and shall be substantiated in writing (i.e., Manufacturer's direct cost, postage rates,
Railroad Commission rates, Wage/Labor rates, etc.). The Bidder's past history of honoring
Contracts at the bid price will be an important consideration in the evaluation of the lowest and
best bid. The City reserves the right to accept or reject any/all of the price redetermination as it
deems to be in the best interest of the City.
DELIVERY: all delivery and freight charges (F.O.B. City of Coppell) are to be included in the
bid price. ~
DELIVERY TIME: Bids shall show number of days required to place goods ordered at the
City's designated location. Failure to state delivery time may cause bid to be rejected.
Successful Bidder shall notify the Purchasing Department immediately if delivery schedule
cannot be met. If delay is foreseen, successful Bidder shall give written notice to the
Purchasing Agent. The City has the right to extend delivery time if reason appears valid.
Successful Bidder must keep the Purchasing Department advised at all times of the status of
the order.
CONFLICT OF INTEREST: No public official shall have interest in this Contract, in accordance
with Vernon's Texas Codes Annotated, Local Government Code Title 5. Subtitle C, Chapter
171.
ETHICS: The Bidder shall not offer or accept gifts of anything of value nor enter into any
business arrangement with any employee, official or agent of the City of Coppell.
EXCEPTIONS/SUBSTITUTIONS: All bids meeting the intent of this invitation To Bid will be
considered for award. Bidders taking exception to the Specifications, or offering substitutions,
shall state these exceptions in the section provided or by attachment as part of the bid. In the
absence of such, a list shall indicate that the Bidder has not taken exceptions and shall hold the
Bidder responsible to perform in strict accordance with the Specifications of the Invitation. The
City of Coppell reserves the right to accept any and all, or none, of the exception(s)!
substitution(s) deemed to be in the best interest of the City.
ADDENDA: Any interpretations, corrections or changes to this Invitation To Bid and
Specifications will be made by addenda. Sole issuing authority of addenda shall be vested in
the City of Coppell Purchasing Agent. Addenda will be mailed to all who are known to have
received a copy of this Invitation To Bid. Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of all addenda.
CITY OF COPPELL ° PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS 75019
Page 7
BID Q-0400-3 MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
DESCRIPTIONS: Any reference to model and/or make/manufacturer used in bid Specifications
will be made by addenda. Sole issuing authority of addenda shall be vested in the City's
Purchasing Agent. Addenda will be mailed to all who are known to have received a copy of this
invitation to Bid. Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of all addenda.
BID MUST COMPLY with all federal, state, county, and local laws concerning these types of
service(s).
DESIGN, STRENGTH, QUALITY of materials must conform to the highest standards of
manufacturing and engineering practice.
All items supplied against credit must be new and unused, unless otherwise specified, in first-
class condition and of current manufacturer.
MINIMUM STANDARDS FOR RESPONSIBLE PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS: A prospective
Bidder must affirmatively demonstrate Bidder's responsibility. A prospective Bidder must meet
the following requirements:
1. Have adequate financial resources, or the ability to obtain such resources as
required;
2. be able to comply with the required or proposed delivery schedule;
3. have a satisfactory record of performance;
4. have a satisfactory record of integrity and ethics;
5. be otherwise qualified and eligible to receive an award.
The City may request representation and other information sufficient to determine Bidder's
ability to meet these minimum standards listed above.
REFERENCES: The City requests Bidder to supply, with this Invitation To Bid, a list of at least
three (3) references where like products and/or services have been supplied by their firm.
Include name of firm, address, telephone number and name of r~presentative.
BIDDER SHALL PROVIDE with this bid response, all documentation required by this Invitation
To Bid. Failure to provide this information may result in rejection of bid.
SUCCESSFUL BIDDER SHALL defend, indemnify and save harmless the City of Coppell and
all its officers, agents and employees from all suits, actions, or other claims of any character,
name and description brought for or on account of any injuries or damages received or
sustained by any person, persons, or property on account of any negligent act or fault of the
successful Bidder, or of any agent, employee, subcontractor or supplier in the execution of, or
performance under, any COntract which may result from bid award. Successful Bidder
indemnifies and will indemnify and save harmless the City from liability, claim or demand on
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARK~/AY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS 15019 Page
BID Q-0400-3
MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
their part, agents, servants, customers, and/or employees whether such liability, claim or
demand arise from event or casualty happening or within the occupied premises themselves or
happening upon or in any of the halls, elevators, entrances, stairways or approaches of or to
the facilities within which the occupied premises are located. Successful Bidder shall pay any
judgment with costs which may be obtained against the City growing out of such injury or
damages.
WAGES: Successful Bidder shall pay or cause to be paid, without cost or expense to the City of
Coppell, all Social Security, Unemployment and Federal Income Withholding Taxes of all such
employees and all such employees shall be paid wages and benefits as required by Federal
and/or State Law.
TERM/NATION OF CONTRACT: This Contract shall remain in effect until Contract expires,
delivery and acceptance of products and/or performance of services ordered or terminated by
either party with a thirty (30) day written notice prior to any cancellation. The successful Bidder
must state therein the reasons for such cancellation. The City of Coppell reserves the right to
award canceled Contract to next lowest and best Bidder as it deems to be in the best interest of
the City of Coppell.
TERMINATION FOR DEFAULT: The City of Coppell reserves the right to enforce the
performance of this Contract in any manner prescribed by law or deemed to be in the best
interest of the City in the event of breach or default of this Contract. The City of Coppell
reserves the right to terminate the Contract immediately in the event the successful Bidder fails
to:
1. Meet schedules;
2. defaults in the payment of any fees; or
3. otherwise perform in accordance with these Specifications.
Breach of Contract or default authorizes the City of Coppell to exercise any or all of the
following rights:
1. The City may take possession of the assigned premises and any fees accrued or
becoming due to date;
2. the City may take possession of all goods, fixtures and materials of successful Bidder
therein and may foreclose its lien against such personal property, applying the
proceeds toward fees due or thereafter becoming due.
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS 75019
Page 9
I
BID Q-0400-3 MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
In the event the successful Bidder shall fail to perform, keep or observe any of the terms and
conClitions to be performed, kept or observed, the City shall give the successful Bidder written
notice of such default; and in the event said default is not remedied to the satisfaction and
approval of the city within two (2) working days of receipt of such notice by the successful
Bidder, default will be declared and all the successful Bidder's rights shall terminate.
Bidder, in submitting this bid, agrees that the City of Coppell shall not be liable to prosecution
for damages in the event that the City declares the Bidder in default.
NOTICE: Any notice provided by this bid (or required by law) to be given to the successful
Bidder by the City of Coppell shall conclusively deemed to have been given and received on the
next day after such written notice has been deposited in the mail in the City of Coppell, Texas
by Registered or Certified Mail with sufficient postage affixed thereto, addressed to the
successful Bidder at the address so provided; provided this shall not prevent the giving of actual
notice in any other manner.
PATENTS/COPYRIGHTS: The successful Bidder agrees to protect the City of Coppell from
claims involving infringement of patents and/or copyrights.
CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR: Under this Contract, the City of Coppell may appoint a
Contract Administrator with designated responsibility to ensure compliance with Contract
requirements, such as but not limited to, acceptance, inspection and delivery. The Contract
Administrator will serve as liaison between the City of Coppell Purchasing Department (which
has the overall Contract Administration responsibilities) and the successful Bidder.
PURCHASE ORDER: A Purchase Order(s) shall be generated by the City of Coppell to the
successful Bidder. The Purchase Order number must appear on all itemized invoices and
packing slips. The City of Coppell will not be held responsible for any orders placed/delivered
without a valid current Purchase Order number.
PACKING SLIPS or other suitable shipping documents shall accompany each special order
shipment and shall show: (a) name and address of successful Bidder, (b) name and address of
receiving department and/or delivery location, (c) Purchase Order number, and (d) descriptive
information as to the item(s) delivered, including product code, item number, quantity, number
of CoRtaineFs, etc.
INVOICES shall show all information as stated above, shall be issued for each Purchase Order
and shall be mailed directly to the City of Coppell Finance/Accounts Payable Department, 255
Parkway Blvd., Coppell, Texas 75019.
CITY OF COPPELL ° PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ° 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD ° COPPELL, TEXAS 75019 Page 10
BID Q-0400-3
MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
PAYMENT will be made upon receipt and acceptance by the City of Coppell for any item(s)
ordered and receipt of a valid invoice, in accordance with the State of Texas Prompt Payment
Act, Article 601f V.T.C.S. Successful Bidder(s) required to pay subcontractors within ten (10)
days.
ITEMS supplied under this Contract shall be subject to the City's approval. Items found
defective or not meeting Specifications shall be picked up and replaced by the successful
Bidder at the next service date at no expense to the City of Coppell. If item is not picked up
within one (1) week after notification, the item will become a donation to the City for disposition.
SAMPLES: When requested, samples shall be furnished free of expense to the City of
Coppell.
WARRANTY: Successful Bidder shall warrant that all items/services shall conform to the
proposed Specifications and/or all warranties as stated in the Uniform Commercial Code and be
free from all defects in material, workmanship and title. A copy of the warranty for each item
being bid must be enclosed. Failure to comply with the above requirements for literature and
warranty information could cause bid to be rejected.
REMEDIES: The successful Bidder and the City of Coppell agree that both parties have all
rights, duties and remedies available as stated in the Uniform Commercial Code.
VENUE: This Agreement will be governed and construed according to the laws of the State of
Texas. This Agreement is performable in the City of Coppell, Texas.
ASSIGNMENT: The successful Bidder shall not sell, assign, transfer or convey this Contract, in
whole or in part, without prior written consent of the City of Coppell.
SPECIFICATIONS and model numbers are for description only. Bidder may bid on description
only. Bidder may bid on alternate model but must clearly indicate alternate model being bid.
Bidder must enclose full descriptive literature on alternate item(s).
SILENCE OF SPECIFICATION: The apparent silence of these Specifications as to any detail
or to the apparent omission of a detailed description concerning any point, shall be regarded as
meaning that only the best commercial practices are to prevail. All interpretations of these
Specifications shall be made on the basis of this statement.
Each insurance policy to be furnished by successful Bidder shall include, by endorsement to the
policy, a statement that a notice shall be given to the City of Coppell by Certified Mail thirty (30)
days prior to cancellation or upon any material change in coverage.
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS 75019
Page 11
BID Q-0400-3 MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
ANY QUESTIONS concerning this Invitation To Bid and Specifications should be directed to the
Purchasing Department at 972-304-3643.
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS 75019 Page 12
SECTION 00100
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Defined Terms
Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders which are defined in the General Provisions have
the meanings assigned to them in the General Provisions. The term "Bidder" means one who
submits a Bid directly to Owner, as distinct from a sub-bidder, who submits a bid to a Bidder.
The term "Successful Bidder' means the lowest, qualified, responsible and responsive Bidder
to whom Owner makes an award. The term "Bidding Documents" includes the Invitation to
Bid, the Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form, and the proposed Contract Documents,
including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids.
Copies of Bidding Documents
Complete sets of the Bidding Documents in the number and for the nonrefunciable sum
stated in the Invitation to Bid may be obtained from the office of Schrickel, Rollins and
Associates, Inc., 1161 Corporate Dr. West, Suite 200, Arlington, Texas 76006.
B,
Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids; neither Owner nor
Architect/Engineer assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from
the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.
Owner and Architect/Engineer in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the
above terms do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer a
license or grant for any other use.
Qualification of Bidders
To demonstrate qualifications to perform the Work, each Bidder must submit with the bid,
written evidence, such as financial data, previous experience, present commitments and
other such data as may be called for on the "Bidders Statement of Qualifications Form."
Each Bid must contain evidence of Bidder's qualification to do business in the state of Texas
to obtain such qualification prior to award of the contract.
Examination of Contract Documents and Site
It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract
Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may
affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work, (c) consider federal, state and
local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the
Work, (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with Contract Documents, and
(e) notify Architect/Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract
Documents.
Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder may, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any
additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any
additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface
and underground facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost,
progress, performance or furnishing of the Work which Bidder deems necessaryto determine
its bid for performing and finishing the Work in accordance with the time, price and other
terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
4017
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
00100 - 1
I ]r
C,
On request in advance, Owner will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such
explorations and tests as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall
fill all holes, clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such
explorations.
The land upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access
thereto and other land designated for use by Contractor in performing the Work are identified
in the Contract Documents. All additional land and access thereto required for temporary
construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by Contractor.
E=
The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontestable representation by Bidder that Bidder
has complied with every requirement of this Article, that without exception the Bid is premised
upon performing and furnishing the work required by the Contract Documents and such
means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated
in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in
scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for
performance and furnishing of the Work.
Interpretations and Addenda
All questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to
Schdckel, Rollins and Associates, inc. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary
by Architect/Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda mailed or
delivered to all parties recorded by Architect/Engineer as having received the Bidding
Documents. Questions received less than seven days prior to the date for opening of Bids
may not be answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding.
Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect.
Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by
Owner or Architect/Engineer,
Bid Security
Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to Owner in an amount of five
percent of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a cashier's check or a Bid Bond
issued by a surety meeting the requirements of General Provisions.
The Bid security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the
Agreement and furnished the required contract security, whereupon the Bid security will be
returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Agreement and furnish the
required contract security within fifteen days after the Notice of Award, Owner may annul the
Notice of Award and the Bid security of that Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid security of other
Bidders whom Owner betieves to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be
retained by Owner until the earlier of the seventh day after the Effective Date of the
Agreement or the ninety-first day after the Bid opening, whereupon Bid security furnished by
such Bidders will be returned. Bid security with Bids which are not competitive will be
returned within seven days after the Bid opening.
Contract Time
The dates by which stages of the Work are to be completed are set forth in the Bid Form and
in Section 01010, Summary of Work.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
00100 - 2
10.
11.
Liquidated Damages
A. Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Special Conditions and the Agreement.
Substitutions
Each Bidder upon submitting a bid represents that his Bid is based upon the materials and
equipment described in the Bidding Documents.
B,
No substitution will be considered unless written request for substitution has been received
by the Architect/Engineer at least seven (7) days prior to the date for receipt of Bids.
Requests for substitutions shall be submitted in accordance with requirements of Section
01630.
Submit Request for Substitution on a copy of the form attached to Section 01630 -
Substitutions and Product Options.
If a proposed substitution is accepted, such acceptance will be set forth in an Addendure
prior to the Bid Date.
E. Bidders shall not rely on approvals made in any manner other than written Addendum.
Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others
The apparent Successful Bidder and any other Bidder so requested, shall within twenty-four
(24) hours after the Bid Opening submit to the Owner and Architect/Engineer a list of all
Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed for those portions
of the Work for which such identification is required.
B. Refer to the General Provisions for additional requirements.
Bid Form
The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents; additional copies may be obtained
from the Owner.
B. All blanks on the Bid Form must be completed in ink or by typewriter.
Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-
president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the
corporate seal must be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The
corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown below the signature.
Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name signed by a partner, whose
title must appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership must be
shown below the signature.
E. All names must be typed or printed below the signature.
The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda (the numbers of which
must be filled in on the Bid Form).
G. The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid must be shown.
4017
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
00100- 3
I
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Bids must be priced as indicated on the Bid Form for th'e base contract and include a
separate price for each alternative described in the Specifications as provided for in the Bid
Form. The price of the bid for each alternative will be the amount to be added to or deducted
from the price of the Base Bid if the Owner selects the alternative.
The Bid price shall include such amounts as the Bidder deems proper for overhead and profit
on account of cash allowances named in the Contract Documents.
Submission of Bids
A. Submission of Bid shall include:
Two copies of a completed and executed Bid Form, and
Bid security as stipulated in Item 6.A.
Completed Statement of Bidder's Qualifications.
B. The Bid Form shall be submitted unbound.
Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Invitation to Bid and shall be
enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope, marked as directed, and accompanied by the Bid
security and other required documents. If the Bid is sent through the mail or other delivery
system the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate envelope with the notation "BID
ENCLOSED" on the face of it.
Any Bid received after the time indicated in the invitation will be considered ineligible and
returned unopened.
No bids will be considered that are qualified with conditions, clauses, or alterations, or items
not called for in the proposal, or irregularities of any kind which in the Owner's opinion may
disqualify the bidder.
E. FACSIMILE TRANSMITTALS SHALL NOT BE ACCEPTED!
Modifications and Withdrawal of Bids
Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed and delivered
to the place where Bids are to be submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids.
Opening of Bids
A. Bids will be opened and read aloud publicly.
Bids to Remain Subject to Acceptance
All bids will remain subject to acceptance for up to ninety (90) days after the day of the Bid
opening, but Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid security
prior to that date.
Award of Contract
Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, to waive any and all informalities not
involving price, time or changes in the Work and to negotiate contract terms with the
Successful Bidder and the right to disregard all nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced
or conditional Bids. In the event that there is a conflict in the statement of a price within the
bid the Owner reserves the right to select the amount most advantageous to the Owner. Also,
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
4017 00100 - 4
17.
18.
19.
Owner reserves the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder if Owner believes that it would not be
in the best interest of the Project to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid
is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any
other pertinent standard or criteria established by Owner.
In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the
Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices and other
data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award.
C,
Owner may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and
other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the Work as to which the
identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations must be submitted
as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. Owner also may consider the operating costs,
maintenance requirements, performance data and guarantees of major items of materials
and equipment proposed for incorporation in the Work when such data is required to be
submitted prior to the Notice of Award.
Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to assist in the
evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of
Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations to perform
and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to Owner's satisfaction
within the prescribed time.
If the contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest bidder whose evaluation by
Owner indicates to Owner that the award will be in the best interests of the Project.
If the contract is to be awarded, Owner will give the Successful Bidder a Notice of Award
within ninety (90) days after the day of the Bid opening.
Contract Security
The General Provisions set forth Owner's requirements as to Performance and Payment
Bonds. When the Successful Bidder delivers the executed Agreement to Owner, it must be
accompanied by the required Performance and Payment Bonds.
Signing of Agreement
W hen Owner gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompan led by the
required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement with all other written Contract
Documents attached. In accordance with the schedule indicated in the notice of award the
Contractor shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement and
attached documents to Owner with the required Bonds. Thereafter Owner shall deliver one
fully signed counterpart to Contractor.
Notice of Special Provisions
Bidder is requested to refer to the General Provisions for requirements in reference to the
following Special Conditions. The successful Bidder will be required to execute all documents
associated with these clauses. Those associated documents are contained herein.
1. Agreement
2. Performance Bond
3. Payment Bond
4. Maintenance Bond
4017
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
00100-5
I
20.
21.
22.
Prevailing Wage Rate for Public Works Projects
The City shall ascedain the general prevailing rate of wages for each craft of type of workman, or
mechanic needed to execute this contract and shall specify in the call for bids of this contract what
the general prevailing rate of wages is sin the City of Coppell, The City shall also specify the prevailing
rate for legal holiday and overtime work. The contractor must pay the said specified rate to all
laborers, workmen, and mechanics employed by him or any subcontractor under him in the execution
of this contract.
Penalty for Violation
The contractor or subcontractor in violation of these rules is liable to the City for a penalty of Sixty
Dollars ($60.00) for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day or portion
thereof, that such laborer, workman, or mechanic is paid less than the stipulated rates for any work
done under this contract. The money collected shall be used to offset the costs of administering these
requirements. If the City receives a complaint by a laborer, workman. or mechanic it shall determine
within thirty (30) days after receipt whether good cause exists to believe that the contractor or any
subcontractor has committed a violation of these specifications. The City shall provide written notice
of its determination to the contractor or subcontractor and any affected laborer, workman, or
mechanic. the City shall retain any amounts due under the contract pending a final determination. If
the contractor or subcontractor and any affected laborer, workman, or mechanic fail to resolve the
alleged violation by agreement within fourteen (14) days of the determination by the City, the issues
of the alleged violation, any penalties owed to the public body, and any amounts owed to any affected
laborer, workman, or mechanic shall be submitted to binding arbitration in accordance with the
provisions of the Texas General Arbitration Act. If the parties fail to agree upon an arbitrator within
ten (10) days, the arbitrator shall be designated by the District Court upon petition of any party. The
decision and award of the arbitrator is final and binding upon all parties and may be enforced in any
court of competent jurisdiction. The City shall not be a party in the arbitration.
Arbitration
The arbitrator shall assess and award all reasonable costs, including the arbitrator's fee, against the
party or parties who fail to prevail in the proceeding. Costs may be assessed against the laborer,
workman. or mechanic only if the arbitrator finds that the claim was frivolous. If the arbitrator does not
find that the claim is frivolous and does not make an award to the laborer, workman, or mechanic,
costs will be shared equally by the parties. If the arbitrator determines that a violation of the
specification has occurred, the arbitrator shall assess and award penalties as provided in the Act and
all amounts awed to the affected laborer, workman, or mechanic against the contractor or
subcontractor. The City shall use any amounts retained under this provision to reimburse the laborer,
workman, or mechanic for the amount owed to that person because of the failure to pay the person
the general prevailing rate of wages as provided in the arbitrator's award. If the amounts withheld by
the City are insufficient to fully reimburse the laborer, workman, or mechanic for amounts owed, the
person has a right of action against the contractor or subcontractor and the surety of that person to
recover any amounts owed.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
00100 - 6
SECTION 00200
GEOTECHNICAL DATA
INVESTIGATION:
An investigation of subsurface soil conditions at the site was made by a geotechnical
engineering firm in the employ of the City of Coppell.
REPORTS:
At the time of issue of this Project Manual, the subsurface investigation report was not
available.
If it becomes available during the bidding period, logs of the test borings and the text of the
subsurface investigation report may be examined by qualified Bidders in the office of the
Owner's representative.
INTERPRETATION:
Bidders are expected to examine the site and the subsurface investigation reports and then
decide for themselves the character of the materials to be encountered.
The Owner and Architect/Engineer disclaim any responsibility for the accuracy, true location
and extent of the soils investigation that has been prepared by others. They further disclaim
responsibility for interpretation of that data by Bidders, as in projecting soil-bearing values,
rock profiles, soil stability and the presence, level and extent of underground water.
4017
GEOTECHNICAL DATA
00200 - 1
BID Q-0400-3 MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 00300
BID Q-0400-3
MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
BIDDERS PLEASE NOTE: ONE COPY OF THE FOLLOWING BID
SHEETS HAVE BEEN ENCLOSED FOR YOUR CONVENIENCE
(SPECIFICATIONS, BID AFFIDAVIT
AND INSURANCE AFFIDAVIT)
TWO COPIES MUST BE RETURNED TO THE PURCHASING DEPARTMENT NO
LATER THAN 2:00 P.M., MONDAY, MAY 15, 2000.
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD ° COPPELL, TEXAS 75019 Page 13
BID Q-0400-3
MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
BID AFFIDAVIT
The undersigned certifies that the bid prices contained in this bid have been carefully
reviewed and are submitted as correct and final. Bidder further certifies and agrees to
furnish any and/or all commodities upon which prices are extended at the price offered,
and upon the conditions contained in the Specifications of the Invitation To Bid. The
period of acceptance of this bid will be calendar days from the date of the
bid opening. (Period of acceptance will be ninety (90) calendar days unless otherwise
indicated by Bidder.)
STATE OF COUNTY OF
BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, a Notary Public in and for the State of ,
on this day personally appeared who after being by me duly sworn, did depose
and say:
"1, am a duly
authorized office~agent for and have been
duly authorized to execute the foregoing on behalf of the said
I hereby certify that the foregoing bid has not been prepared in collusion with any other
Bidder or individual(s) engaged in the same line of business prior to the official opening
of this bid. Further, I certify that the Bidder is not now, nor has been for the past six (6)
months, directly or indirectly concerned in any pool, agreement or combination thereof,
to control the price of services/commodities bid on, or to influence any individual(s) to
bid or not to bid thereon."
Name and address of Bidder:
Telephone: ( ) by:
Title: Signature:
SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN to before me by the above named
on this the day of
2000.
Notary Public in and for the State of
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ° 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS 75019
Page 14-A
BID Q 0400-03 MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT
I, the undersigned agent, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid
document have been reviewed by me with the below identified bidder, If the below
identified bidder is awarded this contract by City of Coppell, I wil) be able, within ten (10)
days after bidder is notified of such award, to furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City
meeting all of the requirements contained in this IFB,
Agent (Signature) Agent (Print)
Name of Insurance Carrier
Address of Agency
City/State
Phone Number Where Agent May Be Contacted
Bidder's Name (Print or Type)
SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN to before me by the above named on this the
day of ,2000,
Notary Public in and for the
State of
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT. 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD. COPPELL, TEXAS 7501g
Page
BID NO. Q 0400-03
MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
THIS BID IS SUBMITTED TO:
Jim Ragsdill, Purchasing Agent
City of Coppell
Town Center
255 Parkway Boulevard
Coppell, Texas
BID FORM
The undersigned, as BIDDER, declares that the only person or parties interested in this
proposal as principals are those named herein, that this proposal is made without collusion
with any other person, firm, or corporation, that he has carefully examined the Form of
Contract, Notice to Contractors, and specifications therein referred to, and has carefully
examined the location, and conditions, of the proposed work, and agrees that he will provide
all the necessary labor, machinery, tools, apparatus, and other items incidental to work, and
will do all work and furnish all the materials called for in the contract and specifications in the
manner prescribed therein.
It is understood by BIDDER that the phases of Work are to be substantially completed
by the completion dates identified in Section 0'1010, Summary of Work.
It is understood by BIDDER that failure of the Contractor to complete the phase(s) of Work
by the respective stipulated completion date will result in the payment of liquidated damages
to the Owner per paragraph SC.07 "Time for Completion and Liquidated Damages" of Section
00810, SPECIAL CONDITIONS.
Accompanying this proposal is a (Certified or Cashier's Check payable to the Owner) (Bid
Bond) in the amount of
Dollars ($ ).
The bid security accompanying this proposal shall be returned to the bidder, unless in case
of the acceptance of the proposal the bidder shall fail to execute a contract and file a
performance and payment bond within ten (10) days after its acceptance, in which case the
bid security shall become the property of the Owner and shall be considered as payment for
damages due to delay and other inconvenience suffered by the Owner on account of such
failure of the bidder. It is understood that the Owner reserves the right to reject any and all
bids.
The undersigned BIDDER proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an
agreement with OWNER in the form included in the Contract Documents to perform and
furnish all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the Contract Price
and within the stipulated Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and
conditions of the Contract Documents.,
BIDDER accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Notice to Contractors and Instructions
to Bidders, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security. This
BID FORM
.... ,o~z 00300 - 1
(a)
BID NO. Q 0400-03
Bid will remain subject to acceptance for ninety (90) days after the day of Bid opening.
BIDDER will sign and submit the Agreement with the Bonds and other documents required
by the Bidding Requirements within fifteen days after the date of OWNER's Notice of Award.
In submitting this Bid, BIDDER represents, as more fully set forth in the Agreement, that:
BIDDER has examined copies of all the Bidding Documents and of the following Addenda
(receipt of all which is hereby acknowledged):
Date Number Date Number
(b)
(c)
(e)
(f)
(g)
BIDDER has become familiar with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work,
site, locality, and all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any manner may affect
cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work.
BIDDER has obtained (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such
examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies that pertain to the subsurface
or physical conditions at the site that may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing
of the Work, as BIDDER considers necessary for the performance or furnishing of the Work
at the Contract Price within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and
conditions of the Contract Documents. No additional examinations, investigations,
explorations, tests, reports or similar information or data are or will be required by BIDDER
for such purposes.
BIDDER has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on the
Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the
site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said Underground Facilities. No
additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports or similar information or
data in respect of said Underground Facilities are or will be required by BIDDER in order to
perform and furnish the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in
accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
BIDDER has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations,
explorations, tests, reports and studies with the terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents.
BIDDER has given ARCHITECT/ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errore or
discrepancies that it has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written resolution
thereof by ARCHITECT/ENGINEER is acceptable to BIDDER.
BID FORM
00300 - 2
BID NO. Q 0400-03
BIDDER will complete the Work for the following price(s):
A. (1) BASE BID FOR ALL WORK IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
($ )
(use words)
(2) TRENCH SAFETY is included in the Base Bid [Item 8.A.(1)] and is the sum of
($ )
(use words)
B. ALTERNATES (Refer to Section 00410 - List of Alternates)
(1) CASH ALLOWANCE: BONUS FOR ACCELERATED COMPLETION OF THE
"EARLY COMPLETION PACKAGE" PORTION OF THE WORK. This is a
Cash Allowance to provide for payment of a bonus of $1,200.00 per day for
each day, up to a maximum of forty-five (45) days, that the entire "Early
Completion Package" is complete before the date of August 31,2000. (ADD)
Fifty-four Thousand and No/100 dollars
(use words)
($ 54,000.00 )
(2) DELETE ALL TREES AND SHRUBS FROM THE WORK (DEDUCT)
($ )
(use words)
(3) DELETE PRACTICE BALLFIELDS NO. I AND NO. 2 AND DELETE PRACTICE
SOCCER FIELDS NO. I AND NO. 2 FROM THE WORK (DEDUCT)
(use words)
($ )
(4) DELETE PRACTICE SOCCER FIELD NO. 3 FROM THE WORK (DEDUCT
(use words)
($ )
BID FORM
00300 - 3
BID NO. Q 0400-03
(5) DELETE THE PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT AND SAFETY SURFACING FROM THE
WORK (DEDUCT)
(use words)
per cubic yard($ )
(6) DELETE THE EIGHT FOOT (8') HEIGHT "WROUGHT IRON" FENCE THAT IS
LOCATED PARALLEL TO MACARTHUR BLVD., AND IS ON THE SOUTH, EAST
AND NORTH PROPERTY LINE OF THE FIRE STATION; AND INSTALL EIGHT
FOOT (8') HEIGHT CHAIN LINK FENCING AS PER DETAIL ON PLANS. THIS
INCLUDES THE FOUR FOOT (4') WIDE GATES AND THE TWELVE FOOT (12')
WIDE DOUBLE GATE. (DEDUCT THE DIFFERENCE IN PRICE)
per cubic yard($ )
(use words)
C. UNIT PRICES: In the event that certain quantities of Work are ordered to be increased
(or decreased), the following Unit Prices shall apply as additive (or deductive) bid items,
respectively.
(1) Imported unclassified fill in place: A unit price of
(2)
(use words)
Imported topsoil in place: A unit price of
per cubic yard($ nY)
(3)
per cubic yard($ C..Y)
(use words)
Five-inch (5") thick dry brush concrete pavement for walks and bleacher
pads: A unit price of
(4)
per square yard($ ~Y)
(use words)
Six-inch (6") thick concrete pavement with monolithic curb and lime stabilized
subgrade for drives and parking lots: A unit price of
per square yard($
(use words)
~Y)
BID FORM
00300 - 4
(5)
BID NO. Q 0400-03
Five-inch (5") thick concrete pavement with monolithic curb and lime
stabilized subgrade for drives and parking lots: A unit price of:
(6)
per square yard($ SY)
(use words)
"Primavera" Bermuda seed, fine graded, planted and maintained until established
and accepted by Owner: A unit price of
(7)
per square foot($ SE)
(use words)
Ryegrass seed, fine graded, planted and maintained until established and accepted
by Owner: A unit price of
per square foot($ SE)
(use words)
(8) Tifway 419 rolled sod, fine graded and planted: A unit price of
per square yard($ SY)
(use words)
(9) Concrete paverstones including the concrete subsurface: A unit price of
(use words)
(10) "Wrought Iron" fence: A unit price of
per square foot($
4017
per linear foot($
(11 ) Eight-foot (8') ht. chain link fence: A unit price of
per linear foot($
(use words)
(12) Eighteen-inch (18") wide concrete edging under fence: A unit price of
(use words)
BID FORM
00300 - 5
i F)
per linear foot($ I F)
BID NO. Q 0400-03
9. The following documents are attached to and made a condition of this Bid:
(a) Required Bid Security in the form of bid bond or cashier's check.
(b) Required BIDDER's Statement of Qualifications with supporting data.
(c) Bid Affidavit.
(d) Insurance Requirement Affidavit.
10. Communications concerning this Bid shall be addressed to:
Mr. Delbert Hirst, RLA
Schrickel, Rollins and Associates, Inc.
1161 Corporate Drive West, Suite 200
Arlington, Texas 76006
(817) 649-3216/FAX (817) 649-7645
11. SUBMITTED on ,2000.
(Date)
12. Respectfully submitted,
By
Title
Address
Phone No.:
Fax No.:
E-maih
13. Submitted by
Doing business as
[] an individual
[] a corporation
[] a partnership
4017
BID FORM
00300-6
' T
SECTION 00410
LIST OF ALTERNATES
GENERAL ALTERNATE REQUIREMENTS:
General: The description herein for each alternate is recognized to be incomplete and
abbreviated, but implies that each change must be complete for the scope of Work
affected. Refer to the applicable specification sections (Division 1 through 16), and to
applicable drawings, for specific requirements of the Work, regardless of whether
references are so noted in description of each alternate. Coordinate related Work and
modify surrounding Work as required to properly integrate with Work of each alternate. It
is recognized that descriptions of alternates are primarily scope definitions, and do not
necessarily detail the full range of materials and processes needed to complete the Work
as required.
SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES:
Alternate No. 1:
CASH ALLOWANCE: BONUS FOR ACCELERATED COMPLETION
OF THE "EARLY COMPLETION PACKAGE" PORTION OF THE
WORK.
It will be of additional benefit to the Owner to have this portion of the Work
completed at an earlier date. As an Alternate Bid item, a Cash Allowance of
$54,000 is provided in the Bid Form. This allowance is for payment by the Owner
to the Contractor of a bonus of $1,200.00 per day for each day, up to a maximum
of forty-five (45) days, that the entire "Early Completion Package" is complete before
the date of August 31,2000.
Alternate No. 2: DELETE ALL TREES AND SHRUBS FROM THE WORK.
This alternate deletes the planting of all trees and shrubs that are included in the
Base Bid for the Work. THIS IS A DEDUCTIVE ALTERNATE.
Alternate No. 3: DELETE PRACTICE BALLFIELDS NO, 1 AND NO. 2 AND DELETE
PRACTICE SOCCER FIELDS NO. 1 AND NO. 2 FROM THE WORK.
This alternate deletes the named practice fields that are included in the Base Bid
for the Work. The earthwork to construct the fields to rough grades remains in the
Base Bid. The trees are not part of this alternate. The items deleted are the fine
grading, the irrigation systems for the area, the seeded "Primavera" Bermudagrass
planting and establishment, and the backstops. THIS IS A DEDUCTIVE
ALTERNATE.
LIST OF ALTERNATES
00410 - 1
Alternate No. 4: DELETE PRACTICE SOCCER FIELD NO. '3 FROM THE WORK.
This alternate deletes the named practice field that is included in the Base Bid for
the Work. The earthwork to construct the field to its rough grades remains in the
Base Bid. The items to be deleted include the fine grading, the irrigation systems
for the area, and the seeded "Primavera" Bermudagrass planting and
establishment. THIS IS A DEDUCTIVE ALTERNATE.
Alternate No. 5: DELETE THE PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT AND SAFETY
SURFACING FROM THE WORK.
This alternate deletes the playground equipment and safety surfacing with concrete
base that are included in the Base Bid. The earthwork to construct the playground
and the perimeter walks around the playground remain in the Base Bid. THIS IS A
DEDUCTIVE ALTERNATE
Alternate No. 6:
DELETE EIGHT FOOT (8') HT. "WROUGHT IRON" FENCE THAT IS
LOCATED PARALLEL TO MACARTHUR BLVD., AND IS ON THE
SOUTH, EAST AND NORTH SIDE OF THE FIRE STATION; AND
INSTALL EIGHT FOOT (8') HT. CHAIN LINK FENCE.
This alternate deletes the "wrought iron" fence located along the west side of the
project that is included in the Base Bid. Construct in its place a chain link fence as
detailed on the plans. The 4' wide gates and 12' wide double gate shall also be
constructed with chain link material. THE DIFFERENCE IN PRICE IS A
DEDUCTIVE ALTERNATE.
END OF SECTION
LIST OF ALTERNATES
00410 - 2
Firm Name
BID NO. Q 0400-03
Section 00420
BIDDER'S STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS
Address
City State
Telephone Number
Number of years in business under presem name:
Former name(s) of organization:
CLASSIFICATION: [] General [] Building
[] Utilities [] Eax~work
Titles, names and complete addresses of all principals in firnl:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Number of full time employees:
I.R.S. Number:
FINANCIAL STATUS: Bonding Capacity:
Date Organized
[] PARTNERSHIP [] CORPORATION
Zip Code
[] Electrical [] Plumbing [] HVAC ~
[] Paving [] Other
Bonding Capacity Remaining:
Name and Full Address of Bonding Company:
ATTACH A SUMMARY OF FIRM'S LATEST FINANCIAL STATEMENT.
Date of Financial Statement:
ATTACH A LIST OF SIMILAR COMPLETED PROJECTS. (Addresses, phone numbers and contact person.)
ATTACH A LIST OF SIMILAR PROJECTS UNDER CONSTRUCTION OR UNDER CONTRACT. (Addresses,
phone numbers and contact person.)
4017
BIDDER'S STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS
00420-1
ATTACH CONSTRUCTION SUPERINTENDENT'S NAME AND CONSTRUCTION EXPERIENCE.
ATTACH QUALIFICATIONS FOR SUBCONTRACTORS NAMED IN THE BID FORM.
REFERENCES: (Bank and Wade; give complete names and addresses.)
1.
2.
3.
4.
I here by certify as of
Tifie Firm Name
that all information provided above aRached herewith is t~'ue and correct,
Signature
Printed Name
Date
BIDDER'S STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS
00420 - 2
SECTION 00510
CITY OF COPPELL, TEXAS
STANDARD FIXED PRICE AGREEMENT
FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE
MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS 75019
BID Q-0400-3 MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION _
City of Coppell, Texas
This Agreement is made by and between the City of Coppell, Texas, a home-rule municipality
(hereinafier referred to as the "Owner") and , (hereina~er referred to as
the "Contractor") for construction of , (hereinafter referred to as the
"Project"), the Owner and the Contractor hereby agreeing as follows:
ARTICLE I 1.4 No PRIVITY WITH OTHERS
THE CONTRACT AND THE CONTRACT 1.4.1 Nothing contained in this Contract shall
DOCUMENTS create, or be interpreted to create, privity or any other
contractual agreement between the Owner and any
1.1 THE CONTRACT person or entity other than the Contractor.
1.1.1 The Contract between the Owner and 1.5 INTENT AND INTERPRETATION
the Contractor, of which this Agreement is a part,
consists of the Contract Documents. It shall be 1.5.1 The intent of this Contract is to require
effective on the date this Agreement is executed by complete, correct and timely execution of the Work.
the last party to execute it. Any Work that may be required, implied or inferred
by the Contract Documents, or any one or more of
1.2. THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS them, as necessary to produce the intended result
shall be provided by the Contractor for the Contract
1.2.1 The Contract Documents consist of this Price.
Agreement, the Invitation to Bid, Requirements and
Instructions to Bidders, the Specifications, the 1.5.2 This Contract is intended to be an
Drawings, the Project Manual, all Change Orders and integral whole and shall be interpreted as internally
Field Orders issued hereafter, any other amendments consistent. What is required by any one Contract
hereto executed by the parties hereafter, together with Document shall be considered as required by the
the following (if any): Contract.
Documents not enumerated in this Paragraph 1.2.1 1.5.3 When a word, term or phrase is used in
are not Contract Documents and do not form part of this Contract, it shall be interpreted or construed,
this Contract. first, as defined herein; second, if not defined,
according to its generally accepted meaning in the
1.3 ENTIRE AGREEMENT construction industry; and third, if there is no
generally accepted meaning in the construction
1.3.1 This Contract, together with the industry, according to its common and customary
Contractor's performance and payment bonds for the usage.
Project, all General Conditions, Special Conditions,
Plans and Specifications, and Addenda attached 1.5.4 The words "include", "includes", or
thereto, constitute the entire and exclusive agreement "including", as used hi this Contract, shall be deemed
between the Owner and the Contractor with reference to be followed by the phrase, "without limitation".
to the Project. Specifically, but without limitation,
this Contract supersedes any bid documents and all 1.5.5 The specification herein of any act,
prior written or oral communications, representations failure, refusal, omission, event, occurrence or
and negotiations, if any, between the Owner and condition as constituting a material breach of this
Contractor not expressly made a part hereof. Contract shall not imply that any other, non-specified
act, failure, refusal, omission, event, occurrence or
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255PARKWAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS 75019 Page 16
BID Q-0400-3
MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
condition shall be deemed not to constitute a material
breach of this Contract.
1.5.6 Words or terms used as nouns in this
Contract shall be inclusive of their singular and plural
forms. unless the context of their usage clearly
requires a contrary meaning.
1.5.9 Neither the organization of any of the
Contract Documents into divisions, sections,
paragraphs, articles, (or other categories), nor the
organization or arrangement of the Design, shall
control the Contractor in dividing the Work or in
establishing the extent or scope of the Work to be
performed by Subcontractors.
1.5.7 The Contractor shall have a continuing 1.6 OWNERSHIP OF
duty to read, carefully study and compare each of the
Contract Documents, the Shop Drawings, the Product
Data, and any Plans and Specifications, and shall give
written notice to the Owner of any inconsistency,
ambiguity, error or omission which the Contractor
may discover with respect to these documents before
proceeding with the affected Work. The issuance, or
the express or implied approval by the Owner or the
Architect of the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings
or Product Data shall not relieve the Contractor of the
continuing duties imposed hereby, nor shall any such
approval be evidence of the Contractor's compliance
with this Contract. The Owner has requested the
Architect to only prepare documents for the Project,
including the Drawings and Specifications for the ARTICLE II
Project, which are accurate, adequate, consistent,
coordinated and sufficient for construction. THE WORK
HOWEVER, THE OWNER MAKES NO
REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY
NATURE WHATSOEVER TO THE
CONTRACTOR CONCERNING SUCH
DOCUMENTS. By the execution hereof, the
Contractor acknowledges and represents that it has 2.2 WORK
received, reviewed and carefully examined such
documents, has found them to be complete, accurate,
adequate, consistent, coordinated and sufficient for
construction, and that the Contractor has not, does
not, and will not rely upon any representation or
warranties by the Owner concerning such documents
as no such representation or warranties have been or
are hereby made. Further, the Contractor represents
and warrants that it has had a sufficient opportunity to
inspect the Project site and assumes any and all
responsibility for inadequacies or ambiguities in the
plans, drawings or specifications as well as for latent
conditions of the site where the work is to be
performed.
1.5.8 As between numbers and scaled
measurements on the Drawings and in the Design, the
numbers shall govern, as between larger scale and
smaller scale drawings, the larger scale shall govern.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1.6.1 The Contract Documents, and each of
then~ shall remain the property of the Owner. The
Contractor shall have the right to keep one record set
of the Contract Documents upon completion of the
Project; provided, however, that in no event shall
Contractor use, or permit to be used, any or all of
such Contract Documents on other projects without
the Owner's prior written authorization.
2.1 The Contractor shall perform all of the
Work required, implied or reasonably inferable from,
this Contract.
2.2.1 The term "Work" shall mean whatever
is done by or required of the Contractor to perform
and complete its duties under this Contract. including
the following: construction of the whole or a
designated part of the Project; furnishing of any
required surety bonds and insurance, and the
provision or furnishing of labor, supervision,
services, materials, supplies, equipment, fixtures,
appliances, facilities, tools, transportation, storage,
power, permits and licenses required of the
Contractor, fuel, heat, light, cooling and all other
utilities as required by this Contract. The Work to be
performed by the Contractor is generally described as
follows:
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS ?~019 Page 17
BID Q-0400-3 MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
2.2.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for
paying for and procuring all materials and labor and
furnishing all services necessary or appropriate for
the full performance of the Work and the for the full
completion of the Project. All materials shall be new
and materials and workmanship shall be of good
quality. Upon request, the Contractor shall furnish
satisfactory proof of the type, kind, and quality of
materials.
ARTICLE IH
CONTRACT TIME
3.1
TIME AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
3.1.1 The Contractor shall commence the
Work within 10 days of receipt of a written Notice to
Proceed, and shall achieve Substamial Completion of
the Work no later than ~ calendar days from the
date specified in the Notice to Proceed. The parties
acknowledge that time is of the essence in the
performance of the terms of this Contract. The term
"calendar days" shall mean any and all days of the
week or month, no days being excepted. It is
contemplated by the parties that the progress of the
Work may be delayed by certain conditions beyond
the control of the panics; these delays have been
contemplated by the parties and considered in the
time allotted for performance specified herein and
includes, but is not limited to delays occasioned on
account of adverse weather, temporary unavailability
of materials, shipment delays, and the presence and
potential interference of other contractors who may
be performing work at the Project site unrelated to
this agreement,
The number of calendar days from the date on which
the Work is permitted to proceed, through the date set
forth for Substantial Completion, shall constitute the
"Conlract Time".
3.1.2 The Contractor shall pay the Owner the
sum of $ per day for each and every
calendar day of unexcused delay in achieving
Substantial Completion beyond the date set forth
herein for Substantial Completion of the Work. Any
sums due and payable hereunder by the Contractor
shall be payable, not as a penalty, but as liquidated
damages representing an estimate of delay damages
likely to be sustained by the Owner, estimated at or
before the time of executing this Contract. When the
Owner reasonably believes that Substantial
Completion will be inexcusably delayed, the Owner
shall be entitled, but not required, to withhold from
any amounts otherwise due the Contractor an mount
then believed by the Owner to be adequate to recover
liquidated damages applicable to such delays. if and
when the Contractor overcomes the delay in
achieving Substantial Completion, or any part
thereof, for which the Owner has withheld payment,
the Owner shall promptly release to the Contractor
those funds withheld, but no longer applicable, as
liquidated damages.
3. 1.3 In the event that the Contractor achieves
certification of substantial completion prior to the
scheduled completion date, the Owner shall pay to the
Contractor the sum of $__ per day for each
calendar day that substantial completion is certified in
advance of the scheduled completion date.
3.1.4 No claim shall be made by the
Contractor to the Owner, and no damages, costs or
extra compensation shall be allowed or paid by the
Owner to the Contractor for any delay or hindrance
from any cause in the progress or completion of the
Work or this Contract. The Contractor's sole remedy
in the event of any delay or hindrance shall be to
request time extensions by written change orders as
provided for hereinafter. Should the Contractor be
delayed by an act of the Owner, or should the Owner
order a stoppage of the Work for sufficient cause, an
extension of time shall be granted by the Owner by
written authorization upon written application, which
extension shall not be unreasonably denied, to
compensate for the delay.
3.1.5 The Owner shall have the authority to
suspend the Work wholly or in part for such period or
periods of time as it may deem appropriate due to
unsuitable conditions considered unfavorable for the
proper prosecution of the Work or for the failure of
the Contractor to carry out instructions from the
Owner or Owner's representative. During any period
in which the Work is stopped or during which any of
the Work is not actively in progress for any reason,
Contractor shall properly protect the site and the
Work from damage, loss or harm.
CITY OF COPPELL * PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL. TEXA~ 15019
Page t6
I T
BID Q-0400-3
MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
3.2
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
3.2.1 "Substantial Completion" shall mean
that stage in the progression of the Work when the
Work is sufficiently complete in accordance with this
Contract that the Owner can enjoy beneficial use or
occupancy of the Work and can utilize the Work for
its intended purpose, even though minor
miscellaneous work and/or adjustment may be
required.
3.3
TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE
3.3.1 All limitations of time set forth in the
Contract Documems are of the essence of this
Contract.
constitute a material breach of this Contract. The
Schedule of Values shall be used only as a basis for
the Contractor's Applications for Payment and shall
only constitute such basis after it has been
acknowledged and accepted in writing by the
Architect and the Owner.
5.2
PAYMENTPROCEDURE
5.2.1 The Owner shall pay the Contract Price
to the Contractor as provided below.
5.2.2 PROGRESS P,4 FMENTS ~ Based upon the
Contracmr's Applications for Payment submitted m
the Architect and upon Certificates for Payment
subsequently issued to the Owner by the Architect,
the Owner shall make progress payments to the
Contractor on account of the Contract Price.
ARTICLE IV
CONTRACT PRICE
4.1
THE CONTRACT PRICE
4.1.1 The Owner shall pay, and the
Contractor shall accept, as full and complete payment
for all of the Work required herein, the fixed sum of
$
The sum set forth in this Paragraph 4.1 shall
constitute the Contract Price which shall not be
modified except by wriuen Change Order as provided
in this Contract.
ARTICLE V
PAYMENT OF THE CONTRACT PRICE
5.1
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
5.1.1 Within ten (10) calendar days of the
effective date hereof, the Contractor shall submit to
the Owner and to the Architect a Schedule of Values
allocating the Contract Price to the various portions
of the Work. The Contractor's Schedule of Values
shall be prepared in such form, with such detail, and
supported by such data as the Architect or the Owner
may require to substantiate its accuracy. The
Contractor shall not mibalance its Schedule of Values
nor artificially inflate any element thereof. The
violation of this provision by the Contractor shall
5.2.3 On or before the 251h day of each
month after commencement of the Work, the
Contractor shall submit an Applicafion for Payment
for the period ending the 15th day of the month to the
Architect in such form and manner, and with such
supporting data and content, as the Owner or the
Architect may require. Therein, the Contractor may
request payment for ninety percent (90%) of that
portion of the Contract Price properly allocable to
Contract requirements properly provided, labor,
materials and equipment properly incorporated in the
Work, tess the total amount of previous payments
received from the Owner. Such Application for
Payment shall be signed by the Contractor and shall
constitute the Contractor's representation that the
Work has progressed to the level for which payment
is requested in accordance with the Schedule of
Values, that the Work has been properly installed or
performed in full compliance with this Contract, and
that the Contractor knows of no reason why payment
should not be made as requested. Thereafter, the
Architect will review the Applicafion for Payment
and may also review the Work at the Project site or
elsewhere to determine whether the quantity and
quality of the Work is as represented in the
Application for Payment and is as required by this
Contract. The Architect shall determine and certify to
the Owner the amount properly owing to the
Contractor. The Owner shall make partial payments
on account of the Contract Price to the Contractor
within thirty (30) days following the Architect's
receipt and approval of each Application for
Payment. The amount of each partial payment shall
be the amount certified for payment by the Architect
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS 75019 Page '19
BID Q-0400-3 MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
less such amounts, if any, otherwise owing by the
Contractor to the Owner or which the Owner shall
have the right to withhold as authorized by this
Contract. The Architect's certification of the
Contractor's Application for Payment shall not
preclude the Owner from the exercise of any of its
rights as set forth in Paragraph 5.3 hereinbelow.
5.2.4 The Contractor warrants that title to all
Work covered by an Application for Payment will
pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment.
The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal
of an Application for Payment, all Work for which
payments have been received from the Owner shall be
flee and clear of liens, claims, security interest or
other encumbrances in favor of the Contractor or any
other person or entity whatsoever.
5.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly pay each
Subcontractor out of the amount paid to the
Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's Work,
the amount to which such Subcontractor is entitled.
In the event the Owner becomes informed that the
Contractor has not paid a Subcontractor as herein
provided, the Owner shall have the right, but not the
duty, to issue future checks in payment to the
Contractor of amounts otherwise due hereunder
naming the Contractor and such Subcontractor as
joint payees. Such joint check procedure, if
employed by the Owner, shall create no rights in
favor of any person or entity beyond the fight of the
named payees to payment of the check and shall not
be deemed to comn'at the Owner to repeat the
procedure in the future.
5.2.6 No progress payment, nor any use or
occupancy of the Project by the owner, shall be
interpreted to constitute an acceptance of any Work
not in strict accordance with this Contract.
5.3
WITHHELD PAYMENT
5.3.1 The Owner may decline to make
payment, may withhold funds, and, if necessary, may
demand the return of some or all of the amounts
previously paid to the Contractor, to protect the
Owner from loss because of:
(a)
defective Work not remedied by the
Contractor nor, in the opinion of the
Owner, likely to be remedied by the
Contractor;
(b) claims of third parties against the Owner
or the Owner's property;
(c)
failure by the Contractor to pay
Subcontractors or others in a prompt
and proper fashion;
(d)
evidence that the balance of the Work
cannot be completed in accordance with
the Contract for the unpaid balance of
the Contract Price,
(e)
evidence that the Work will not be
completed in the time required for
substantial or final completion;
(f) persistent failure to carry out the Work
in accordance with the Contract;
(g) damage to the Owner or a third party to
whom the Owner is, or may be, liable.
In the event that the Owner makes
written demand upon the Contractor for amounts
previously paid by the Owner as contemplated in this
Subparagraph 5.3.1, the Contractor shall promptly
comply with such demand. The Owner shall have no
duty to third parties to withhold payment to the
Contractor and shall incur no liability for a failure to
withhold funds.
5.4
UNEXCUSED FAILURE TO PAY
5.4.1 If within fifteen (15) days after the date
established herein for payment to the Contractor by
the Owner, the Owner, without cause or basis
hereunder, fails to pay the Contractor any amount
then due and payable to the Contractor, then the
Contractor may afrer ten (10) additional days' writlen
notice to the Owner and the Architect, and without
prejudice to any other available rights or remedies it
may have, stop the Work until payment of those
amounts due from the Owner have been received.
Late payments shall not accrue interest or other late
charges.
5.5
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
5.5.1 When the Contractor believes that the
Work is substantially complete, the Contractor shall
submit to the Architect a list of items to be completed
or corrected. When the Architect on the basis of an
inspection determines that the Work is in fact
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT * 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS 75019
P~e20
! T
BID Q-0400-3
MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
substantially complete, it will prepare a Certificate of
Substantial Completion which shall establish the date
of Substantial Completion, shall state the
responsibilities of the Owner and the Contractor for
Project security, maintenance, heat. utilities, damage
to the Work, and insurance, and shall fix the time
within which the Contractor shall complete the items
listed therein. Guarantees required by the Contract
shall commence on the date of Substantial
Completion of the Work. The Certificate of
Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the
Owner and the Contractor for their written acceptance
of the responsibilities assigned to them in such
certificate.
Upon Substantial Completion of the Work, and
execution by both the Owner and the Contractor of
the Certificate of Substantial Completion, the Owner
shall pay the Contractor an amount sufficient to
increase total payments to the Contractor to one
hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Price less
three hundred percent (300%) of the reasonable cost
as determined by the Owner and the Architect for
completing all incomplete Work, correcting and
bringing into conformance all defective and
nonconforming Work, and handling all unsettled
claims.
5.6
COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT
5.6.1 When all of the Work is fmally
complete and the Contractor is ready for a final
inspection, it shall notify the Owner and the Architect
thereof in writing. Thereupon, the Architect will
make final inspection of the Work and, if the Work is
complete in full accordance with this Contract and
this Contract has been fully performed, the Architect
will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment
certifying to the Owner that the Project is complete
and the Contractor is entitled to the remainder of the
unpaid Contract Price, less any amount withheld
pursuant to this Contract. If the Architect is unable to
issue its final Certificate for Payment and is required
to repeat its final inspection of the Work, the
Contractor shall bear the cost of such repeat final
inspection(s) which cost may be deducted by the
Owner from the Contractor's final payment.
5.6.1.1 If the Contractor fails to achieve final
completion within the time fixed therefor by the
Architect in its Certificate of Substantial Completion,
the Contractor shall pay the Owner the sum set forth
hereinabove as liquidated damages per day for each
and every calendar day of unexcused delay in
achieving final completion beyond the date set forth
herein for final completion of the Work. Any sums
due and payable hereunder by the Contractor shall be
payable, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages
representing an estimate of delay damages likely to be
sustained by the Owner, estimated at or before the
time of executing this Contract. When the Owner
reasonably believes that final completion will be
inexcusably delayed, the Owner shall be entitled, but
not required, to withhold from any amounts otherwise
due the Contractor an amount then believed by the
Owner to be adequate to recover liquidated damages
applicable to such delays. If and when the Contractor
overcomes the delay in achieving final completion, or
any part thereof, for which the Owner has withheld
payment, the Owner shall promptly release to the
Contractor those funds withheld, but no longer
applicable, as liquidated damages.
5.6.2 The Contractor shall not be entitled to
final payment unless and until it submits to the
Architect its affidavit that all payrolls, invoices for
materials and equipment, and other liabilities
connected with the Work for which the Owner, or the
Owner's property might be responsible, have been
fully paid or otherwise satisfied; releases and waivers
of lien from all Subcontractors of the Contractor and
of any and all other parties required by the Architect
or the Owner; consent of Surety, if any, to final
payment. If any third party fails or refuses to provide
a release of claim or waiver of lien as required by the
Owner, the Contractor shall furnish a bond
satisfactory to the Owner to discharge any such lien
or indemnify the Owner from liability.
5.6.3 The Owner shall make final payment of
all sums due the Contractor within ten (10) days of
the Architect's execution of a final Certificate for
Payment.
5.6.4 Acceptance of final payment shall
constitute a waiver of all claims against the Owner by
the Contractor except for those claims previously
made in writing against the Owner by the Contractor,
pending at the time of final payment, and identified in
writing by the Contractor as unsettled at the time of
its request for final payment.
5.6.5 Under no circumstance shall Contractor
be entitled to receive interest on any payments or
monies due Contractor by the Owner, whether the
amount on which the interest may accrue is timely,
CITY OF COPPELL * PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARK1NAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS 70019 Page 21
BID Q-0400-3 MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
late, wrongfully withheld, or an assessment of
damages of any kind.
ARTICLE VI
THE OWNER
6.1 INFORMATION, SERVICES AND THINGS
REQUIRED FROM OWNER
6.1.1 The Owner shall furnish to the
Contractor, at the time of executing this Contract, any
and all written and tangible material in its possession
concerning conditions below ground at the site of the
Project.
Such written and tangible material is furnished to the
Contractor only in order to make complete disclosure
of such material and for no other purpose. By
furnishing such material, the Owner does not
represent. warrant, or guarantee its accuracy either in
whole, in part, implicitly or explicitly, or at all, and
shall have no liability therefor. The Owner shall also
furnish surveys, legal limitations and utility locations
(if known), and a legal description of the Project site.
6.1.2 Excluding permits and fees normally the
responsibility of the Contractor, the Owner shall
obtain all approvals, easements, and the like required
for construction and shall pay for necessary
assessments and charges required for construction,
use or occupancy of permanent structures or for
permanent changes in existing facilities.
6.1.3 The Owner shall furnish the Contractor,
free of charge, one copy of the Contract Documents
for execution of the Work.
6.2
RIGHT TO STOP WORK
6.2.1 If the Contractor persistemly fails or
refuses to perform the Work in accordance with this
Contract, or if the best interests of the public health,
safety or welfare so require, the Owner may order the
Contractor to stop the Work, or any described portion
thereof, until the cause for stoppage has been
corrected, no longer exists, or the Owner orders that
Work be resumed. In such event, the Contractor shall
immediately obey such order.
6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM WORK
6.3.1 If the Contractor's Work is stopped by
the Owner under Paragraph 6.2, and the Contractor
fails within seven (7) days of such stoppage to
provide adequate assurance to the Owner that the
cause of such stoppage will be eliminated or
corrected, then the Owner may, without prejudice to
any other rights or remedies the Owner may have
against the Contractor, proceed to carry out the
subject Work. In such a situation, an appropriate
Change Order shall be issued deducting from the
Contract Price the cost of correcting the subject
deficiencies, plus compensation for the Architect's
additional services and expenses necessitated thereby,
if any. If the unpaid portion of the Contract Price is
insufficient to cover the amount due the Owner, the
Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.
ARTICLE VII
THE CONTRACTOR
7.1 The Contractor is again reminded of its
cominuing duty set forth in Subparagraph 1.5.7. The
Contractor shall perform no part of the Work at any
time without adequate Contract Documents or, as
appropriate, approved Shop Drawings, Product Data
or Samples for such portion of the Work. If the
Contractor performs any of the Work knowing it
involves a recognized error, inconsistency or
omission in the Contract Documents without such
notice to the Architect, the Contractor shall bear
responsibility for such performance and shall bear the
cost of correction.
7.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work
strictly in accordance with this Contract.
73 The Conlractor shall supervise and
direct the Work using the Contractor's best skill,
effort and attention. The Contractor shall be
responsible to the Owner for any and all acts or
omissions of the Contractor, its employees and others
engaged in the Work on behalf of the Contractor.
7.3.1 The Contractor shall give adequate
attemion to the faithful prosecution of the Work and
the timely completion of this Contract, with authority
to detemine the manner and means of performing
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS 75019
Page 22
I T
BID Q-0400-3
MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
such Work, so long as such methods insure timely
completion and proper performance.
7.3.2 The Contractor shall exercise all
appropriate means and measures to insure a safe and
secure jobsite in order to avoid and prevent injury,
damage or loss to persons or property.
7.4 WARRANTy
7.4.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner
that all labor furnished to progress the Work under
this Contract will be competent to perform the tasks
undertaken, that the product of such labor will yield
only first-class results, that materials and equipment
fumished will be of good quality and new unless
otherwise permitted by this Contract, and that the
Work will be of good quality, free from faults and
defects and in strict conformance with this Contract.
All Work not conforming to these requirements may
be considered defective.
7.5 The Contractor shall obtain and pay for
all permits, fees and licenses necessary and ordinary
for the Work. The Contractor shall comply with all
lawful requirements applicable to the Work and shall
give and maintain any and all notices required by
applicable law pertaining to the Work.
7.6 SUPERVISION
7.6.1 The Contractor shall employ and
maintain at the Project site only competem
supervisory personnel. Absent written instruction
from the Contractor to the contrary, the
superintendent shall be deemed the Contractor's
authorized representative at the site and shall be
authorized to receive and accept any and all
communications from the Owner or the Architect.
7.6.2 Key supervisory personnel assigned by the
Contractor to this Project are as follows:
NAME FUNCTION
So long as the individuals named above mmahi
actively employed or retained by the Contractor, they
shall perform the functions indicated next to their
names unless the Owner agrees to the ~:ontrary in
writing. In the event one or more individuals not
listed above subsequently assume one or more of
those functions listed above, the Contractor shall be
bound by the provisions of this Subparagraph 7.6.2 as
though such individuals had been listed above.
7.7 The Contractor, within fifteen (15) days of
commencing the Work, shall submit to the Owner and
the Architect for their information, the Contractor's
schedule for completing the Work. The Conuactor's
schedule shall be revised no less frequently than
monthly (unless the parties otherwise agree in
writing) and shall be revised to reflect conditions
encountered from time to time and shall be related to
the entire Project. Each such revision shall be
furnished to the Owner and the Architect. Failure by
the Contractor to strictly comply with the provisions
of this Paragraph 7.7 shall constitute a material
breach of this Contract.
7.8 The Contractor shall continuously
maintain at the site, for the benefit of the owner and
the Architect, one record copy of this Contract
marked to record on a current basis changes,
selections and modifications made during
construction. Additionally, the Contractor shall
maintain at the site for the Owner and Architect the
approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and
other similar required submittals. Upon final
completion of the Work, all of these record
documents shall be delivered to the Owner.
7.9 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT
DATA AND SAMPLES
7.9.1 Shop Drawings, Product Dam, Samples
and other submittals from the Contractor do not
constitute Contract Documents. Their purpose is
merely to demonstrate the manner in which the
Contractor intends to implement the Work in
conformance with information received from the
Contract Documents.
7.9.2 The Contractor shall not perform any
portion of the Work requiting submittal and review of
Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples unless and
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 25S PARKWAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS 75019 Page 23
BID Q-0400-3 MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
until such submittal shall have been approved by the
Architect. Approval by the Architect, however, shall
not be evidence that Work installed pursuant thereto
conforms with the requirements of this Contract.
7.10 CLEANING THE SITE
AND THE PROJECT
7.10.1 The Contractor shall keep the site
reasonably clean during performance of the Work.
Upon final completion of the Work, the Contractor
shall clean the site and the Project and remove all
waste, rubbish, temporary structures, and other
materials together with all of the Contractor's
property therefrom. Contractor shall dispose of all
refuse at a Texas Natural Resource Conservation
Cornrmssion approved landfill. The Contractor shall
further restore all property damaged during the
prosecution of the Work and shall leave the site in a
clean and presentable condition. No additional
payment shall be made by the Owner for this work,
the compensation having been considered and
included in the contract price.
7.11 ACCESS TO WORK AND INSPECTIONS
7.11.1 The Owner and the Architect shall have
access to the Work at all times from commencement
of the Work through final completion. The
Contractor shall take whatever steps necessary to
provide access when requested. When reasonably
requested by the Owner or the Architect, the
Contractor shall perform or cause to be performed
such testing as may be necessary or appropriate to
insure suitability of the jobsite or the Work's
compliance with the Contract requirements.
7.12 INDEMNITY AND DISCLAIMER
7.12.1 OWNER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
OR RESPONSIBLE FOR, AND SHALL BE
INDEMNIFIED, DEFENDED, HELD HARMLESS
AND RELEASED BY CONTRACTOR FROM AND
AGAINST ANY AND ALL SUITS, ACTIONS,
LOSSES, DAMAGES, CLAIMS, OR LIABILITY
OF ANY CHARACTER, TYPE, OR
DESCRIPTION, INCLUDING ALL EXPENSES OF
LITIGATION, COURT COSTS, AND
ATTORNEY'S FEES FOR INJURY OR DEATH TO
ANY PERSON, OR INJURY OR LOSS TO ANY
PROPERTY, RECEIVED OR SUSTAINED BY
ANY PERSON OR PERSONS, INCLUDING THE
CONTRACTOR, OR PROPERTY, ARISING OUT
OF, OR OCCASIONED BY, DIRECTLY OR
INDIRECTLY, THE PEREOR.MANCE OF
CONTRACTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT,
INCLUDING CLAIMS AND DAMAGES ARISING
IN WHOLE OR IN PART FROM THE
NEGLIGENCE OF OWNER, WITHOUT,
HOWEVER, WAIVING ANY GOVERN-MENTAL
IMMUNITY AVAILABLE TO THE OWNER
UNDER TEXAS LAW AND WITHOUT WAIVING
ANY DEFENSES OF THE PARTIES UNDER
TEXAS LAW. THE PROVISIONS OF THIS
INDEMNI-FICATION ARE SOLELY FOR THE
BENEFIT OF THE PARTIES HERETO AND NOT
INTENDED TO CREATE OR GRANT ANY
RIGHTS, CONTRACTUAL OR OTHERWISE, TO
ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY. IT IS THE
EXPRESSED INTENT OF THE PARTIES TO
THIS AGREEMENT THAT THE INDEMNITY
PROVIDED FOR IN THIS CONTRACT IS AN
INDEMNITY EXTENDED BY CONTRACTOR TO
INDEMNIFY AND PROTECT OWNER FROM
THE CONSEQUENCES OF THE
CONTRACTOR'S AS WELL AS THE OWNER'S
NEGLIGENCE, WHETHER SUCH NEGLIGENCE
IS THE SOLE OR PARTIAL CAUSE OF ANY
SUCH INJURY, DEATH, OR DAMAGE.
7.12.2 The Contractor will secure and maintain
Contractual Liability insurance to cover this
indemmfication agreement that will be primary and
non-contributory as to any insurance maintained by
the Owner for its own benefit, including self-
insurance. In addition, Contractor shall obtain and
file with Owner a City of Coppell Standard
Certificate of Insurance evidencing the required
coverage.
7.12.3 In claims against any person or entity
indemnified under this Paragraph 7.12 by an
employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone
directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for
whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification
obligation under this Paragraph 7.12 shall not be
limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages,
compensation or benefits payable by or for the
Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers'
compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other
employee benefit acts.
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS 7S019 Page 24 ~
BID Q-0400-3
MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
7.13
NONDISCRIMINATION
7.13.1 The Contractor shall not discriminate in
any way against any person, employee or job
applicant on the basis of race, color, creed, national
original, religion, age, sex, or disability where
reasonable accommodations can be effected to enable
the person to perform the essential functions of the
job. The Contractor shall further insure that the
foregoing nondiscrimination requirement shall be
made a part and requirement of each subcontract on
this Project.
7.14
PREVAILING WAGE RATES
7.14.1 The Contractor shall comply in all
respects with all requirements imposed by any laws,
ordinances or resolutions applicable to the Project
with regard to the minimum prevailing wage rates for
all classes of employees, laborers, subcontractors,
mechanics, workmen and persons furnislfmg labor
and services to the Project. The City of Coppell has
adopted a Prevailing Wage Rate Schedule, available
to the Contractor by request, which specifies the
classes and wage rates to be paid to all persons. The
Contractor shall pay not less than the minimum wage
rates established thereby for each class, craft or type
of labor, workman, or mechanic employed in the
execution of this Contract. The failure of the
Contractor to comply with this requirement shall
result in the forfeiture to the City of Coppell of a sum
of not less than Sixty Dollars ($60.00) for each
person per day, or portion thereof, that such person is
paid less than the prevailing rate. Upon request by
the Owner, Contractor shall make available for
inspection and copying its books and records,
including but not limited to its payroll records,
account information and other documents as may be
required by the Owner to insure compliance with this
provision.
7.15 JOB SITE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
7.15.1 The Contractor shall at all times
exercise reasonable precautions for the safety of its
employees, laborers, subcontractors, mechanics,
workmen and others on and near the jobsite and shall
comply with all laws, ordinances, regulations, and
standards of federal, state and local safety laws and
regulations. The Contractor shall provide such
machinery guards, safe walk-ways, ladders, bridges,
and other safety devices as may be necessary or
appropriate to insure a safe and secure jobsite and
shall require its subcontractors to comply with this
requirement. The Contractor shall trmnediately
comply with any and all safety requirements imposed
by the Architect during the profess of the Work.
7.16 WARNING DEVICES AND BARRICADES
7.16.1 The Contractor shall furnish and maintain
such waming devices, barricades, lights, signs,
pavement markings, and other devices as may be
necessary or appropriate or required by the Architect
to protect persons or property in, near or adjacent to
the jobsite, including . No separate compensation
shall be paid to the Contractor for such measures.
Where the Work is being conducted in, upon or near
streets, alleys, sidewalks, or other rights-of-way, the
Contractor shall insure the placement, maintenance
and operation of any and all such warning devices as
may be required by the City of Coppell and shall do
so until no longer required by the City. Such devices
shall be in compliance with and conform to the
manual and specifications for the uniform system of
traffic control devices adopted by the Texas
Department of Transportation.
7.17 PROTECTION OF UTILITIES
AND OTHER CONTRACTORS
7.17. l The Contractor shall use best efforts to
leave undisturbed and uninterrupted all utilities and
utility services provided to the jobsite or which
presently exists at, above or beneath the location
where the Work is to be performed. In the event that
any utility or utility service is disturbed or damaged
during the progress of the Work, the Contractor shall
forthwith repair, remedy or restore the utility at
Contractor's sole expense.
7.17.2 The Contractor understands and
acknowledges that other contractors of the Owner or
of other entities may be present at the jobsite
performing other work unrelated to the Project. The
Contractor shall use best efforts to work around other
contractors without impeding the work of others
while still adhering to the completion date established
herein. In the event that the Contractor's work is or
may be delayed by any other person, the Contractor
shall immediately give notice thereof to the Architect
and shall request a written Change Order in
accordance with the procedures set forth by this
Contract. The Contractor's failure to provide such
notice and to request such Change Order shall
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS 75019 Page 25
BID Q-0400-3 MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
constitute a waiver of any and all claims associated
therewith,
ARTICLE VIII
CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION
8.1 THE ARCHITECT
8.1.1 When used in this Contract the term
"Architect" does not necessarily denote a duly
licensed, trained or certified architect; as used herein,
the term shall be used interchangeably and shall mean
a designated Architect, Engineer, or Contract
Administrator (who may not be an architect or
engineer) for the Owner, said person to be designated
or redesignated by the Owner prior to or at any time
during the Work hereunder. The Architect may be an
employee of the Owner or may be retained by the
Owner as an independent contractor but, in either
event, the Architect's duties and authority shall be as
set forth hercinafter. The Contractor understands and
agrees that it shall abide by the decisions and
instructions of the Architect notwithstanding the
contractual relationship between the Owner and
Architect. All of the Owner's instructions to the
Contractor shall be through the Architect.
In the event the Owner should find it necessary or
convenient to replace the Architect, the Owner shall
retain a replacement Architect and the status of the
replacement Architect shall be that of the former
Architect.
8.2
ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION
8.2.1 The Architect, unless otherwise directed
by the Owner in writing, will perform those duties
and discharge those responsibilities allocated to the
Architect as set forth in this Contract. The Architect
shall be the Owner's representative from the effective
date of this Contract until final payment has been
made.
8.2.2 The Owner and the Contractor shall
communicate with each other in the first instance
through the Architect.
8.2.3 The Architect shall be the initial
interpreter of the requirements of the drawings and
specifications and the judge of the performance
thereunder by the Contractor. The Architect shall
render written or graphic interpretations necessary for
the proper execution or progress of the Work with
reasonable promptness on request of the Contractor.
8.2.4 The Architect will review the
Contractor's Applications for Payment and will certify
to the Owner for payment to the Contractor, those
amounts then due the Contractor as provided in this
Contract.
8.2.5 The Architect shall have authority to
reject Work which is defective or does not conform to
the requirements of this Contract. If the Amhitect
deems it necessary or advisable, the Architect shall
have authority to require additional inspection or
testing of the Work for compliance with Contract
requirements.
8.2.6 The Architect will review and approve,
or take other appropriate action as necessary,
concerning the Contmctor's submittals including Shop
Drawings, Product Data and Samples. Such review,
approval or other action shall be for the sole purpose
of determining conformance with the design concept
and information given through the Contract
Documents.
8.2.7 ' The Architect will prepare Change
Orders and may authorize minor changes in the Work
by Field Order as provided elsewhere herein.
8.2.8 The Architect shall, upon written
request from the Contractor, conduct inspections to
determine the date of Substantial Completion and the
date of final completion, will receive and forward to
the Owner for the Owner's review and records,
written warranties and related documents required by
this Contract and will issue a fmal Certificate for
Payment upon compliance with the requirements of
this Contract.
8.2.9 The Architect's decisions in matters
relating to aesthetic effect shall be final if consistent
with the intent of this Contract.
8.3
CLAIMS BY THE CONTRACTOR
8.3.1 The Architect shall deterrmne all claims
and matters in dispute between the Contractor and
Owner with regard to the execution, progress, or
sufficiency of the Work or the interpretation of the
Contract Docun~ents, including but not limited to the
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD * COPPELL, TEXAS 15011
P~e26
I T
BID Q-0400-3
MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
plans and specifications. Any dispute shall be
submined in writing to the Architect within seven (7)
days of the event or occurrence or the first
appearance of the condition giving rise to the claim or
dispute who shall render a written decision within a
reasonable time thereafter. The Arehitect's decisions
shall be final and binding on the panics. In the event
that either party objects to the Architect's
determination as to any submitted dispute, that party
shall submit a written objection to the Architect and
the opposing party within ten (10) days of receipt of
the Architect's written determination in order to
preserve the objection. Failure to so object shall
constitute a waiver of the objection for all purposes.
8.3.2 Pending final resolution of any claim of
the Contractor, the Contractor shall diligently proceed
with performance of this Contract and the Owner
shall continue to make payments to the Contractor in
accordance with this Cnnuact.
8.3.3 CLAIMS FOR CONCEALED, LATENT OR
UNKNOWN CONDITIONS - The Contractor expressly
represents that it has been provided with an adequate
oppommity to inspect the Project site and thoroughly
review the Contract Documents and plans and
specifications prior to submission of its bid and the
Owner's acceptance of the bid. Subject to the
conditions hereof, Contractor assumes full
responsibility and risk for any concealed, latent or
unknown condition which may affect the Work. No
claims for extra work or additional compensation
shall be made by Contractor in connection with
concealed, latent or unknown conditions except as
expressly provided herein. Should concealed, latent
or unknown conditions encountered in the
performance of the Work (a) below the surface of the
ground or (b) in an existing structure be at variance
with the conditions indicated by this Contract, or
should unknown conditions of an nnusnal nature
differing materially fi'om those ordinarily encountered
in the area and generally recognized as inherent in
Work of the character provided for in this Contract,
be encountered, the Contract Price shall be equitably
adjusted by Change Order upon the written notice and
claim by either party made within seven (7) days after
the first observance of the condition. As a condition
precedent to the Owner having any liability to the
Contractor for concealed or unknown conditions, the
Contractor must give the Owner and the Architect
written notice of, and an opportunity to observe, the
condition prior to disturbing it. The failure by the
Contractor to make the written notice and claim as
provided in this Subparagraph shall constitute a
waiver by the Contractor of any claim arising out of
or relating to such concealed, latent or unknown
condition and the Contractor thereby assumes all risks
and additional costs associated therewith.
8.3.4 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COSTS - If the
Contractor wishes to make a claim for an increase in
the Contract Price, as a condition precedent to any
liability of the Owner therefor, the Contractor shall
give the Architect written notice of such claim within
seven (7) days after the occurrence of the event, or
the first appearance of the condition, giving rise to
such claim. Such notice shall be given by the
Contractor before proceeding to execute any
additional or changed Work. The failure by the
Contractor to give such notice and to give such notice
prior to executing the Work shall constitute a waiver
of any claim for additional compensation.
8.3.4.1 In connection with any claim by the
Contractor against the Owner for compensation in
excess of the Contract Price, any liability of the
Owner for the Contractor's costs shall be strictly
limited to direct costs incurred by the Contractor and
shall in no event include indirect costs or
consequential damages of the Contractor. The Owner
shall not be liable to the Contractor for claims of third
parties, including Subcontractors. The Owner shall
not be liable to the Contractor for any claims based
upon delay to the Contractor for any reason
whatsoever including any act or neglect on the part of
the Owner.
8.3.5 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL TIME - If the
Contractor is delayed in progressing any task which at
the time of the delay is then critical or which during
the delay becomes critical, as the sole result of any
act or neglect to act by the Owner or someone acting
in the Owner's behalf, or by changes ordered in the
Work, unusual delay in transportation, unusually
adverse weather conditions not reasonably
anticipated, fire or any causes beyond the Contractors
control, then the date for achieving Substantial
Completion of the Work shall be extended upon the
written notice and claim of the Contractor to the
Owner and the Architect, for such reasonable time as
the Architect may determine. Any notice and claim
for an extension of time by the Contractor shall be
made not more than seven (7) days after the
occurrence of the event or the first appearance of the
condition giving rise to the claim and shall set forth in
detail the Contractor's basis for requiring additional
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 pARKVVAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS 79019 Page 27
BID Q-0400-3 MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
time in which to complete the Project. In the event
the delay to the Contractor is a continuing one, only
one notice and claim for additional time shall be
necessary. If the Contractor fails to make such claim
as required in this Subparagraph, any claim for an
extension of time shall be waived. The procedures
and remedies provided by this provision shall be the
sole remedy of Contractor and Contractor shall not
assert nor be entitled to any additional delays or
damages associated therewith.
8.4 FIELD ORDERS
8.4.1 The Architect shall have authority to
order minor changes in the Work not involving a
change in the Contract Price or in Contract Time and
not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract. Such
changes shall be effected by Field Order and shall be
binding upon the Contractor. The Contractor shall
carry out such Field Orders promptly.
8.5 MEDIATION
8.5.1 In the event that a dispute arises under
the terms of this Contract, following an adverse
determination by the Architect and proper
preservation of the issue as required herein, the
parties agree to submit to mediation. In such event,
the parties shall agree to a designated person to serve
as mediator and each party shall be responsible for
payment of one-half of the total mediation fees. The
parties shall submit the dispute to mediation as soon
as practical and in no event later than one (1) year
after the Architect's written decision on the matter. At
least one designated representative of each party must
attend and participate in good faith in an effort to
resolve the matters in dispute.
8.5.2 In no event shall the foregoing provision
justify or authorize any delay in the progress of the
Work; the parties shall abide by the decision of the
Architect in accornplistfmg the timely completion of
the Project.
ARTICLE IX
SUBCONTRACTORS
9.1 DEFINITION
9.1.1 A Subcontractor is an entity which has a
direct contract with the Contractor to perform a
portion of the Work. No Subcontractor shall be in
privity with the Owner.
9.2
AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS
9.2.1 Upon execution of the Contract, the
Contractor shall furnish the Owner, in writing, the
names of persons or entities proposed by the
Contractor to act as a Subcontractor on the Project.
The Owner shall promptly reply to the Contractor, in
writing, stating any objections the Owner may have to
such proposed Subcontractor. The Contractor shall
not enter into a subcontract with a proposed
Subcontractor with reference to whom the Owner has
made timely objection. The Contractor shall not be
required to subcontract with any party to whom the
Contractor has objection.
9.2.2 All subcontracts shall afford the
Contractor fights against the Subcontractor which
correspond to those rights afforded to the Owner
against the Contractor herein, including those fights
afforded to the Owner by Subparagraph 12.2.1 below.
All subcontracts shall incorporate by reference the
provisions hereof and shall provide that no clam,
causes or demands shall be made by any
Subcontractor against the Owner.
9.2.3 The Contractor shall indemnify, defend
and hold harmless the Owner from and against any
and all claims, demands, causes of action, damage,
and liability asserted or made against the Owner by or
on behalf of any Subconu'actor.
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARKINAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS 75019
Page 28
I T
BID Q-0400-3
MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
ARTICLE X
CHANGES IN THE WORK
10.1
CHANCES PERMITTED
10.1.1 Changes in the Work within the general
scope of this Contract, consisting of additions,
deletions, revisions, or any combination thereof, may
be ordered without invalidating this Contract, by
Change Order or by Field Order.
10.1.2 Changes in the Work shall be performed
trader applicable provisions of this Contract and the
Contractor shall proceed promptly with such changes.
10.2
CHANGE ORDER DEFINED
10.2.1- Change Order shall mean a wriHen
order to the Contractor executed by the Owner and
the Architect, issued after execution of this Contract,
authorizing and directing a change in the Work or an
adjusnnent in the Contract Price or the Contract
Time, or any combination thereof. The Contract
Price and the Contract Time may be changed only by
wrinen Change Order.
10.3 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
10.3.1 Any change in the Contract Price
resulting from a Change Order shall be determined as
follows: (a) by mutual agreement between the Owner
and the Contractor as evidenced by (1) the change in
the Contract Price being set forth in the Change
Order, (2) such change in the Contract Price, together
with any conditions or requirements related thereto,
being initialed by both parties and (3) the Contractor's
execution of the Change Order, or (b) if no mutual
agreement occurs between the Owner and the
Contractor, then, as provided in Subparagraph 10.3.2
below.
10.3.2 If no mutual agreement occurs between
the Owner and the Contractor as contemplated in
Subparagraph 10.3.1 above, the change in the
Contract Price, if any, shall then be determined by the
Architect on the basis of the reasonable expenditures
or savings of those performing, deleting or revising
the Work attributable to the change, including, in the
case of an increase or decrease in the Contract Price,
a reasonable allowance for direct job site overhead
and profit. In such case, the Contractor shall present,
in such form and with such content as the Owner or
the Architect requires, an itemized accounting of such
expenditures or savings, plus appropriate supporting
data for inclusion in a Change Order. Reasonable
expenditures or savings shall be limited to the
following: reasonable costs of materials, supplies, or
equipment including delivery costs, reasonable costs
of labor, including social security, old age and
unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by
agreement or custom, and workers' compensation
insurance, reasonable rental costs of machinery and
equipment exclusive of hand tools whether rented
from the Contractor or others, reasonable costs of
preminn~ for all bonds and insurance, permit fees,
and sales, use or other taxes related to the Work, and
reasonable cost of direct supervision and jobsite field
office overhead directly attributable to the change. In
no event shall any expenditure or savings associated
with the Contractor's home office or other non-jobsite
overhead expense be included in any change in the
Contract Price. Pending final determination of
reasonable expenditures or savings to the Owner,
payments on account shall be made to the Contractor
on the Architect's Certificate for Payment.
103.3 If unit prices are provided in the
Contract, and if the quantities contemplated are so
changed in a proposed Change Order that application
of such unit prices to the quantities of Work proposed
will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or to the
Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be
equitably adjusted.
10.4 MINOR CHANGES
10.4.1 The Architect shall have authority to
order minor changes hi the Work not involving a
change in the Conrtact Price or an extension of the
Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of
this Contract. Such minor changes shall be made by
Written Field Order, and shall be binding upon the
owner and the Contractor. The Contractor shall
promptly carry out such written Field Orders.
10.5
EFFECT OF EXECUTED
CHANGE ORDER
10.5.1 The execution of a Change Order by the
Contractor shall constitute conclusive evidence of the
Contractor's agreement to the ordered changes in the
Work, this Contract as thus amended, the Contract
Price and the Contract Time. The Contractor, by
executing the Change Order, waives and forever
CITY OF COPPELL * PURCHASING DEPARTMENT * 255 PARK1NAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS 75019 Page 29
BID Q-0400-3 MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
releases any claim against the Owner for additional
time or compensation for matters relating to or arising
out of or resulting from the Work included within or
affected by the executed Change Order.
10.6
NOTICE TO SURETY; CONSENT
10.6.1 The Contractor shall notify and obtain
the consent and approval of the Contractor*s surety
with reference to all Change Orders if such notice.
consent or approval are required by the Contractor's
surety or by law. The Contractor's execution of the
Change Order shall constitute the Contractor's
warranty to the Owner that the surety has been
notified of and consents tu, such Change Order and
the surety shall be conclusively deemed to have been
notified of such Change Order and to have expressly
consented thereto.
ARTICLE XI
UNCOVERING AND CORRECTING WORK
11.1
UNCOVERING WORK
11.1.1 If any of the Work is covered contrary
to the Architect's request or to any provisions of this
Contract, it shall, if required by the Architect or the
Owner, be uncovered for the Architect's inspection
and shall be properly replaced at the Contractor's
expense without change in the Contract Time.
11.1.2 If any of the Work is covered in a
manner not inconsistent with Subparagraph 11.1.1
above, it shall, if required by the Architect or Owner,
be uncovered for the Architect's inspection. If such
Work conforms strictly with this Contract, costs of
uncovering and proper replacemere shall by Change
Order be charged to the Owner. If such Work does
not strictly conform with this Contract, the Contractor
shall pay the costs of uncovering and proper
replacement.
11.2 CORRECTING WORK
11.2.1 The Contractor shall immediately
proceed to correct Work rejected by the Architect as
defective or failing to conform to this Confract. The
Contractor shall pay all costs and expenses associated
with correcting such rejected Work, including any
additional testing and inspections, and reimbursement
to the Owner for the Architect's services and expenses
made necessary thereby.
11.2.2 If within one (1) year after Substantial
Completion of the Work any of the Work is found to
be defective or not in accordance with this Contract,
the Contractor shall correct it promptly upon receipt
of written notice from the Owner. This obligation
shall survive final payment by the Owner and
termination of this Contract. With respect to Work
first performed and completed after Substantial
Completion, this one year obligation to specifically
correct defective and nonconforming Work shall be
extended by the period of time which elapses between
Substantial Completion and completion of the subject
Work.
11.2.3 Nothing contained in this Paragraph
11.2 shall establish any period of limitation with
respect to other obligations which the Contractor has
under this Contract. Establishment of the one year
time period in Subparagraph 11.2.2 relates only to the
duty of the Contractor to specifically correct the
Work.
11.3 OWNER MAY ACCEPT DEFECTIVE
OR NONCONFORMING WORK
I 1.3.1 If the Owner chooses to accept
defective or nonconforming Work, the Owner may do
so. In such event, the Contract Price shall be reduced
by the greater of (a) the reasonable cost of removing
and correcting the defective or nonconforming Work,
and (b) the difference between the fair market value
of the Project as constructed and the fair market value
of the Project had it not been constructed in such a
manner as to include defective or nonconforming
Work. If the remaining portion of the unpaid
Contract Price, if any, is insufficient to compensate
the Owner for its acceptance of defective or
nonconforming Work, the Contractor shall, upon
written demand from the Owner, pay the Owner such
remaining compensation for accepting defective or
nonconforming Work.
ARTICLE XII
CONTRACT TERMINATION
12.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR
12.1.1 If the Work is stopped for a period of
ninety (90) days by an order of any court or other
public authority, or as a result of an act of the
Government, through no fault of the Contractor or
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT * 255 PARKWAY GOULEVARD * COPPELL, TEXAS 75019
Page3o
BID Q-0400-3
MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
any person or entity working directly or indirectly for
the Contractor, the Contractor may, upon ten (10)
days' written notice to the Owner and the Architect,
temunate performance under this Contract and
recover from the Owner payment for the actual
reasonable expenditures of the Contractor (as limited
in Subparagraph 10.3.2 above) for all Work executed
and for materials, equipment, tools, construction
equipment and machinery actually purchased or
rented solely for the Work, less any salvage value of
any such items.
12.1.2 If the Owner shall persistently or
repeatedly fail to perform any material obligation to
the Contractor for a period of fifteen (15) days after
receiving written notice from the Contractor of its
intent to terminate hereunder, the Contractor may
terminate performance under this Contract by written
notice to the Architect and the Owner. In such event,
the Contractor shall be entitled to recover from the
Owner as though the Owner had terminated the
Contractor's performance under this Contract for
convenience pursuant to Subparagraph 12.2.1
hereunder.
12.2
TERMINATION BY THE OWNER
12.2.1 FOR CONVENIENCE
12.2.1.1 The Owner may for any reason
whatsoever terminate performance under this
Contract by the Contractor for convenience. The
Owner shall give written notice of such termination to
the Contractor specifying when termination becomes
effective.
12.2.1.2 The Contractor shall incur no further
obligations in connection with the Work and the
Contractor shall stop Work when such termination
becomes effective. The Contractor shall also
terminate outstanding orders and subcontracts. The
Contractor shall settle the liabilities and claims
arising out of the termination of subcontracts and
orders. The Owner may direct the Contractor to
assign the Contractors right, title and interest under
terrmnated orders or subcontracts to the Owner or its
designee.
12.2.1.3 The Contractor shall transfer title and
deliver to the Owner such completed or partially
completed Work and materials, equipment, parts,
fixtures, information and Contract rights as the
Contractor has.
12.2.1.4 (a)
The Contractor shall submit a
termination claim to the Owner and
the Architect specifying the mounts
due because of the termination for
convenience together with costs,
pricing or other data required by the
Architect. If the Contractor fails to
file a termination claim within one (1)
year from the effective date of
termination, the Owner shall pay the
Contractor, an amount derived in
accordance with subparagraph (c)
below.
(b)
The Owner and the Contractor may
agree m the compensation, if any, due
to the Contractor hereunder.
(c)
Absent agreement to the amount due
to the Contractor, the Owner shall pay
the Contractor the following amounts:
(i)
Contract prices for labor, materials,
equipment and other services
accepted under this Contract;
(ii)
Reasonable costs incurred in
preparing to perform and in
performing the terminated portion of
the Work, and in terminating the
Contractur's performance, plus a fair
and reasonable allowance for
overhead and profit thereon (such
profit shall not include anticipated
profit or consequential damages),
provided however, that if it appears
that the Contractor would have not
profited or would have sustained a
loss if the entire Contract would have
been completed, no profit shall be
allowed or included and the amount
of compensation shall be reduced to
reflect the anticipated rate of loss, if
any;
(iii) Reasonable costs of settling and
paying clam arising out of the
termination of subcontracts or orders
pursuant to Subparagraph 12.2.1.2 of
this Paragraph. These costs shall not
include amounts paid in accordance
with other provisions hereof.
CITY OF COPPELL ' PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 25S PARKWAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS ?S0'I9 Page
BID Q-0400-3 MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
The total sum to be paid the Contractor under this
Subparagraph 12.2.1 shall not exceed the total
Contract Price, as properly adjusted, reduced by the
amount of payments otherwise made, and shall in no
event include duplication of payment.
12.2.2 FOR CAUSE
12.2.2.1 If the Contractor persistently or
repeatedly refuses or fails to prosecute the Work in a
timely manner, abandons the jobsite and fails to
resume work within five (5) days of written notice
thereof by the Owner, fails to grant or allow access to
the jobsite by the Owner or Architect, fails to supply
enough properly skilled workers, supervisory
personnel or proper equipment or materials, fails to
make prompt payment to Subcontractors or for
materials or labor, persistently disregards laws,
ordinances, roles, regulations or orders of any public
authority having jurisdiction, or otherwise is guilty of
a violation of a material provision of this Contract,
then the Owner may by written notice to the
Contractor, without prejudice to any other right or
remedy, terrmnate the employment of the Contractor
and take possession of the site and of all materials,
equipment, toolsl construction equipment and
machinery thereon owned by the Contractor and may
finish the Work by whatever methods it may deem
expedient. In such case, the Contractor shall not be
entitled to receive any further payment until the Work
is finished.
12.2.2.2 If the unpaid balance of the Contract
Price does not exceed the cost of finishing the work,
including compensation for the Architect's additional
services and expenses made necessary thereby, such
difference shall be paid by the Contractor to the
Owner. This obligation for payment shall survive the
ternunation of the Contract.
12.2.2.3 In the event the employment of the
Contractor is terminated by the Owner for cause
pursuant to Subparagraph 12.2.2 and it is
subsequently determined by a Court of competent
jurisdiction that such termination was without cause,
such termination shall thereupon be deemed a
Terrmnation for Convenience under Subparagraph
12.2.1 and the provisions of Subparagraph 12.2.1
shall apply.
13.1
ARTICLE XIII
INSURANCE
CONTRACTOR SHALL
MAINTAIN INSURANCE
13.1.1 The Contractor at his own expense shall
purchase, maintain and keep in force during the life
of this contract, adequate insurance that will protect
the Contractor and/or any Additional Insured from
claims which may arise out of or result from
operations under this contract. The insurance required
shall provide adequate protections from all claims,
whether such operations be by the Contractor or by
any Additional Insured or by any Subcontractor or by
anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of
them, or by anyone whose acts of any of them may be
liable and from any special hazards, such as blasting,
which may be encountered in the performance of this
contract in the amounts as shown below in Paragraph
13.2.1.
13.1.2 The Contractor shall not commence
work on any Contract in the City of Coppell until the
Contractor has obtained all the insurance required
under this paragraph and such insurance has been
approved by the City.
13.2
TYPES AND AMOUNTS OF
CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE
13.2.1. The Contractor shall furnish and
maintain during the life of the contract adequate
Worker's Compensation and Commercial General
Liability (Public) Insurance in such amonnts as
follows:
Type of lnsurance
Amount
Worker's Compensation as set forth in the Worker's
Compensation Act.
Commercial General
$1,000,000 Each
Accident/Occurrence,
Liability (Public)
$1,000,000 Aggregate
$1,000,000 Products &
Completed Operations
Aggregate.
Owner' s Protective
Liability Insurance
$600,000 per occurrence
$1,000,000 aggregate
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS 75019
Page32
i 7
BID Q-0400-3
MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
Excess/Umbrella Liability $1,000,000 per occurrence
w/drop down coverage
Endorsement CG 2503
Automobile Liability
Amendment Aggregate
Limit of Insurance per
Project or Owner's and
Contractor's Protective
Liability Insurance for the
Project.
$500,000 Combined
single limit per
occurrence.
13.3 ADDITIONAL INSURED
The Owner shall be named as an additional insured
on the Commercial General Liability (Public),
Owner's Protective Liability, and Excess/Umbrella
Liability Insurance Policies furnished by the
Contractor.
13.4
WRITTEN NOTIFICATION
Each insurance policy shall contain a provision
requiring that thirty (30) days prior to expiration,
cancellation, non-renewal or any material change in
coverage, a notice there of shall be given by certified
mail to the Division of Purchasing, City of Coppell,
255 Parkway Blvd., Coppell, Texas, 75019.
13.5 PREMIUMS AND ASSESSMENTS
Companies issuing the insurance policies shall have
no recourse against the City for payment of any
premimns or assessments for any deductibles which
are at the sole responsibility and risk of the
Contractor.
13.6
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
Proof that the insurance is in force shall be timfished
to the City on City of Coppell Standard Certificate of
Insurance Forms. In the event any insurance policy
shown on the Certificate of Insurance has an
expiration date that is prior to the completion and
final acceptance of the project by the City of Coppell,
the contractor shall fur~zsh the City proof of identical
continued coverage no later than thirty(30) days prior
to the expiration date shown on the Certificate of
Insurance.
13.7 PRIMARY COVERAGE
The coverages provided herein shall be primary and
noncontributory with any other insurance maintained
by the City of Coppell, Texas, for its benefit,
including self insurance.
13.8 WORKER'S COMPENSATION
INSURANCE COVERAGE
13.8.1 The Contractor shall:
(1)
provide coverage for its employees
providing services on a project, for the
duration of the project based on proper
reporting of classification codes and
payroll amounts and filing of any coverage
agreements;
(2)
provide a certificate of coverage showing
workers' compensation coverage to the
governmental entity prior to beginning
work on the project;
(3)
provide the governmental entity prior to
the end of the coverage period, a new
certificate of coverage showing extension
of coverage, if the coverage period shown
on the contractor's current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the
project;
(4)
obtain from each person providing
services on a project, and provide to the
governmental entity:
(A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that
person beginning work on the project,
so the governmental entity will have
on file certificates of coverage
showing coverage for all persons
providing services on the project; and
(B) no later than seven days after receipt
by the contractor, a new certificate of
coverage showing extension of
coverage, if the coverage period
shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of
the project;
(5)
retain all required certificates of coverage
on file for the duration of the project and
for one year thereafter;
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS 750'19 Page 33
BID Q-0400-3 MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
(6)
(7)
notify the governmental entity in writing
by certified mail or personal delivery,
within 10 days after the contractor knew
or should have known, of any change that
materially affects the provision of
coverage of any person providing services
on the project;
post a notice on each project site
infornung all persons providing services
on the project that they are required to be
covered, and stating how a person may
verify current coverage and report failure
to provide coverage. This notice does not
satisfy other posting requirements
imposed by the Act or other commission
roles. This notice must be printed with a
title in at least 30 point bold type and text
in at least 19 point normal type, and shall
be in both English and Spanish and any
other language common to the worker
population. The text for the notices shall
be the following text provided by the
Texas Worker's Compensation Comm-
ission on the sample notice, without any
additional words or changes:
REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION
COVERAGE
"The law requires that each person working on this
site or providing services related to this construction
project must be covered by workers' compensation
insmance. This includes persons providing, hauling,
or delivering equipment or materials, or providing
labor or transportation or other service related to the
project, regardless of the identity of their employer or
status as an employee."
"Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission
at 512-440-3789 to receive information on the legal
requirement for coverage, to verify whether your
employer has provided the required coverage, or to
report an employers failure to provide coverage."
and
(A)
(B)
(c)
(D)
(E)
(F)
(8) contractually require each person with (G)
whom it contracts to provide services on a
project, to:
provide coverage based on proper
reporting of classification codes
and payroll amounts and filing of
any coverage agreements for all of
its employees providing services on
the project, for the duration of the
project;
provide a certificate of coverage to
the contractor prior to that person
beginning work on the project;
include in all contracts to provide
services on the project the language
in subsection (e)(3) of this rule;
provide the Contractor, prior to the
end of the coverage period, a new
certificate of coverage showing
extension of coverage, if the
coverage period shown on the
current certificate of coverage ends
during the duration of the project;
obtain from each other person with
whom it contracts, and provide to
the Contractor:
(i)
a certificate of coverage,
prior to the other person
beginning work on the
project; and
(ii)
prior to the end of the
coverage period, a new
certificate of coverage
showing extension of the
coverage period, if the
coverage period shown on
the current certificate of
coverage ends during the
duration of the project;
retain all required certificates of
coverage on file for the duration of
the project and for one year
thereafter;
notify the governmental emity in
writing by certified mail or personal
delivery, within 10 days after the
person knew or should have known,
of any change that materially
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS 75019
Page 34
BID Q-0400-3
MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
affects the provision of coverage of
any person providing services on
the project; and
contractually require each other
person with whom it contracts, to
perform as required by sub-
paragraphs (A) (H) of this
paragraph, with the certificate of
coverage to be provided to the
person for whom they are providing
services.
ARTICLE XIV
MISCELLANEOUS
14.1
LAWS AND ORDINANCES
14.1.1 The Contractor shall at all
times and in all respects observe and
comply with all federal, state and local
laws, ordinances, and regulations
applicable to the Project and Work. The
Contractor shall further insure that all
Subcontractors observe and comply
with said laws, ordinances and
regulations.
14.2 GOVER/NING LAW
14.2.1 The Contract shall be governed by the
laws of the State of Texas. Venue for any causes of
action arising under the terms or provisions of this
Contract or the Work to be performed hereunder shall
be in the courts of Dallas County, Texas.
14.3
SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS
14.3.1 The Owner and Contractor bind
themselves, their successors, assigns and legal
representatives to the other party hereto and to
successors, assigns and legal representatives of such
other party in respect to covenants, agreements and
obligations contained in this Contract. The
Contractor shall not assign this Contract without
written consent of the Owner.
14.4 SURETY BONDS
14.4.1 If the Contract Price exceeds the sum of
$25,000.00, the Contractor shall furnish separate
performance and payment bonds to the Owner,
according to the requirements set out in the bid
documents and state statutes to guaranty full and
faithful performance of the Contract and the full and
final payment of all persons supplying labor or
materials to the Project. Each bond required by the
bid documents or state statute shall set forth a penal
sum in an amount not less than the Contract Price.
Each bond fumished by the Contractor shall
incorporate by reference the terms of this Contract as
fully as though they were set forth verbatim in such
bonds. In the event the Contract Price is adjusted by
Change Order executed by the Contractor, the penal
sum of both the performance bond and the payment
bond shall be deemed increased by like amount. The
performance and payment bonds furnished by the
Contractor shall be in form suitable to the Owner and
shall be executed by a surety, or sureties, reasonably
suitable to the Owner and authorized to do business
in the State of Texas by the State Board of Insurance.
14.4.2 If the Contract Price exceeds the sum of
$25,000.00, the Contractor, upon execution of the
Contract and prior to commencement of the Work,
shall furnish to the Owner a two-year maintenance
bond in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of
the Contract Price covering the guaranty and
maintenance prescribed herein, written by an
approved surety authorized and duly licensed to
conduct business in the State of Texas. The cost of
said maintenance bond shall be included in the
Contractor's unit bid prices and shall be paid by the
Contractor.
14.5 SEVERABILITY
14.5.1 The provisions of this Contract are
herein declared to be severable; in the event that any
term, provision or part hereof is determined to be
invalid, void or unenforceable, such determination
shall not affect the validity or enforceability of the
remaining terms, provisions and parts, and this
Contract shall be read as if the invalid, void or
unenforeeable portion had not be included herein.
14.6 AMENDMENTS
14.6.1 This Contract may be amended by the
parties only by a written agreement duly executed by
--- CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 pARK1NAy BOULEVARD · COPPELt., TEXAS 75019 Page 35
BID Q-0400-3 MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
both parties. The failure of the Owner to object to
any nonperformance or nonconforming work or to
enforce any provision hereof shall in no event be
regarded as or construed to be a waiver, release or
modification of any term or provision in this
Contract, nor shall such failure to object or enforce
estop the Owner from insisting on strict compliance
with this Contract or from recovering damages, costs
or expenses arising as a result of such
nonperformance or nonconforming work.
14.7 NOTICES
14.6.1 All notices required by this Contract
shall be presumed received when deposited in the
mail properly addressed to the other party or
Architect at the address set forlh herein or set forth in
a written designation of change of address delivered
to all parties and the Architect.
CITY OF COPPELL ' PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARKSNAY BOULEVARD * COPPELL, TEXAS 1501S
BID Q-0400-3
MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
EXECUTED in single or multiple originals, this __ day of
CITY OF COPPELL
CONTRACTOR:
,20
-- APPROVED:
Mayor
ATTEST:
City Secretary
(Signature)
(Type/Prim Name and Title)
(Street Address)
(City/State/Zip)
2
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD ° COPPELL, TEXAS
Page 37
BID Q-0400-3 MACARTHUR PARK CONSTRUCTION
CORPORATE ACKNOWLEDGMENT
THE STATE OF
COUNTY OF
BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, a Notary Public in and for said County and State, on this day
personally appeared:
(Print Name) (Print Title)
of , the Contractor designated hereinabove, known to me to be the
person and officer whose name is subscribed to the foregoing instrument and acknowledged to me that
the same was the act of the said Contractor, a corporation, that he was duly authorized to perform the
same by appropriate resolution of the board of directors of such corporation and that he executed the
same as the act and deed of such corporation for the purposes and consideration therein expressed, and
in the capacity therein stated.
GIVEN UNDER MY HAND AND SEAL OF OFFICE this the __
200__.
day of , A.D.,
Notary Public In and For
County,
My Commission expires:
[V1AYOR'S ACKNOWLEDGMENT
THE STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF DALLAS
BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, a Notary Public in and for said County and State,
on this day personally appeared the undersigned, Mayor of the City of Coppell, Texas, a municipal
corporation, known to me to be the person and officer whose name is subscribed to the foregoing
instrument and acknowledged to me that the same was the act of the said City of Coppeli, Texas, a
municipal corporation, that he/she was duly authorized to perform the same by appropriate resolution of
the City Council of the City of Coppell and that he/she executed the same as the act of the said City for
purpose and consideration therein expressed, and in the capacity therein stated.
GIVEN UNDER MY HAND AND SEAL OF OFFICE this __ day of
200__.
Notary Public in and for'the State of Texas
My Commission expires:
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCHASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD · COPPELL, TEXAS 160'19
Page 38
i T
BID NO. Q 0400-03
00610
PERFORMANCE BOND
STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF DALLAS §
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That
whose address
is
hereinafter called Principal, and
a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of , and fully license~l
to transact business in the State of Texas, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the CITY OF COPPELL,
TEXAS, e municipal corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas, hereinaf~er
called "Owner," in the penal sum of
dollars ($ ) plus
percent of the stated penal sum as an additional sum of money representing additional court expenses,
attorney's fees, and liquidated damages arising out of or connected with the below identified Contract in lawful
money of the United States, to be paid in Dallas County, Texas, for the payment of which sum well and truly
to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and successors jointly and severally,
firmly by these presents. This Bond shall automatically be increased by the amount of any Change Order or
Supplemental Agreement which increases the Contract price, but in no event shall a Change Order or
Supplemental Agreement which reduces the Contract price decrease the penal sum of this Bond.
THE OBLIGATION TO PAY SAME is conditioned as follows: Whereas, the Principal entered into a
certain Contract with the City of Coppall, the Owner, dated the day of . A.D., 2000,
which is made a part hereof by reference, for the
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall well, truly and faithfully perform and fulfill all of the
undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreements of said Contract in accordance with the plans,
specifications and Contract Documents during the original term thereof and any extension thereof which may
be granted by the Owner, with or without notice to the Surety, and during the life of any guaranty or warranty
required under this Contract, and shall also well and truly perform and fulfill all the undertakings, covenants,
terms, conditions and agreements of any and all duly authorized modifications to the Surety being hereby
waived; and, if the Principal shall repair and/or replace all defects due to faulty material and workmanship that
appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of final completion and final acceptance of the Work by
Owner; and, if the Principal shall fully indemnity and save harmless the Owner from all costs and damages
which Owner may suffer by reason of failure to so perform herein and shall fully reimburse and repay Owner
all outlay and expense which the Owner may incur in making good any default or deficiency, then this
obligation shall be void; otherwise, it shall remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED FURTHER, that if any legal action be filed on this Bond, exclusive Venue shall lie in
Dallas County, Texas.
AND PROVIDED FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees
that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the Work to be
performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in anywise affect its obligation on
this Bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the
terms of the Contract, or to the Work or to the Specifications.
00610 - 1
BID NO. Q 04004)3
This Bond is given pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160 of Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes, and
any other applicable statues of the State of Texas.
The undersigned and designated agent is heroby designated by the Surety herein as the Resident
Agent in Tarrant County or Dallas County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom
service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship, as provided by Article 7.19-1 of the
Insurance Code, Vemon's Annotated Civil Statutes of the State of Texas.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in copies, each one of which shall be
deemed an original, this, the day of ,2000.
PRINCIPAL
ATTEST:
By:
Name:
Title:
SURETY
ATTEST:
By:
Name:
Title:
The Resident Agent of the Surety in Tarrant or Dallas County, Texas, for delivery of notice and service of the
process is:
Name:
Street Address:
NOTE: Date of Performance Bond must be date of Contract. If Resident Agent is not a corporation, give a
person's name.
4017
00610 - 2
BID NO. Q 0400-03
00620
PAYMENT BOND
STATE OF TEXAS §
COUNTY OF DALLAS §
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That
whose address
is
hereinafter called Principal, and .
a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of , and fully licensed
to transact business in the State of Texas, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the CITY OF COPPELL,
TEXAS, a municipal corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas, hereinafter
called "Owner," in the penal sum of
dollars ($ ) in lawful money of the
United States, to be paid in Dallas County, Texas, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made,
we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and successors jointly and severally, firmly by these
presents. This Bond shall automatically be increased by the amount of any Change Order or Supplemental
Agreement which increases the Contract price, but in no event shall a Change Order or Supplemental
Agreement which reduces the Contract price decrease the penal sum of this Bond.
THE OBLIGATION TO PAY SAME is conditioned as follows: Whereas, the Principal entered into a
certain Contract with the City of Coppell, the Owner. dated the day of , A.D., 2000,
which is made a part hereof by reference. for the
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall well, truly and faithfully perform and fulfill its duties and
make prompt payment to all persons, firms, subcontractors, corporations and claimants supplying labor and/or
material in the prosecution of the Work provided for in said Contract and any and all duly authorized
modifications of said Contract that may hereafter be made, notice of which modification to the Surety is hereby
expressly waived; the this obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED FURTHER, that if any legal action be filed on this Bond. exclusive Venue shall lie in
Dallas County, Texas.
AND PROVIDED FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees
that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to Contract or to the Work performed thereunder, or
the Plans, Specifications, Drawings. etc., accompanying the same, shall in anywise affect its obligation on this
Bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the
terms of the Contract, or to the Work to be performed thereunder.
This Bond is given pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160 of Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes, and
any other applicable statues of the State of Texas.
The undersigned and designated agent is hereby designated by the Surety herain as the Resident
Agent in Tarrant County or Dallas County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom
service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship, as provided by Article 7,1 g-1 of the
Insurance Code, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes of the State of Texas.
00620-1
BID NO. Q 0400-03
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in copies, each one of which shall
be deemed an original, this, the day of .2000.
PRINCIPAL
ATTEST:
By:
Name:
Title:
SURETY
ATTEST:
By:
Name:
Title:
The Resident Agent of the Surety in Tarrant or Dallas County, Texas, for delivery of notice and service of the
process is:
Name:
Street Address:
NOTE: Date of Payment Bond must be date of Contract. If Resident Agent is not a corporation, give a
person's name.
00620 - 2
THE STATE OF TEXAS §
COUNTY OF DALLAS §
THAT
BID NO. Q 0400.03
Maintenance Bond
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
of County, Texas hereina~er referred to as
"PRINCIPAL," and , a corporation organized under the laws of the State
of and authorized to do business in the State of Texas, hereinafter referred to as
"SURETY," are held and firmly bound unto the CITY OF COPPELL. TEXAS, a municipal corporation located
in Dallas County, Texas, hereina~er referred to as "CITY," in the penal sum of
DOLLARS ($ ), lawful money of the United States,
to be paid in Coppell, Dallas County, Texas, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made. we bind
ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and successors, jointly and severally; and firmly by these
presents, the condition of this obligation is such that,
WHEREAS. PRINCIPAL entered into a certain Contract with
dated the day of ,2000, in the proper performance of which the CiTY OF
COPPELL has an interest for the construction of:
NOW THEREFORE,
If PRINCIPAL will maintain and keep in good repair the work herein Contracted to be done and
performed for a period of one (1) year for Public Works Construction (paving, drainage and all other park
improvements) from the date of acceptance and do all necessary backfilling that may arise on account of
sunken conditions in ditches, or otherwise, and do and perform all necessary work and repair any defective
condition growing out of or arising from the improper joining of same, or on account of any breaking of same
caused by said Contractor in laying or building same, or on account of any defect arising in any of said work
laid or constructed by said Contractor, or on account of improper excavation or backfilling, it being understood
that the purpose of this section is to cover all defective conditions arising by reason of defective materials,
work or labor performed by said Contractor, then this obligation shall be void, otherwise to remain in full force
and effect; and in case said Contractor shall fail to do so, it is agreed that CITY may do said work and supply
such materials and charge the same against said Contractor and SURETY on this obligation, and said
Contractor and SURETY herein shall be subject to the liquidated damages mentioned in said Contract for
each day's failure on its part to comply with the terms of said provisions of said Contract,
4017 00630 - 1
BID NO. Q 0400-03
Provided, further, that if any legal action be filed on this Bond, venue shall lie in Dallas County, Texas.
And, that said SURETY, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension
of time, alteration of addition to the terms of the Contract or to the work performed thereunder, or the plans,
specifications, drawings, etc. accompanying same shall in any way affect its obligation on this Bond; and it
does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the
Contract or to the work to be performed thereunder.
The Undersigned and designated agent is hereby designated by SURETY herein as the agent
resident in either Tarrant or Dallas County to whom any requisite notice may be delivered and on whom
service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship.
tN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed on this the day of
,2000.
WITNESS:
PRINCIPAL
By
Signature
Typed/Printed Name
Company
By
Signature
Typed/Printed Name
Title
Address
Title
Address
City State
Zip City State
Zip
4017
00630 - 2
! T
BID NO. Q 0400-03
WITNESS: SURETY
Company
By By
Signature Signature
Typed/Printed Name Typed/Printed Name
Title Title
Address Address
City State Zip City State Zip
00630 - 3
1.0
SECTION 00700
GENERAL PROVISIONS
The provisions of PART 1, Division 1, of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction
as issued by the North Central Texas Council of Governments, as currently amended, shall constitute
the general conditions of the construction contract.
4017
GENERAL PROVISIONS
00700-1
SECTION 00810
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
These special conditions amend or supplement the General Provisions of the Construction Contract, as
referred to in Section 00700. and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All
provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect.
SC.01 DEFINITION OF TERMS
Calendar Day: A calendar day is defined in Item 1.0 of the General Provisions.
Workina Day: A working day is defined in Item 1.0 of the General Provisions.
SC.02 LOCATION OF PROJECT
The project is located on the State Rd. south of Sandy Lake Drive.
SC.03 SCOPE OF WORK
The work to be performed under this contract consists of furnishing all materials, labor, supervision, tools,
equipment, and all incidentals required and performing all work necessary for the construction of Wagon
Wheel Park as set forth in the plans and specifications and the Agreement.
SC.04 CONFLICT OF INTEREST
City Charter states that no officer of employee of the City shall have a financial interest, direct or indirect, in
any contract with the City, nor shall be financially interested, directly or indirectly, in the sale to the City of any
land, or rights or interest in any land, materials, supplies or services. This prohibition does not apply when the
interest is represented by ownership of stock in a corporation involved, provided such stock ownership
amounts to less than one percent (1%) of the corporation stock. Any violation of this prohibition will constitute
malfeasance in office. Any officer or employee of the City found guilty thereof should thereby forfeit his office
of position. Any violation of this prohibition with the knowledge, expressed or implied, of the persons or
corporations contracting with the City shall render the contract voidable by the City Manager or the City
Council. The Contractor represents that no employee or officer of the City has an interest in the Contractor.
SC.05 AWARD OF CONTRACT AND COMMENCEMENT OF WORK
The Owner will notify the successful bidder of the City's acceptance of the Proposal in writing within sixty (60)
days after the date of opening bids. If the total contract amount exceeds $25,000, the Contractor shall
complete the execution of the required performance and payment bonds and contract within ten (10) days
from the date specified in a written work order to be issued by the Owner. No work shall commence prior to
the issuance of such work order or before the required insurance has been obtained by the Contractor, with
certificates filed with the Owner evidencing the required coverage to be in force. Should the Owner
unreasonably delay the issuance of the work order through no fault of the Contractor, the Contractor shall be
entitled only to an equitable extension of contract time, the contract amount to remain unchanged.
SC,06 TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION
At such time as actual construction has been started, the work will not be stopped or delayed without written
permission of the Owner, excluding delays caused by adverse weather conditions. The Contractor shall
maintain at all times sufficient equipment and personnel on the project to produce satisfactory progress during
the construction period.
4017
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
00810-1
All items of work included in the Base Bid and Alternate Bids shall be completed as identified in the Bid
Proposal Form. The work order shall consist of a written request by the Owners Representative for the
Contractor to proceed with the construction of the project.
SC.07 TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
Dates for Substantial Completion of the two phases of work in the Contract: (a) "Early Completion Package"
portion of the Work in the Contract and (b) Remainder of the Work in the Contract are stipulated in
Section 01010, "Summary of Work."
Failure of the Contractor to complete the Work within the numbers of calendar days calculated from the date
of the issuance of the work order will result in damages being sustained by the Owner. Two numbers of
calendar days for the Contract will be calculated. They will be the numbers of days between the date of
issuance of the work order and each of the two stipulated dates of completion in Section 01010. As illustrated
in Section 01010, two sets of liquidated damages are possible - one set for each of the two phases of the
Work.
Such damages are, and will continue to be, impracticable and extremely difficult to determine. The Contractor
will pay the Owner EIGHT HUNDRED dollars ($800.00) for each day of delay in finishing the Work in excess
of time specified for substantial completion, plus any authorized time extensions, Execution of the contract
under these specifications shall constitute agreement by the Owner and Contractor that EIGHT HUNDRED
dollars ($800.00) per day for each of the two described phases of Work is the minimum value of the costs and
actual damage caused by failure of the Contractor to complete the Work within the allotted time, that such
sum is liquidated damages and shall not be construed as a penalty, and that such sum may be deducted from
payments due the Contractor if such delay occurs.
The Owner will be the sole judge as to whether the work has been completed within the allotted time. The
amount or amounts of liquidated damages shall be recovered by deducting same from the monies due, or that
may become due the Contractor from Owner and, if said monies be insufficient to cover the amount owning,
then the Contractor or his surety shall pay any additional damages due.
SC.08 BONDS
The following bonds shall be required for this project, in amounts at least equal to the Contract Price, and shall
conform to the requirements of paragraphs 14.3 of the General Conditions.
3.1 Performance Bond
3.2 Payment Bond
3.3 Maintenance Bond
SC.09 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
Prior to starting work, the Contractor shall submit a proposed schedule for the work included herein and shall
submit any major revisions to this schedule as the project progresses. This schedule shall provide for
completion of the project with the time provided in the specifications.
SC.10 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
All questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to Schrickel, Rollins
and Associates, Inc. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Architect/Engineer in response
to such questions will be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by ArchitectJEngineer
as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions racaived less than seven days prior to the date for
opening of Bids may not be answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding.
Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect.
4017
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
00810 - 2
I T
Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by Owner or
Architect/Engineer.
SC.11 SUBSTITUTIONS
Materials and equip ment of other Suppliers may be accepted by the Architect/Eng ineer if sufficient information
is submitted at the appropriate time as specified in the General Provisions and Instructions to Bidders by
CONTRACTOR to allow the Architect/Engineer to determine that the material or equipment proposed is an
acceptable substitute to that named.
SC.12 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
During the performance of this contract, the Contractor agrees as follows:
(a) The Contractor shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment
because of race, color, religion, sex, age or national origin. The Contractor shall take affirmative action to
insure that applicants are employed, that employees are treated during employment without regard to their
race, color, sex, religion, age or national origin. Such action shall include, but not limited to, the following:
Employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising, layoff or termination,
rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The
Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees or applicants for employment,
notices to be provided setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause.
(b) The Contractor shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on
behalf of the Contractor, state that all qualified applicants shall receive consideration for employment without
regard to race. color, religion, sex, national origin or age.
(c) The Contractor shall send to each labor union or representative of workers with which he has
a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice to be provided, advising the
said labor union or workers' representatives of the Contractor's commitments under this section, and shall
post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment.
(d) The Contractor shall include the provisions of this section in all subcontracts pertaining to the
work.
SC.13 COPIES OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
Five (5) sets of plans and specifications shall be furnished to the Contractor, at no charge. for construction
purposes. Additional copies may be obtained at the cost of reproduction upon request.
SC.14 STATE AND CITY SALES TAX
The Contractor's attention is directed to Section 15.311 of the Tax Code of the State of Texas.
Recent legislation has removed the sales tax exemption previously provided by Section 151.311 of the Tax
Code covering tangible personal property purchased by a contractor for use in the performance of a contract
for the improvement of City-owned realty.
It is still possible, however, for a contractor to make tax-free purchases of tangible personal property which
will be incorporated into and become part of a City construction project through the use of a "separated
contract" with the City. A "separated contract" is one which separates charges for materials from charges for
labor. Under such a cantract, the contractor becomes a "seller" of those materials which are incorporated into
the project, such as bricks, lumber, concrete, paint, etc. The contractor issues a resale certificate in lieu of
paying the sales tax at the time such items are purchased. The contractor then receives an exemption
certificate from the City for those materials. (This procedure may not be used, however, for materials which
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
00810 - 3
do not become a pad of the finished product. For example, equipment rentals, form materials, etc., are not
considered as becoming "incorporated" into the project.)
Utilization of this "separated contract" approach eliminates the need for bidders to figure sales tax for
materials which are to be incorporated into the project. The bidder should therefore be certain, when
completing the bid form, to separate the bid as provided on the bid form. The successful bidder's bid form will
be used to develop the "separated contract" and will determine the extent of the tax exemption.
SC.15 INSURANCE REQUIRED: The Contractor shall not commence Work under this Contract until he/she
has obtained all insurance required under 13.2.1 of the City of Coppell's Standard Fixed Price Agreement.
SC.16 CLEANUP
Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove from the site all materials, tools and equipment
belonging to him and leave the site with an appearance acceptable to the Owner.
SC.17 COORDINATION WITH OTHERS
In the event other contractors are doing work in the same area simultaneouslywith this project, the Contractor
shall coordinate his proposed construction with other contractors.
SC.18 BARRICADES, SIGNS AND TRAFFIC HANDLING
Barricades, signs, and traffic handling shall conform to 1994 - Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control
Devices except that no separate pay item is provided. This work shall be considered as subsidiary to the other
work.
SC.19 INSPECTION
The word "Inspection," or other forms of the word as used in the Contract Documents for this project, shall
be understood as meaning the Owner's Representative will observe the construction on behalf of the Owner.
The Owner's Representative will observe and check the construction in sufficient detail to satisfy themselves
that the work is proceeding in general accordance with the Contract Documents, but he will not be a guarantor
of the Contractor's performance.
SC.20 LIGHTS AND POWER
The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, temporary lighting and power facilities required for the
proper prosecution of the work.
SC.21 SMALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES OR INJURY
Item 1.24.3 SMALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGE OR INJURY is amended to read as follows:
If any person files a claim against the OWNER or CONTRACTOR for personal injury or property damage
resulting from, arising out of, or caused by the operations of the Contractor, or any work within the limits of
the project, the Contractor must either submit to the Owner a duly executed full release within thirty (30) days
from the date of written claim, or immediately report the claim to his liability insurance carrier for their action
in adjusting the claim. If the Contractor fails to comply with these provisions within the stipulated time limit,
it will be automatically deemed that the Contractor has appointed the Owner as its irrevocable Attorney-in-Fact
authorizing the Owner to report the claim directly with the liability insurance carrier. This provision is in and
of itself a Power of Attorney from the Contractor to the Owner which authorized the Owner to take said action
on behalf of the Contractor without the necessity of the execution of any other document. If the Contractor fails
to comply with the provisions of this item the Owner, at its own discretion, may terminate this contract or take
any other actions it deems appropriate. Any payment or portion thereof due the Contractor, whether it is a final
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
4017 00810 - 4
payment, progress payment, payment out of retainage or refund payment may be withheld by the Owner as
is authorized by Item 1.52. Bankruptcy, insolvency or denial of liability by the insurance carrier shall not
exonerate the Contractor from liability.
SC,22 PROJECT COORDINATION
The Contractor shall have on the project at all times, as his agent, a competent Superintendent capable of
reading and thoroughly understanding the plans and specifications and thoroughly experienced in the type
of work being performed. The Superintendent shall have full authority to execute orders or directions and to
promptly supply such materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals as may be required. Such
Superintendent shall be furnished irrespective of the amount of work subcontracted.
The Superintendent and the Contractor shall be responsible for all work performed by the subcontractor(s)
at all times during construction.
SC.23 EXTENT OF WORK AND THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
All work that may be called for in the Specifications but not shown on the Drawings, or, all work that may be
shown on the Drawing but not called for in the Specifications, shall be performed by the Contractor as if
described in both. Should work be raquirad which is not set forth in either document, but which work is
nevertheless raquirad for fulfilling of the intent thereof, then the Contractor shall perform all work as fully as
if it wero specifically set forth in the Contract Documents.
SC.24 MATERIAL ON-SITE BURIAL
No concrete or other construction debris can be buried on the site unless specific permission is granted by
the Owner.
SC.25 MATERIAL HAUL-OFF
All construction debris shall be hauled to an appropriate land fill, and these fees shall be the Contractors'
responsibility and should be included in the bid amount.
SC.26 WAGE RATES
All employees of the Contractor on the work to be performed under this contract shall be paid the prevailing
wage rates per the attached schedule, "Prevailing Wage Rates 3/12/99."
4017
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
00810-5
Prevailing Wage Rates 3/12/99
Air- Tool Operator
Asphalt Raker
Asphalt Shoveler
Batching Plant Weigher
Carpenter
Concrete Finisher-Paving
Concrete Finisher-Stmcwres
Concrete Rubber
Electrician
Flagget
Form Builder-Swuctures
Form Liner-Paving and Curb
Foma Setter-Paving and Curb
Form Setter-Structures
Laborer-Common
Laborer-Utility
Mechanic
Oiler
Servicer
painter-Structures
Pipe Layer
Blaster
Asphalt Disnibutor Operator
Asphalt Paving Machine
Broom or Sweeper Operator
Bulldozer
Concrete Curing Machine
Concrete Finishing Machine
Concrete Paving Joint Machine
Concrete Paving Joint Sealer
Concrete Paving Saw
Concrete Paving Spreader
Slipform Machine Operator
Crane, Clamshell, Baeldaoe, Derrick, Dragline, Shovel
Foundation Drill Operator Crawler Mounted
Foundation Drill Operator Truck Mounted
Front End Loader
Milling Machine Operator
Mixer
Motor Grader Opmtor Fine Grade
Motor Grade Operator
Pavement Marking Machine
Roller, Steel Wheel Plant-Mix pavements
Roller, Steel Wheel Other Flatwheel or Tamping
Roller, Pneumatic, Self-Propelled
Scraper
Tractor-Crawler Type
Tractor-Pneumatic
Traveling Mixer
Wagon-Drill, Boring Machine
Reinforcing Steel Setter Paving
Reinforcing Steel Setter Structures
$9.00
9.55
8.80
11.51
10.30
10.50
9.83
8.84
15.37
7.55
9.82
9.00
9.24
9.09
7.32
8.94
12.68
10.17
9.41
11.00
8.98
11.50
10.29
9.25
8.72
10.29
9.25
11.13
10.42
9.00
10.39
10.50
9.52
11.04
10.00
11.83
9.96
8.62
10.30
11.97
10.96
7.32
9.06
8.59
8.48
9.63
10.58
9.15
8.83
12.00
13.21
13.31
Steel Worker- Structural 14.80
Spreader Box Operator 10.00
Work Zone Bamcade 7.32
Truck Driver-Single Axle Light 8.965
Truck Driver-Single Axle Heavy 9.02
Truck Driver -Tandem Axle Semi Trailer 8.77
Truck Driver Lowboy/Float 10.44
Truck Driver-Transit Mix 9.47
Truck Driver- Winch 9.00
Vibrator Operator-Hand Type 7.32
Welder 11.57
SECTION 00815
CONTRACTOR SAFETY SPECIFICATION
GENERAL:
The Contractor shall comply with all Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) Standards and any other
Federal, State, or Local rules and regulations applicable to construction and/or maintenance activities in the
State of Texas.
City Safety Personnel or any supervisor may, but are not required to, order that the work be stopped if a
condition of immediate danger is found to exist. Nothing contained herein shall be construed to shift
responsibility or risk of loss for injuries or damage sustained as a result of a violation of this Article from the
Contractor to the City of Coppell. The Contractor shall remain solely and exclusively responsible for
compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the project site.
The parties hereto expressly agree that the obligation to comply with applicable safety provisions is a material
provision of this Contract and a duty of the Contractor. The City of Coppell reserves the right to require
demonstration of compliance upon reasonable request. In the event the Contractor is unable to demonstrate
compliance with the safety provisions of this Contract, the parties agree that such failure is deemed to be a
material breach of this Agreement; and the Contractor agrees that upon such breach, all work pursuant to the
Contract shall terminate until demonstration to the City of Coppell that the safety provisions of this Agreement
have been complied with. In no event shall action or failure to act on the part of the City of Coppell be
construed as a duty to enforce the safety provisions of this Agreement nor shall it be construed to create
liability for the City for any act or failure to act in respect to the safety provisions of this Agreement.
SAFETY EQUIPMENT:
The Contractor shall be responsible for the Safety Equipment to be used by its employees and/or all of its
subcontractors working on the City of Coppell' property. This equipment will include, but may not be limited
to, hard hats, safety belts or harnesses. eye, face, hand, ear or hearing protection. Sport or athletic type shoes
are no__t considered suitable work shoes on any construction site.
CONTRACTOR SAFETYSPECIFICATION
00815-1
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
1.05
SECTION 00822
TEMPORARY EROSION, SEDIMENT AND WATER POLLUTION CONTROL
DESCRIPTION: This item shall consist of temporary soil erosion sediment and water pollution control
measures deemed necessary by the Architect/Engineer for duration of the contract. The temporary
measures shall include dikes, dams, berms, sediment basins, fiber mats, jute netting, temporary
seeding, straw mulch, asphalt mulch, plastic liners, rubble liners, baled-hay retards, dikes, slope
drains and other devices typically used to prevent erosion.
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS: The Amhitect/Engineer has the authority to define erodible
earth and the authority to limit the surface area of erodible-earth material. The Contractor will be
required to incorporate temporary pollution control measures to prevent or correct erosion that may
develop during construction. All labor, tools, equipment and incidentals to complete the work will not
be paid for directly but shall be considered subsidiary work to the various items included in the
contract.
Waste or disposal areas and construction roads shall be located and constructed in a
manner that will minimize the amount of sediment entering public streets and storm sewer
systems.
All streets shall be cleared as soon as practicable of falsework, piling, debris or other
obstruction placed during construction operations that are not a part of the finished work.
The Contractor shall take sufficient precautions to prevent pollution with fuels, oils, bitumens,
calcium chloride or other harmful materials. He shall conduct and schedule his operations
so as to avoid or minimize siltation of streams, storm sewer lines, and adjacent streets.
The Contractor shall use NCTCOG STORM WATER QUALITY - Best Manac~ement Practices For
Construction Activities for acceptable erosion control practices.
Construction of perimeter swales and straw bale check dams are a temporary measure to prevent
sediment and debris from leaving the site. The Contractor is responsible for achieving the proposed
grades as shown on the grading plan.
Location of high points, center lines of perimeter swales and outfalls are approximate. During
construction, swales shall be adjusted in the field as necessary to allow positive drainage in the swale
and prevent sediment and debris from leaving the construction site.
END OF SECTION
4017
TEMPORARY EROSION, SEDIMENT AND WATER POLLUTION CONTROL
00822 - 1
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
MacArthur Park Construction
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Base Bid: The work to be included in the Base Bid consists of the furnishing
of all labor, materials, services and equipment required in conjunction with
or properly incidental to the construction of the MacArthur Park in Coppell,
Texas. Items to be constructed include, but are not limited to, site
preparation, earthwork, fencing, concrete paving, irrigation system, tuff
planting, restroom-concession building and utility services.
Alternate Bid Items: The work to be included as a part of the Alternate Bids
consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials, services and equipment
required in conjunction with or properly incidental to the construction of Work
in the Base Bid.
1.02 EXPLANATION OF ALTERNATES
Bidding alternates are provided in the Bid Proposal and notated on the Plan
Sheets.
Be
General Requirements for Alternates and a Schedule of Alternates are found
in Section 00410 - LIST OF ALTERNATES.
1.03 OWNER RESPONSIBILITIES
The Owner will be responsible for the following construction items to be done
by City forces or by separate contract:
Primary electrical power and transformers (by agreement between
Owner and power company).
Maintenance of solid sodded Tifway 419 tuffgrass after it is planted
by Contractor and accepted by Owner.
1.04 OWNER'S EXPECTATION OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS
The Ownerwill closely examine the qualifications and records of Bidders who
wish to become the Successful Bidder for this project. The Owner will weigh
the bids and the qualifications in their decision of whom to select to do the
work. Any bidderwith serious intent of becoming the Successful Bidder must
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010 - 1
4017
prove that they have an experience record of having successfully completed
projects similar in nature, size and complexity.
Each Bidder must demonstrate the competence and experience of his own
forces and that of the subcontractors. Each Bidder must submit WITH THE
BID the required list of subcontractors. Failure to submit the list may cause
disqualification.
The City requests that bidders without the necessary qualifications not
submit bids, as they will be disqualified or passed over for consideration of
qualified bidders.
1.05 COMPLETION DATES FOR PHASES OF THE WORK
The Successful Bidde~Contractor agrees to begin work within the stipulated
time from the date of the written work order or notice to proceed. If a
Successful Bidder is selected by the Owner, the award of contract is
expected to occur on or about May 23, 2000, and the notice to proceed
is expected to be issued on or about June 5, 2000.
The following dates are for substantial completion:
1. August 31, 2000, for completion of the "Early Completion Package"
portion of the Work in the Contract. See paregraph 1.06, below.
2. February 28, 2001, for completion of the "Remainder of the Work" in the
Contract.
Failure to meet these completion dates will cause separate liquidated
damages to be assessed for each day the construction is delayed for each
phase of the Work, Refer to Section 00810 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS,
paragraph SC.07: "TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED
DAMAGES."
Example of a liquidated damages situation:
a. If all of the "Early Completion Package" portion of Work is not
substantially complete by August 31, 2000, liquidated damages of
$800.00 per day will be assessed by the Owner until completion of
that phase of the Work.
Furthermore, if all of the "Remainder of the Work" in the Contract is
not substantially complete by February 28, 2001, an additional set
of liquidated damages of $800.00 per day will be assessed by the
Owner until completion of that phase of the Work.
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010 - 2
1.06
IMPORTANCE OF TIMELY COMPLETION OF THE "EARLY COMPLETION
PACKAGE" PORTION OF WORK IN THE CONTRACT: SCHEDULE AND WORK
Each of the seven fenced baseball fields must be completely planted by the
Contractor with Tifway 419 Bermuda Rolled Sod and be accepted by the
Owner on or before August 31,2000. Due to the importance to the Owner of
establishing tuffgrass on all seven of the fenced baseball fields during the.
summer of 2000, the Contractor must complete the "Early Completion
Package" in its entirety on or before August 31, 2000.
The "Early Completion Package" is part of the Base Bid. It includes, but is
not limited to, the Work described below. Areas in which various portions of
the Work are located are graphically depicted on the plan sheets. It is
understood that Work in addition to these items may also be necessary to
accomplish the "Early Completion Package." In general, the "Early
Completion Package" is the area which includes the seven fenced baseball
fields and their three fenced warm-up areas.
Site Work
· Site preparation for the fenced baseball fields area
· Earthwork, including fine grading for the fenced baseball fields
· Galvanized fence posts on the perimeters of the baseball fields and
"warm-up" areas
- Fence posts along portions of foul lines and for the outfields
- Gate posts (no gates) at outfield corners
- Foul poles
- (No permanent chain-link fabric is included in this Work)
Concrete edging pavements below the fencing
Headerboards
Tuffgrass irrigation system and contrels, fully tested and operational
Tifway 419 rolled sod turfgrass
Erosion control measures
Irrigation main and ancillary items
All related and ancillary items necessary to utilize and operate the
irrigation water supply system and the turfgrass irrigation systems
serving the seven fenced baseball fields
Temporary chain-link construction fencing (including temporary posts
and gates) around each ballfield to protect the area of Work and to
discourage unauthorized/inappropriate access to the areas of Work
Electrical Power and Controls
· Primary-power conduit and transformer pads
· All conduit, circuits, panels and controls necessary to utilize and operate
the turfgrass irrigation system which serves the seven fenced baseball
fields and their '~varm-up" areas.
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010 - 3
Primary power and transformer to be by power company through
agreement with the Owner
Civil Work
· Portions of the Civil Work will need to be completed as necessary to
avoid construction conflicts with Work included in the "Eady Completion
Package." This Work includes, but is not limited to:
- Portions of the sanitary sewer system
- Portions of the water supply lines
Bidders are advised that it is highly recommended to have the irrigation-
water supply system and the turfgrass irrigation system fully tested and
operational several weeks prior to planting the rolled sod turfgrass.
Bidders are reminded that the planting of the rolled sod turfgrass can
proceed only afterthe irrigation system and fine grading have been approved
by the Owner's representative.
The Owner will be responsible for the establishment and maintenance of the
turfgrass sod after it is completely and propedy planted. However, the
Contractor will be responsible for the maintenance of all of the irrigation
system and all of the irrigation-water supply system with regard to
installation, materials and workmanship throughout the period of the entire
Contract. This includes settlement of trenches and replanting that may
become necessary.
Within 24 hours of notification, any repairs, replacements or corrections of
deficiencies in the described systems (which are related to installation,
materials or workmanship) will be immediately performed by the Contractor
so that the Owner will not experience damages, delays or losses of efficiency
in the ability to irrigate and maintain the planted turfgrass sod in the critical
establishment period which is expected to occur in typical mid-summer
climatic conditions of drought and high temperatures.
Should the Contractor fail to immediately perform appropriate repairs,
replacements or corrections in the described systems, and thereby cause the
Owner to be unable to successfully irrigate, establish and maintain the
sodded tuffgrass, the Contractor will be charged with the costs for Work the
Owner must accomplish in order to successfully irrigate, establish and
maintain the sodded turfgrass.
Items which are damaged orwhich require repairs or adjustments as a result
of the Owner's maintenance operations will be the responsibility of the
Owner.
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010 - 4
The Contractor will cooperate with the Owner to maintain a clear access to
each field that the Owner is responsible to maintain.
Failure of the Contractor to complete the "Early Completion Package" portion
of Work in the Contract by August 31,2000, will result in liquidated damages
as stipulated in the Agreement.
1.07 THE REMAINDER OF WORK IN THE CONTRACT: SCHEDULE AND WORK
The Remainder of Work in the Contract must be substantially complete by
February 28, 2001.
Failure of the Contractor to complete the Remainder of Work in the Contract
by February 28, 2001, will result in liquidated damages as stipulated in the
Agreement.
Any "Primavera" Bermudagrass seed areas not successfully established by
the Contractor by the cut-off date of September 15, 2000, will be planted with
ryegrass upon completion of construction. In the growing season of the
following year, ryegrass areas will be tilled under and regraded, and
"Primavera" Bermudagrass will be fully established to a uniform stand before
July 15, 2001. The Contractor will be responsible for protecting the seeded
areas and for producing an acceptable stand of seeded Bermudagrass as
specified.
Liquidated damages will not apply if the only item of incomplete work on
February 28, 2001, is the establishment of "Primavera" Bermudagrass in the
seeded areas, and if ryegrass planting and the subsequent establishment of
the seeded "Pdmavera" Bermudagrass areas in the following growing season
are successful. However, monies will be retained from the Contractor's
payment until the Work is complete per provisions of the Contract.
The Contractor will cooperate with the Owner to maintain clear access to
each field that the Owner is responsible to maintain. Bidders are advised that
the Owner will be conducting frequent maintenance operations such as
mowing, watering, edging, fertilizing, etc., during the period in which the
Contractor is constructing the Remainder of Work in the Contract. The
Contractor will coordinate his schedule with the Owner so that maintenance
operations will not interfere with critical construction operations such as the
placement and finishing of concrete, etc.
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010 - 5
1.08
CASH ALLOWANCE: BONUS FOR ACCELERATED COMPLETION OF THE
"EARLY COMPLETION PACKAGE" PORTION OF THE WORK
It will be of additional benefit to the Owner to have the Work described above
in paragraph 1.06 completed at an earlier date. As an Alternate Bid item, a
Cash Allowance of $54,000 is provided in the Bid Form. This allowance is for
payment by the Owner to the Contractor of a bonus of $1,200,00 per day for
each day, up to a maximum of forty-five (45) days, that the entire "Early
Completion Package" is complete before the date of August 31, 2000.
1.09 CRITICAL SCHEDULE OF THE OWNER
The Owner intends to occupy the Project and to have it opened for play on
or about March 1,2001. Thus, the performance of the Contractor in meeting
the completion dates for the "Early Completion Package" and the
"Remainder of the Work" is crucial to the success of the Project.
END OF SECTION
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010 - 6
SECTION 01021
CASH ALLOWANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
To provide adequate budget and bonding to cover items not precisely determined by the
Owner prior to bidding, allow within the proposed Contract Sum the amounts described in this
Section.
Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications.
2. Other provisions concerning Cash Allowances also may be stated in other Sections
of these Specifications.
1.02 SPECIFIC CASH ALLOWANCES
Finish hardware:
1. Provide within the proposed Contract Sum the amount of Three Hundred Fifty
Dollars ($350.00) per door leaf for purchase and delivery to the job site of finish
hardware to be selected later by the Owner, and include within the proposed
Contract Sum an amount sufficient to cover the costs of all other items (including
installation) associated with that portion of the Work as described in Section 08710
of these Specifications.
END OF SECTION
4017
CASH ALLOWANCES
01021 - 1
1.01
GENERAL
SECTION 01340
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES
A. Refer to General Conditions, Paragraph 3.12.
Submit to the Architect/Engineer shop drawings, product data, and samples required by
specification sections.
1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Prepared by a qualified detailer.
B. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail numbers shown on Contract Documents.
Shop Drawings shall be submitted only to clarify, amplify, or revise information shown or
called for in the contract documents.
1.03 PRODUCT DATA
1.04
Manufacturers standard schematic drawings and diagrams:
1. Modify drawings to delete information which is not applicable to the work.
2. Supplement standard information to provide additional information specifically
applicable to the work.
Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts,
illustrations, and other standard descriptive data:
1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent materials, products or models.
2. Show dimensions and clearances required.
3. Show performance characteristics and capacities,
4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls.
SAMPLES
Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate:
1. Functional characteristics of product or material, with integrally related parts and
attachment devices.
2. Full range of color samples.
Field Samples and Mock-ups:
1. Erect at project site at location acceptable to the Owner.
2. Construct each sample or mock-up complete, including work of all trades required
in finish work.
1.05 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
4017
Submit shop drawing and product data as soon as practicable after award of contract but not
later than 30 days before dates reviewed submittals will be needed.
Submit all office samples as soon as practicable but not later than 60 days after award of
contract in order to facilitate color selections and coordination of the various materials. Final
color selections and release of shop drawings contingent upon color selection will not be
made until all office samples have been submitted, coordinated, and approved.
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
01340 - 1
Number of submittals required:
1. Shop Drawings: Submit 5 prints and one sepia only of each shop drawing, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Product Data: Submit 5 copies of product data.
3. Samples: Submit the number stated in each specification section, minimum of throe
samples for each item.
Submittals shall include:
1. Date and revision dates.
2. Project title and number.
3. Names of Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer.
4. Identification of product or material and specification section number.
5. Relation to adjacent structure, materials or other critical features.
6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such.
7. Applicable referonce standards.
8. A blank space 4" x 8" for Architect/Engineer's stamp.
9. Other pertinent data roquired by specifications.
10. Identification of variation from contract documents.
11. Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, verification
of field measurements, compliance with contract documents, and coordination with
requirements of the work.
Note: Absence of the Contractors stamp shall constitute grounds for rejection of the
submittal until such time as the submittal has been processed in accordance with
this requirement.
1.06 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Resubmission: Make corrections and changes in submittals required by Architect/Engineer
and rosubmit until approved.
Shop Drawings:
1. Revise initial drawings and resubmit as specified for initial submittal.
2. Indicate on drawings any changes which have been made, other than those
requested by Architact/Engineer.
C. Product Data and Samples: Submit new data and samples as specified for initial submittal.
1.07 DISTRIBUTION OF SUBMITTALS AFTER REVIEW
A. Distribute reviewed copies of shop drawings and product data which carry
ArchitectJEngineer's stamp as follows:
1. Job Site File.
2. Record Documents File.
3. Other affected contractors.
4. Subcontractors.
5. Supplier or Fabricator.
Architect/Engineer will retain three (3) copies: one for his file, one for his consultants, and
one for the owner.
END OF SECTION
SHOP DRAWINGS. PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
01340 - 2
SECTION 01410
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing Laboratory to
perform specified testing of work and materials at the Project Site.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Conditions of the Contract: Inspections and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules,
regulations, order or approvals of public authorities.
B. Respective sections of specifications: Certification of products.
C. Each specification section listed: Laboratory test required, and standards for testing,
1.03 LABORATORY DUTIES
Cooperate with Owner and Contractor; provide qualified personnel after due notice from
Contractor.
Perform specified inspections, sampling and testing of materials and methods of
construction:
1. Comply with specified standards.
2. Ascertain compliance of malerials with requirements of Contract Documents.
Promptly notify Owner and Contractor of observed irregularities or deficiencies of work or
products.
Promptly submit written report of each test and inspection; one copy each to Owner,
Architect/Engineer, Contractor, and one copy to Record Documents File. Each report shall
include:
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Date issued.
Project title and number.
Testing laboratory name, address and telephone number.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
Date and time of sampling or inspection.
Record of temperature and weather conditions.
Date of test.
Identification of product and specification section.
Location of sample or test in the Project.
Type of inspection or test.
Results of tests and compliance with Contract Documents.
Interpretation of test results, when requested by Architect/Engineer.
E. Perform additional tests as required by the Owner.
4017
TESTINGLABORATORY SERVICES
01410-1
1.04 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY
A. Laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.
2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. Perform any duties of the Contractor.
4. Stop the Work,
1.05 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide access to Work, to manufacturer's operations.
B. Furnish copies of Products test reports as required.
C. Furnish incidental labor and facilities:
1. To provide access to Work to be tested,
2,To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the product to
be tested.
3.To facilitate inspections and tests.
4,For storage and curing of test samples,
D. Notify laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for laboratory assignment of
personnel and scheduling of tests.
1. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse Owner
for laboratory personnel and travel expenses incurred due to Contractor's
negligence.
END OF SECTION
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
01410 - 2
SECTION 01510
TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND FACILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
Furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities and facilities required for construction; remove
on completion of Work.
1.02 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with National Electric Code.
Comply with Federal, State and local codes and regulations and with utility company
requirements.
PART 2 - GENERAL
2.01 FIELD OFFICE
The Contractor may furnish a weather tight job office with operative windows, provided with
light and gas or electric heat when necessary, with smooth tables for using drawings and
specifications and with approved means for filing same and provide and pay for all necessary
fuel and electrical energy. A complete set of all drawings and specifications shall be kept on
the job at all times. Upon completion of the work, the office shall be removed from the
premises. The Contractor shall examine the site plan before locating the office and shall not
place it within five (5') feet of any underground lines. Owner's approval is required on final
location of field office.
The job office shall be equipped with a telephone at all times during the course of the work,
The telephone and facsimile machine shall be in operation from the commencement of
construction until final acceptance of the project.
2.02 STORAGE SHED
The Contractor may provide on the premises at convenient locations with respect to
construction areas, suitable watertight storage sheds for storage of materials, equipment,
and tools which might be damaged by exposure to the weather, and shall maintain same in
good condition, and shall remove same when no longer needed, or shall relocate same from
time to time where preliminary location might interfere with subsequent work. Owner's
approval is required on final location(s) of such storage facilities.
2.03 POWER AND LIGHT
The Contractor shall obtain and have installed a temporary power service line to a point
convenient for and available to all trades, including mechanical and other contractors. The
cost of current used shall be paid by the Contractor, and he may apportion the charge among
the trades using the current in a manner agreed upon.
2.04 SANITARY FACILITIES
The General Contractor shall provide adequate toilet facilities for the use of all persons
employed on the job. He shall post notices, take such precautions as may be necessary,
4017
TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND FACILITIES
01510-1
2.05
remove any refuse deposited in or about the buildings, and maintain the premises in a
sanitary conditions.
WATER
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining temporary water from the local utility
authority or the Owner. All costs for temporary water connections, water usage fees, etc,,
shall be paid by the Contractor.
2.06 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE
A. Refer to Paragraph 2.01 above.
B. The Contractor shall pay all equipment costs and service charges for all calls.
2.07 STORAGE AND STOCKPILE OF EXCAVATED DIRT
All dirt excavated during the construction process shall be stockpiled as directed by the
Owner. All excess soil not used in construction operations shall be classified as spoils and
shall be removed from the site.
2.08 SCAFFOLDING
Each contractor shall provide and install all scaffolding, ramps, platforms, rails, guards, stairs,
and ladders necessary for the performance of the work. All safety standards, ordinances,
codes. and insurance requirements must be met. All items shall be so constructed as to
afford safety and protection to both craftsmen and their work and to the work of other
contractors.
2.09 DE-WATERING
2.10
Surface or subsurface water or other fluid shall not be permitted to accumulate in
excavations under or adjacent to any structures. Should such conditions develop, water and
other fluids shall be centrolled and disposed of by means of temporary pumps, piping, drain
lines. ditches, dams, or other approved methods.
SHORING
All temporary shoring raquirad for the installation of work shall be included in this Contract
and the General Contractor must assume all responsibility for this work and make good any
damage caused by improper supports or failure of shoring in any respect.
2.11 BARRICADES
The Contractor shall erect and maintain sufficient barricades to protect adjacent structures,
paving, lawns, etc., from damage by construction vehicles and operations. Barricades must
also be erected where raquirad to prevent injury to the public.
2.12 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND SAFETY
The Contractor shall be responsible for all traffic control and safety during construction. The
Contractor shall meet all City requirements for public safety, barriers, and traffic control. The
Contractor shall coordinate with the City of Midlothian and Midlothian Independent School
District dudng necessary street control.
TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND FACILITIES
4017 01510-2
2.13 LIFTING AND HOISTING
The Contractor shall supply all hoists, lifts, cranes, towers, etc., as required for the handling
of the various materials. Installation of all equipment shall meet all applicable safety
requirements.
2.14 WATCHMAN
The Contractor or subcontractor, at his own expense and option, may employ a watchman
at such time as he deems necessary to protect or attend his work. The Contractor shall be
responsible for making all other security arrangements that he will raquira during the
progress of the work.
2.15 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES
When any temporary facility is no longer needed for the proper conduct of the work, the
Contractor shall completely remove it from the project and shall repair or replace any
material, equipment, or finished surface damaged by doing so.
2.16 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
Provide and maintain temporary fire protection during construction in accordance with
requirements of the local Fire Protection Code.
2.17 PARKING FACILITIES
A. Restrict parking of construction personnel vehicles to areas designated by the Owner.
2.19 FUEL STORAGE TANKS
Above fuel storage tanks shall be surrounded by a two-foot tall earlhen berm for spill
containment.
END OF SECTION
4017
TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND FACILITIES
01510 - 3
SECTION 01532
TREE PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
Protect trees and shrubs that are to remain in place from foliage, trunk, and root damage that
may result from construction operations.
1.02 FENCING
Typical fencing shall be steel posts with chain link fabric set three (3') feet outside the drip
line or as directed by the Owner. Contractor will be held strictly liable for damage to any
existing vegetation within the project boundaries.
1.03 PROTECTION OF REMAINING TREES AND SHRUBS
A. Protect such trees and shrubs that are to remain from the following damage:
2.
3.
4:
5.
6.
Compaction of root area by equipment or material storage.
Trunk damage by moving equipment, material storage, nailing, or bolting.
Strangling by tying ropes or guy wires to trunks or large branches.
Poisoning by pouring solvents, gas. paint, etc., on or around trees and roots.
Cutting of roots by excavating, ditching, etc.
Drought from failure to water or by cutting or changing normal drainage pattern past
roots.
Changes of soil pH factor b.,v disposal of lime base material such as concrete,
plaster, etc.
Do not cut roots 1 ~" in diameter or over. All excavation and earthwork within the
drip line of trees will be done by hand. All pruning will be done under the Ow. ner's
direction.
1.04 DAMAGES - SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
When trees other than those approved for removal are destroyed, killed, or badly damaged
as a result of construction operations, the Contract sum will be reduced by the amount
determined from the following International Shade Tree Conference formula: D x 0.7854 x
$36.00, where D is the diameter in inches of the trunk of each shade tree measured 12"
above grade. Damage to any branches larger than two (2") inches in diameter will result in
a fine of $300.00 to $800.00 per branch depending on the size.
1.05 PARKING
Parking vehicles or material storage under trees will not be permitted. Contractor will be fined
$100.00 for each violation.
1.06 UTILITY TRENCHING
Trenching for utilities in wooded areas must be staked and approved by the Owner prior to
trenching. The Owner reserves the right to adjust the line locations to avoid damage to
existing trees.
4017
TREE PROTECTION
01532 - 1
1.07 ROOT REMOVAL
Am
Where plans call for disturbance of the mot system of trees to remain, roots must be pruned
(by a machine manufactured for that purpose) prior to any other construction activity.
Immediately after excavation, exposed roots must be covered with a finely shredded mulch
and kept moist until backfilling is complete.
1.08 BRANCH INTERFERENCE
All branches that interfere with construction activity should be temporarily tied back to prevent
damage. Branch removal is permitted only as approved by the Owner.
1.09 LOCATION OF SITE IMPROVEMENTS
In heavily wooded areas the site improvements should be field staked, including cut/fill depth,
prior to the start of clearing. The Owner must observe this staking to determine if any field
adjustment is necessary to save any significant existing trees.
END OF SECTION
TREE PROTECTION
01532 - 2
SECTION 01630
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
Furnish and install Products specified, under conditions for options and substitutions stated
in this Section.
1.02 PRODUCTS LIST
Within 15 days after Notice to Proceed, submit to Architect/Engineer five copies of complete
list of major Products which are proposed for installation.
B. Tabulate Products by Specification Section number and title.
For products specified only by reference standards, list for each such Product:
1. Name and address of manufacturer.
2. Trade name.
3. Model or catalogue designation.
4. Manufacturer's data:
a. Reference standards.
b. Performance test data.
1.03 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS
For Products specified only by reference standard, select Product meeting that standard, by
any manufacturer.
For Products specified by naming several Products or manufacturers, select any one of
products and manufacturers named which complies with Specifications.
For Products specified by naming only one Product and manufacturer, there is no option and
no substitution will be allowed (unless substitution is approved prior to bid opening).
1.04 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURE
Prior to the Bid Date: Architect/Engineer will consider substitutions as specified in the
instructions to Bidders and General Conditions.
After the Bid Date: Architect/Engineer will consider formal written requests from Contractor
for substitution of products in place of those specified only when submitted in accordance
with the requirements of this Section. One or more of the following conditions must be
documented.
The substitution must be required for compliance with final interpretation of code
requirements or insurance regulations.
The substitution must be due to the unavailability of the specified products, through
no fault of the Contractor. Long delivery period will not qualify as unavailability.
The substitution may be requested when subsequent information discloses the
inability of the specified products to perform propedy or to fit in the designated
space.
4017
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01630-1
4. The substitution may be due to the manufacturer's or fabricator's refusal to certify or
guarantee performance of the specified product as required.
5. The substitution may be requested when it is clearly seen, in the judgement of the
Architect/Engineer, that a substitution would be substantially to the Owner's best
interests in terms of cost, time or other considerations.
C. Submit a separate request for each substitution on a copy of the request form attached to this
section. Support each request with:
1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with requirements
stated in Contract Documents:
a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address.
b. Manufacturer's literature;
c. Samples, as applicable.
d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and
date of each installation,
2. Itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with product specified; list
significant variations.
3. Data relating to changes in construction schedule.
4. Any effect of substitution on separate contracts.
5. List of changes required in other work or Products.
6. Accurate cost data comparing proposed substitution with product specified,
a. Amount of any net change to Contract Sum.
7. Designation of required license fees or royalties.
8, Designation of availability of maintenance services, sources of replacement
materials.
D. Substitutions will not be considered for acceptance when: 1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without
a formal request from Contractor,
2. They are requested directly by a subcontractor or supplier.
3. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents.
E. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance of
Architect/Engineer and Owner.
F. Architect/Engineer and Owner will determine acceptability of proposed substitutions.
1.05 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION
A. In making formal request for substitution Contractor represents that:
1. He has investigated proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or
superior in all respects to that specified.
2. He will provide same warranties or bonds for substitution as for product specified.
3. He will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into the Work, and will make
such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects.
4. He waives claims for additional costs caused by substitution which may
subsequently become apparent.
5. Cost data is complete and includes related costs under his Contract, but not:
a. Costs under separate contracts.
b. Architect/Engineer's costs for redesign or revision of Contract Documents,
6. He will reimburse the Owner separately for fees paid to the Architect/Engineer for
redesign, revision of Contract Documents, and review of each substitution request.
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01630 - 2
1.06
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER'S DUTIES
A. Review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness.
B. Notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject requested substitution.
END OF SECTION
4017
SUBSTITUTIONSAND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01630-3
GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION
(Submit five copies.)
Request No. Date
Project Name:
Project Name:
Contractor Name and Address:
Heraby requests approval of the following product or system as an "approved substitution."
Specification Section No. Page(s) Paragraph
Drawing No(s). Detail or Section No(s).
USE SEPARATE FORM FOR EACH SUBMITTAL.
Name and description of submittal for substitutions.
Manufacturer:
Address: Telephone:
Vendor:
Address: Telephone:
Are maintenance services and replacement parts available through vendor?
Differences between proposed substitution and specified item?
For finish materials and prefinished equipment, list the colors available for the specified item and the colors
available for the proposed substitution:
Manufacturer's guarantees of the proposed and specified items are:
[] Same [] Differant. Explain differences on an attachment.
Reason for not giving priority to specified item:
Substitution affects other material or systems: [] No [] Yes (If yes, attach complete data.)
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01630 - 4
Enclosed data is (with specific marks related to substitution):
[] Catalog [] Drawings [] Sample [] Tests
[] Other
List items or elements that are the same as the specified item.
[] Reports
Attach list of similar projects using the product attachment. Include Owner, and Owner's representative to
contact.
State effects of substitution on construction schedule, and changes in other work or project.
What license fees or royalties are required?
The undersigned states that the function, appearance, quality and results are equivalent or superior to the
specified items and that Substantial Completion will not be affected.
Submitted by:
Firm
Owner's Signature:
For the Design Professional
rn Accepted rn Accepted as noted
[] Not Accepted [] Received late
By:
Date:
Remarks:
4017
SUBSTITUTIONSAND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01630- 5
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
SECTION 01710
CLEANING UP
Execute cleaning, during progress of Work, and at completion of Work, as required by the
General Conditions.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract.
B. Cleaning up required for specific Products or work; Specification Section for that work.
1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
Fire Protection: Store volatile waste in covered metal containers and remove from the
premises daily.
Pollution Control: Conduct clean-up and disposal operations to comply with local codes,
ordinances and anti-pollution laws.
1. Burning or burying of rubbish and waste materials on the project site is prohibited.
2. Disposal of volatile fluid wastes, (such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner), in storm
or sanitary sewer systems or into streams or waterways is prohibited.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS
A. Use only cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or property and which will
not damage surfaces.
B. Use only those cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer of the surface to be
cleaned.
C. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by the cleaning material
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Execute periodic cleaning to keep Work, site and adjacent properties free from
accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and debris, resulting from construction operations.
B. At not less than every week during the progress of Work, clean up the site and legally
dispose of waste materials, rubbish and debris away from the site.
C. Provide on-site dump containers for collection of waste materials, rubbish and debris.
CLEANING UP
01710 - 1
3.02
3.02
3.03
D. Do not allow waste materials, rubbish and debris to accumulate and become an unsightly or
hazardous condition.
E. Lower waste materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible; do not drop
or throw materials from heights.
CLEAN-OUT FOR CONCRETE TRUCKS
A. Concrete trucks must be cleaned out off-site.
DUST CONTROL
A. Sprinkle dusty debris with water.
B. Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from the cleaning process
will not fall on wet or newly painted surfaces.
FINAL CLEANING
Employ skilled workmen far final cleaning.
Remove grease, mastics, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints and other foreign
materials from sight on exposed surfaces,
Repair, patch and touch up marred surfaces to match adjacent finishes.
Broom clean paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds.
Polish glossy surfaces to a clear shine.
Prior to final completion, or Owner occupancy, conduct an inspection of sight-exposed
surfaces, and all work areas, to verify that the entire Work is clean.
D.
E.
F.
END OF SECTION
CLEANING UP
01710 - 2
SECTION 02100
SITE PREPARATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE: Work in this section includes furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and services required
for clearing and grubbing, minor demolition, removal and disposal of items as specified herein and
on the plans.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Section 02200 - Earthwork.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 No products are required to execute this work, except as the Contractor may deem necessary.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING:
Cleadng and grubbing shall consist of removing all natural and artificial objectionable
materials from the project site or from limited areas of construction specified within the site.
In general, clearing and grubbing shall be performed in advance of grading and earthwork
operations and shall be performed only in the area of earthwork operations.
Buried material such as logs, stumps, roots of downed trees that are greater than one and
one-half (1~") inches in diameters, matted roots, rubbish, and foreign debris shall be
grubbed and removed to a minimum depth of twenty-four (24") inches below proposed
finished grades.
De
Ground covers of weeds, grass, and other herbaceous vegetation shall be removed prior to
the start of earthwork operations. Such removal shall be accomplished by "blading" off the
uppermost layers of sod or root-matted soil for removal.
3.02 PAVEMENT REMOVAL:
Concrate or asphalt pavements shall be removed to neatly sawed edges. Saw cuts shall be
made to a minimum depth of one and one-half (1'/2") inches. If a saw cut in concrete
pavement falls within three (3') feet of an existing score joint, construction joint, saw joint,
cold joint, expansion joint, or edge, the concrete shall be removed to that joint or edge. All
saw cuts shall be parallel and/or perpendicular to the line of existing pavement. If the edge
of a cut is damaged subsequent to saw cutting, the pavement shall again be sawed to a neat,
straight line for the purpose of removing the damaged area.
Be
Concrete curb and gutter shall be removed as specified above. No section to be replaced
shall be smaller than thirty (30") inches in length or width.
3.03
MINOR DEMOLITION: There may be certain undetermined structures and improvements on the site
that must be removed before construction can commence. Unless otherwise specified, such items
become the property of the Contractor for subsequent disposal,
4017
SITE PREPARATION
02100 - 1
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07
3.08
USE OF EXPLOSIVES: The use of explosives will not be permitted in site preparation operations
unless specifically permitted by the Owner in writing.
BACKFILLING: All holes, cavities, and depressions in the ground caused by site preparation
operations will be backfilled and tamped to normal compaction and will be graded to prevent ponding
of water and to promote drainage. In areas that are to be immediately excavated. the Owner may
permit holes, etc., to remain open.
DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS: Unless otherwise stated, materials generated by clearing,
grubbing, removal, and demolition shall be known as "waste" or "spoils" and shall be removed from
the site and legally disposed of by the Contractor. Similar materials may be unearthed or generated
by earthwork or~eretions. Unless otheRvise specified any merchantable items become the property
of the Contractor.
STORM WATER MANAGEMENT PRACTICES: During the progress of the work the Contractor shall
provide erosion control barriers, silt fences, and other techniques in accordance with best
management practices. Refer to Section 02200 for additional requirements.
PROTECTION OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS AND UTILITIES: During construction, the Contractor
shall use extreme caution to protect the existing improvements and utilities. Prior to the start of
construction the Contractor shall coordinate and vedfy, with the City, and local utility companies, the
location of all existing utilities to remain. Also prior to construction, the Contractor shall visually
inventory all damage to existing surrounding improvements and shall make a written or video record
of this damage and present it to the Owner. If existing utilities or improvements are damaged during
construction the Contractor shall repair it at no cost to the Owner. All repair shall, to the Owner's
satisfaction, equal or exceed the condition of the improvements or utilities prior to the damage.
END OF SECTION
SITE PREPARATION
02100 - 2
SECTION 02200
EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE: Work in this section includes furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and services required
to construct, shape. and finish earthwork to the required lines, grades, and cross sections as specified
herein and on the plans.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Section 00200 - Subsurface Investigation.
B. Section 02100 - Site Preparation.
C. Section 02210 - Fine Grading.
D. Grading Plan: Refer to plan sheets.
1.03
TEST REPORTS: The Contractor will bear the cost of all testing requirements and will submit test
reports from a commercial testing laboratory as specified herein and in the Conditions of the
Contract.
1.04
METHOD OF PAYMENT: Earthwork is a necessary and incidental part of the work. The total cost will
be included in the Bid Proposal. Payment will not be made on a unit price basis nor by any other
separate measured payment method.
PART 2 o PRODUCTS
2.01
UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION: Unclassified excavation shall consist of all excavation. unless
separately designated, within the limits of the work. Unclassified excavation includes all material
encountered regardless of its nature or the manner in which it is to be excavated.
2.02 UNCLASSIFIED FILL:
Unclassified fill shall consist of all fill within the limits of the work. All suitable native materials
removed in unclassified excavation, or similar imported materials, shall be used insofar as
practicable as unclassified fill. Properly deposited, conditioned. and compacted fill is
hereinafter referred to as "earth embankment."
Rock: Minor quantities of rock not greater than four (4") inches in greatest dimension are
permissible in fill materials used to construct earth embankment, Minor quantities of rock of
greater dimensions may be placad in the deeper fills in accordance with the State
Department of Highways and Public Transportation requirements for construction of rock
embankments, provided such placement of rock is not immediately adjacent to structures or
piers, Also, rock may be placed in the portions of embankments outside the limits of the
completed graded width where the size of the rock prohibits their incorporation in the normal
embankment layers.
2.03 TOPSOIL: Shall be as follows:
On-Site Topsoil: Topsoil shall consist of an average depth of six (6") inches of native surface
soil left in place after the ground cover of herbaceous vegetation and other objectionable
matter has been cleared by "blading," as specified in Section 02100. "Site Preparation,"
4017
EARTHWORK
02200-1
Topsoil may be greater or less than the upper six (6") inches in depth. However, it must be
removable without contamination by the subsoil or substratum or other objectionable matter
that would render it as "unsuitable material" as described herein. _
B. Imported Topsoil: Imported topsoil shall be a natural, fertile, friable soil possessing
characteristics of representative productive soils in the vicinity. It shall be obtained from
approved naturally well-drained areas. Only the top twelve (12") inches of earth shall be '
removed and used. It shall not be excessively acid or alkaline or contain toxic substances
which may be harmful to plant growth. Topsoil shall be without admixture of subsoil and shall
contain a minimum of lumps, stones, stumps, roots, or similar substances one (1") inch or
more in diameter. Acceptability of topsoil shall be determined by the Architect/Engineer or
Owner's Representative. Topsoil shall not be collected from sites that are infected with a
growth of, or the reproductive parts of, noxious weeds such as nut sedge, Johnson grass,
Bermuda grass or the like. Topsoil shall not be stripped, collected, or deposited while wet. '-
The Contractor shall furnish to the Architect/Engineer, in writing, the location where topsoil
is to be obtained, as well as a one (1) gallon sample of such soil.
2.04 IMPORTED FILL:
A. Imported fill materials shall be used for the construction of earth embankment in the event
that (1) the volume of unclassified excavation is less than the volume of fill required for earth _
embankment and/or (2)the condition of materials removed in unclassified excavation makes
them unsuitable for use in the construction of earth embankment.
B. The Contractor shall haul and place imported fill obtained from off-site sources as necessary
to construct the embankment and various other details of the construction plans. All costs
related to such imported fill will be included in the contract price, and no additional or
separate payment for imported fill will be due the Contractor. _
C. A sample of the proposed imported fill must be provided by the Contractor and be approved
by the Architect/Engineer. In general, imported material must be equal to or better than native
material in quality and engineering characteristics. The Architect/Engineer may also require
the Contractor to provided a material analysis test of the proposed fill.
2.05 SELECT MATERIALS:
A. Select materials shall be imported from off-site sources, unless they are available from
specifically designated areas on the site as marked on the plans.
B. Select Fill: Select fill shall be used for the construction of subgrades under building
foundations, slabs on grade, and other concrete construction as shown and detailed on the
plans. All select fill shall be sandy material or other suitable granular material (more than fifty
(50%) percent by weight retained on a No. 200 sieve) and shall have a plasticity index not
less than four (4) nor more than fifteen (15). Properly deposited, conditioned, and compacted
select fill is hereinafter referred to as "select embankment."
C. Testing Requirements:
1. The Contractor shall have the testing lab to provide a material analysis test of a pit
sample of select fill prior to hauling it to the site. This test will include the percentage
by weight retained on a No. 200 sieve, the plasticity index, a physical description of
the material, and the Standard AASHTO Density and optimum moisture content as
required in the execution of "DENSITY CONTROL" in this specification. Tests
performed on samples of fill material used for other projects are unacceptable.
EARTHWORK
4o17 02200 - 2
The Contractor shall have the testing lab to provide a maximum of eight (8)
additional material analysis tests as described above for specimens chosen by the
Owner or AmhitectJEngineer after an entire lift of select fill material is hauled and
deposited on the prepared subgrade, and all steps have been executed except for
conditioning and compaction as required in the execution of "EARTH
EMBANKMENT" and "SELECT EMBANKMENT" of this specification. The Owner or
Architect/Engineer may cell for a series of tests from the same lift or from any given
lift of deposited material.
Sand Cushion: Sand cushion shall be placed to the depth indiceted on the plans and details
as a leveling course between soil subgrade and concrete pavement. Cushion sand shall be
clean, coarse construction sand containing not more than five (5%) percent clay and shall be
free of unsuitable material.
2.06 UNSUITABLE MATERIALS:
Topsoil, select material, imported fill, or unclassified fill will be declared as "unsuitable" by the
Owner if, in his opinion, any of the following conditions or matter and particles are present
to a degree that is judged detrimental to the proposed use of the material.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Moisture.
Decayed or undecayed vegetation.
Hardpan day, heavy clay, or clay balls.
Rubbish.
Construction rubble.
Sand or gravel.
Rocks, cobbles, or boulders.
Cementious matter.
Foreign matter of any kind.
B. Unsuitable materials will be disposed of as "waste" as specified in Section 02100.
Wet Matedah If fill material is unsatisfactory for use as embankment solely beceuse of high
moisture content, the Architect/Engineer may grant the Contractor permission to process the
material to reduce the moisture content to a usable optimum condition.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
SITE PREPARATION: In general, "site preparation," as specified in Section 02100, shall be
performed in advance of grading and earthwork operations and shall be completed over the entire
area of earthwork operations.
3.02 TOPSOIL:
The removal and storage of topsoil shall occur after site preparation is complete and before
excevation and embankment construction begin. Likewise, topsoil will be replaced after
excevation and embankment construction are complete.
Removal: Topsoil shall be stripped to an average depth of six (6") inches from areas where
excevation and embankment construction are plan ned. Topsoil may be obtained from greater
depths if it is uncentaminated by the substratum and it is of good quality, in the opinion of the
Architect/Engineer.
Storage: Topsoil shall be stored in stockpiles conveniently Ioceted to areas that will later
receive the topsoil. Stockpiles shall be out of the way of earthwork operations in Iocetions
4017
EARTHWORK
02200- 3
approved by the Owner or Architect/Engineer. Stored topsoil shall be kept separate from
other excavated materials and shall be protected from contamination by objectionable
materials that would render it unsuitable.
Timing: Topsoil will not be raplaced (deposited) until construction activities are complete that
would create undesirable conditions in the topsoil, such as overcompaction or contamination.
Trenching for items such as electrical conduit and irrigation prassure lines must be complete
before topsoil replacement may begin.
Replacement: Topsoil will be deposited in a single layer or lift. It will be placed, processed,
compacted, and graded to leave a finished layer of topsoil not less than five (5") inches in
depth. Unless otherwise indicated, topsoil will be replaced over all areas of earthwork
(including slopes), except where pavement is planned.
Grading: Topsoil will be final graded to the elevations shown on the plans. Unless otherwise
indicated, the final plane of compacted topsoil will be between 0.10 foot and one (1") inch
below adjacent paved surfaces. Fine grading will be accomplished with a weighted spike
harrow, weighted drag, tractor box blade, light maintainer, or other acceptable machinery.
Grad ing operations and equipment will be such that topsoil does not become overcompacted.
Bulldozer blades and front-end loader buckets are not acceptable devices for topsoil grading
operations.
Acceptability: Finished areas of topsoil are satisfactory if they are true to grade, true in plane,
even in gradient (slope), uniform in surface texture, and of normal compaction. Areas of
loose granular pockets or of overcompacted soils are not acceptable and will be reworked.
Finished areas will promote surface drainage and will be ready for turfgrass planting.
3.03 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION:
All excavated areas shall be maintained in a condition to assure proper drainage at all times,
and ditches and sumps shall be constructed and maintained to avoid damage to the areas
under construction.
B. Surplus Material:
Surplus excavation is that quantity of material that may be left over after the grading
plan is executed, and all earthwork operations, including excavation, embankment
construction, topsoil replacement. and final grading, are completed. Unless
otherwise specified, the Contractor shall dispose of surplus material as "waste" as
specified in Section 02100.
In certain cases, if the on-site excavation and embankment quantities are not
balanced and there is a surplus of excavated material, the Architect/Engineer may
permit the Contractor to "waste" the surplus by constructing additional embankment
in an approved location. No additional payment for such work would be due that
Contractor.
Excavation in Rock: The use of explosives will not be permitted unless specifically permitted
in writing by the Owner. Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, excavation in solid rock
shall extend six (6") inches below required subgrade elevation for the entire width of the area
under construction and shall be backfilled with suitable materials as indicated on the plans.
EARTHWORK
02200 - 4
3.04
EARTH
A,
EMBANKMENT:
Earth embankment is defined as embankment composed of suitable materials removed in
unclassified excavation and/or imported fill. The construction of embankment includes
preparing the area on which fill is to be placed and the depositing, conditioning, and
compaction of fill material.
General: Except as otherwise required by the plans, all embankment shall be constructed in
layers approximately parallel to the finished grade of the graded area, and each layer shall
be so constructed as to provide a uniform slope as shown on the grading plan.
Embankments shall be constructed to correspond to the general shape of the typical sections
shown on the plans, and each section of the embankment shall correspond to the detailed
section or slopes established by the drawings. After completion of the graded area,
embankment shall be continuously maintained to its finished section and grade until the
project is accepted.
Preparation: Prior to placing any embankment, all preparatory operations will have been
completed on the excavation sources and areas over which the embankment is to be placed.
Stump holes or other small excavations in the limits of the embankments shall be backfilled
with suitable material and thoroughly tamped by approved methods before commencing
embankment construction. The surface of the ground, including plowed, loosened ground,
or surfaces toughened by small washes or otherwise, shall be restored to approximately its
original slope by blading or other methods, and, where indicated on the plans or required by
the Architect/Engineer, the ground surface, thus prepared, shall be compacted by sprinkling
and rolling.
Scarification: The surface of all areas and slopes over which fill is to be placed, other than
rock, shall be scarified to a depth of four (4") to six (6") inches to provide a bond between the
existing surface and the proposed embankment. Scarification shall be accomplished by
plowing, discing, or other approved means. The material that has been loosened shall be
recompacted with the new embankment.
Benching: Scarification is normally adequate for sloping surfaces. However, in certain cases
where fill is to be placed against hillsides or existing embankment with slopes greater than
four to one (4:1), the Architect/Engineer may direct the Contractor to key the fill material to
the existing slopes by benching. A minimum of two (2') feet normal to the slope shall be
removed and recompacted to insure that the new work is constructed on a firm foundation
free of loose or disturbed material.
Depositing: Fill material shall be placed in horizontal layers or lifts, evenly spread, not to
exceed eight (8") inches in loose depth before conditioning and compaction. Unless
otherwise permitted, each layer of fill material shall cover the length and width of the area to
be filled and shall be conditioned and compacted before the next higher layer of fill is placed.
Adequate drainage shall be maintained at all times.
Watering: At the time of compaction, the moisture content of fill material shall be such that
the specified compaction will be obtained, and the fill will be firm, hard, and unyielding. Fill
material which contains excessive moisture shall not be compacted until it is dry enough to
obtain the specified compaction.
Compacting: Each layer of earth fill shall be compacted by approved tamping or sheepsfoot
rollers, pneumatic tire rollers, or other mechanical means acceptable to the
Architect/Engineer. Hand-directed compaction equipment shall be used in areas inaccessible
to vehicular compactors.
4017
EARTHWORK
02200 ~ 5
3.05
Grading: Embankments shall be constructed in proper sequence and at proper densities for
their respective functions. All embankment serves in one capacity or another as subgrade
(e.g., under topsoil, under concrete and asphalt pavement, under structures, etc.).
Accordingly, the upper layer of embankment shall be graded to within plus or minus 0.10 foot
of proper subgrade elevation prior to depositing topsoil, and prior to the construction of
pavements, slabs, etc.
SELECT EMBANKMENT: Select embankment is defined as embankment constructed of select fill
material. In general, it is constructed the same as earth embankment, except as described below.
Subgrade: In cases where select fill is to be placed on a subgrade surface that is proposed
to be within 0.50 foot in elevation of the existing surface grade, the top six (6") inches of soil
shall be stripped and removed as unsuitable waste. A minimum of six (6") inches of fill
comprising the subgrade for the select embankment shall be prepared and compacted as
"earth embankment under select embankment" (see Density Control paragraph).
Mixing: If the select fill is non-uniform in material composition, the Contractor may elect to
mix with discing or pulverizing machinery to ensure that it meets the specified density and
material analysis testing requirements. During mixing, care shall be taken not to disturb the
subgrade nor to incorporate the subgrade material into the select material. Mixing would
occur between the depositing and watering steps described in the embankment construction
process. Also. see "Testing Requirements" under "S ELECT MATE RIALS" of the PROD UCTS
section of this specification.
3.06 DENSITY CONTROL:
3.07
Earth Embankment in General: Earth embankment shall be compacted in lifts at eighty-eight
(88%) to ninety-two (92%) percent of Standard Density ASTM D698 with plus or minus two
(2) percentage points of optimum moisture content.
Earth Embankment Under Structures and Pavement: The top six (6") inches of natural earth
comprising the subgrade for structural slabs or for areas of pavement shall be ninety-two
(92%) to ninety-eight (98%) percent of Standard AASHTO Density with the moisture content
at two (2%) to four (4%) pement above optimum. Sidewalks six (6') feet and less in width and
individual paved areas less than one hundred fifty (150) square feet in surface area are
excluded from this requirement.
Earth Embankment Under Select Embankment: The top six (6") inches of earth embankment
under select embankment shall be ninety-two (92%) to ninety-eight (98%) percent of
Standard AASHTO Density with the moisture content at two (2%) to four (4%) percent above
optimum.
Select Embankment: The entire depth of select embankment shall be compacted in lifts to
a minimum ninety-five (95%) percent of Standard AASHTO Density with the moisture content
plus or minus two (2%) percent of optimum. See "Testing Requirements" under "SELECT
MATERIALS" of the PRODUCTS section of this specfficetion.
MOISTURE MAINTENANCE: The spec'ffied moisture content shall be maintained in all embankments
that are to function as subgrade for structures, areas of pavement, or for select embankment. After
completion of the embankment, the Contractor shall prevent excessive loss of moisture in the
embankment by sprinkling as required. Loss of moisture in excess of two (2%) percent below
optimum in the top twelve (12") inches of the fill will require that the top twelve (12") inches of the
embankment be scerified, wetted, and recompacted pdor to placement of the structure, select fill or
pavement. If desired, the Contractor may place an asphalt membrane of emulsified oi' cutback
asphalt over the completed embankment and thus eliminate the sprinkling requirement.
EARTI-BNORK
02200 - 6
3.08
3.09
3,10
TESTING: Spot field tests of embankment densities shall be required of the Contractor by the Owner
at the Contractor's expense at the place and time of their choosing. Any area not meeting density
control requirements shall be immediately excavated, reconstructed, and retested, at the expense
of the Contractor, until satisfactory results are obtained. Up to a total of thirty (30) tests may be
required.
STORM WATER MANAGEMENT: The Contractor shall perform his construction operations in
accordance with best management practices to control pollutants in storm water discharges during
construction. The Contractor shall conform to local, state and federal regulations regarding control
of storm water pollutsnts, silt and sediments leaving the site.
RECORD DRAWl NGS: Upon completion of the grading operations the Contractor must verity the site
grading by having a registered public surveyor shoot grades on a 25' grid overlaid over the baseball
and soccer playing field areas. The grades must be transferred to a reproducible drawing of the
grading plan for approval by the Owner or Architect/Engineer. No construction can proceed until
this "Record Drawing" has been approved by the Owner. All cost for surveying must be borne
by the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
4017
EARTHWORK
02200-7
SECTION 02240
LIME TREATED SUBGRADE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE: This item shall consist of the treating of subgrade by the pulverizing, addition of thirty-eight
(38 Ibs.) pounds or not less than seven (7%) percent by dry weight of hydrated lime per square yard,
and mixing and compacting the resulting material to required density. This item applies to natural
ground or embankment and shall be constructed as specified herein and in conformance with typical
sections, lines and grades as shown on the drawings. Lime treated subgrade applies for all details
where called for on the drawings.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Section 02200 - Earthwork.
B. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit to Architect/Engineer in cOnformance with the requirements of the GENERAL
PROVISIONS.
A. Test reports from commercial testing laboratory as outlined herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
All hydrated lime shall be Type A, as defined by Item 264, "Hydrated Lime and Lime Slurry,"
of the 1982 Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets, and Bridges
adopted by the State Department of Highways and Public Transportation on September 1,
1982, and shall consist of a dry powder obtained by treating quicklime with enough water to
satisfy its chemical affinity for water under the conditions of its hydration. This material is to
consist essentially of calcium hydroxide or a mixture of calcium hydroxide and a small
allowable percentage of calcium oxide, magnesium oxide, and magnesium hydroxide.
B. Hydrated lime shall conform to the following chemical and physical requirements:
1. Chemical Composition:
Total "active" lime content, percent by weight...Min. 90.0% (i.e., % by wt. (Ca(OH)2 + % by
wt. CaO)
*2,
*Note: No more than 5% by weight calcium oxide (unhydrated lime) will be allowed
in determining the total "active" lime content.
3. Unhydrated lime content, percent by weight CaO.,.Max. 5.0%
4. "Free Water" content, percant by weight H20...Max. 4,0%
Residue (Wet Sieve): The percent by weight of residue retained shall conform to the fol Iowing
requirements:
1. Residue retained on a No. 6 (3360 micron) sieve...Max. 0.1%
4017
LIME TREATED SUBGRADE
02240-1
2. Residue retained on a No. 30 (590 micron) sieve...Max. 3.0%
3. Hydrated lime for stabilization purposes shall be applied, as provided in the _
governing specifications, mixed with water to form a slurry.
D. Sampling and Testing: The sampling and testing of lime slurry shall be as determined by Test
Method Tex-600-J, "Lime Testing Procedure." "
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL:
A. It is the primary requirement of this specification to secure a completed course of treated
subgrade containing a uniform lime mixture, free from loose or segregated areas, of uniform
density and moisture, well bound for its full depth and with a smooth surface suitable for
placing the hot mix asphaltic concrete surface or concrete surface course. It shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor to regulate the sequence of his work, to use the proper
amount of lime specified, maintain the work, and re-work the material as necessary to meet
the above requirements.
B. Prior to beginning any lime treatment, all subgrade surfaces shall be constructed and shaped _
to conform to the typical sections, lines and grades as shown on the plans. After the
subgrade has been shaped and prepared, it shall be scarified to full width and depth of
stabilization. Full depth will be six (6") inches, and full width shall be one (1') foot outside all
new curbs or pavement surfaces, or full width from edge to edge of existing curbs or
pavement surfaces.
3.02 APPLICATION: _
A. The lime is to be applied to such an area so that the mixing operation can be completed
during the same working day as the application of hydrated lime is made. The application will
be accomplished by the "slurry' method at the rate of 27 pounds of lime per square yard for
subgrade in accordance with THD Item 260.
B. Hydrated lime and water are to be combined to form a mixture for the lime application.
Approximately 3,200 pounds of lime to 500-600 gallons of water will produce a satisfactory
mixture.
C. The slurry is to be applied with an approved distributor or water truck by making successive
passes, if necessary, to apply the correct amount of lime. The distributor or water truck is to
be equipped with an agitator to keep the slurry in a uniform and consistent mixture.
D. Mixing with a pulvimixer must immediately follow the application of lime slurry.
3.03 MIXING:
A. First Mixing: The material and lime shall be thoroughly mixed by approved road mixers or
other approved equipment, and mixing continued until, in the opinion of the Engineer, a
homogenous, friable mixture of material and lime is obtained, free from all clods and lumps.
Materials containing plastic clays or other material which will not readily mix with lime shall
be mixed as thoroughly as possible at the time of lime application, brought to proper moisture --
content, and left to cure from one (1) to four (4) days, as directed by the Architect/Engineer.
During the curing period, the material shall be kept moist, as directed.
B. Final Mixing: After the required curing time, material shall be uniformly mixed by approved
methods. If the soil binder-lime mixture contains clods, they shall be reduced in size by
LIME TREATED SUBGRADE
02240 - 2
raking, blading, discing, harrowing, scarifying, or the use '0f other approved pulverization
methods so that when all non-slaking aggregates retained on the No, 4 sieve are removed,
the remainder of material shall meet the following requirements when tested dry by laboratory
sieves.
1. Minimum passing 1-3/4" sieve .................... 100%
2. Minimum passing No. 4 sieve ..................... 60%
During the interval of time between application and mixing, hydrated lime that has been
exposed to the open air for a period of six (6) hours or more to excessive loss due to washing
or blowing will not be accepted for payment.
3,04 COMPACTION:
3.05
3.06
Compaction of the mixture shall begin immediately after final mixing and, in no case, later
than three (3) calendar days after final mixing, unless approval is obtained from the
Architect/Engineer. The material shall be aerated or sprinkled as necessary to provide the
optimum moisture.
Final compaction shall be to a minimum of ninety-five (95%) percent of Standard AASHTO
Density as defined by AASHTO Test T-g9.
FINISHING, CURING, AND PREPARATION OF SURFACING: After the lime treated subgrade has
been compacted, it shall be brought to the required lines and grades, in accordance with the typical
sections. The completed sections shall then be finished by rolling as directed with a pneumatic or
other suitable roller sufficiently light to prevent hair cracking. The completed section shall be
moist-cured for a minimum of seven (7) days before the pavement is placed or traffic is permitted,
unless otherwise directed by the Architect/Engineer. In any case, the compacted lime treated
subgrade shall be maintained by sprinkling until such time as the paved surface is placed, The paved
surface shall be applied within fourteen (14) days, unless otherwise directed by the
Architect/Engineer. The moist curing raquirament will be rigidly enforced.
TESTING: The laboratory shall furnish to the Architect/Engineer test results of field density tests
performed at up to twenty (20) locations (one test per location) selected by the Architect/Engineer.
All tests will be performed by an approved laboratory at the expense of the Owner. Areas failing to
meet density requirements herein specified shall be reconstructed and re-tested at the expense of
the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
4017
LIME TREATED SUBGRADE
02240- 3
SECTION 02545
INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE: Work in this section shall include all labor, materials, equipment. tools, etc., and services
necessary to install interlocking concrete pavers and related accessory items as required by the
details shown on the drawings.
1.02 SAMPLES AND SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit certified test results by an independent testing agency indicating that the pavers meet
the National Concrete Manufacturer's Association standards for strength, durability, and size.
B. The Contractor shall furnish a one (1) square foot sample for each of the specified paver for
approval by the Owner.
1.03 DELIVERY AND HANDLING: Pavers shall be delivered and unloaded at the job site on pallets and
bound in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product dudng handling, transporting and
unloading. Broken or chipped pavers will not be accepted and shall be disposed of off the Project site
at the Contractor's expense.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. Manufacturer: Interlocking concrete pavers shall be as manufactured by:
1. Pavestone Co., Grapevine, Texas, (817) 481-5802; or,
2. Pavex, Inc., Austin, Texas, (512) 385-8444; or,
3. Approved Equal.
B. Shape: Paver shape shall be Holland Stone or equal.
C. Thickness: Pavers shall be two and three-eighths (2 %") inches thick.
D. Color: Color to be selected by the Owner's Representative.
E. Material Requirements:
1. Cement: All units shall contain portland cement and shaft conform to ASTM C 150.
2. Aggregates: Aggregate for each unit shall conform to ASTM C 33, normal weight
concrete aggregate, gradation per manufacturer's directions.
3. Strength: The average compressive strength of all units shall not be less than 5,200
psi with no individual unit strength less than 4,680 psi as tested in accordance with
ASTM C 140.
4. Absorption: The average absorption shall not be greater than seven (7%) percent
with no individual unit greater than ten (10%) percent.
4017
INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS
02545-1
5. Defects: All units shall be free of defects, cracks, c~ips, etc., or it will be rejected by
the Owner's Representative. All rejected units shall be removed from the site.
6. Additional Pavers: The Contractor shall supply the Owner with an additional ten units
for the Owner's future use.
G. Sand Laying Course: The sand used for the laying course shall be a well-graded, clean
washed sharp sand with one hundred (100%) percent passing a three-eights (%") inch sieve
and a maximum of three (3%) percent passing a No. 200 sieve, commonly known as
manufactured concrete sand. MASON SAND SHALL NOT BE USED
H. Concrete Edge Restraint: All concrete used shall be 3,000 psi at twenty-eight (28) days using
five (5) sacks of cement per cubic yard of mix with a maximum of seven (7) gallons of water
per sack. Concrete reinforcement shall be a No. 3 bar. Concrete work shall conform to
Section 02510 - Concrete Paving.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 The Contractor for the installation of the interlocking pavers shall be experienced in paver installation.
3.02 MANUFACTURER°S REPRESENTATIVE: A representative of the manufacturer shall be present at
various intervals of paver installation and preparation and shall approve the methods of the various
steps of the installation of the pavers.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE PAVERS: Care shall be taken so that adjacent construction activity
shall not damage the completed paver installation.
3.04 FINISH SURFACE: The final surface of the finish paver areas shall be uniform and true. Pavers which
are clepressed or raised to such a degree that, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative will cause
a hazard, will be subject to removal and replacement prior to final acceptance.
3.05 GUARANTEE: All interlocking concrete paver materials and workmanship shall be guaranteed for a
period of one year. During the one year guarantee period any pavers or other items which show to
be defective shall be replaced with new material at no expense to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS
02545 - 2
SECTION 02660
PAVEMENT MARKINGS AND SIGNS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE: Provide pavement markings and signs as described on the plans and as detailed in this
section,
1.02 SUBMITTALS: Submit complete manufacturer's product data sheets for marking paint.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL:
Marking Paint: Traffic marking paint F.S. TT-P-115c, Type 11, or THD Specifications WPT-
8b white, yellow or red in color as called for.
B. Signs: Shall be as detailed on the plans.
2.02
EQUIPMENT: Equipment shall be pressurized, self-contained paint machine capable of applying a
straight line from two (2") inches to six (6") inches wide, with consistent coverage of a minimum of
200 square feet per gallon.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION:
Upon completion of new pavement installation the Contractor shall stripe, mark or line all
pavements per the layput shown on the drawings.
Provide a qualified technician to supervise equipment and application of markings. Lay out
markings using guide lines, template, and forms.
Ce
Thoroughly clean surfaces free of dirt, sand, gravel, oil and other foreign matter prior to
application of paint.
3.02 APPLICATION OF PAINT:
No striping shall be done until the new pavement has been approved by the
ArchitectJEngineer. All paint shall be applied in accordance with the recommendations of the
paint manufacturer.
Surfaces shall be dry. Application shall not be made when weather is foggy or rainy, or
ambient or pavement temperatures are below 40 degrees Fahrenheit, nor when such
conditions are anticipated during eight hours after application.
Apply marking paint at a rate of one gallon per 200 square feet using a power sprayer. Apply
markings straight and even in accordance with approved layout. Stripes shall be four (4")
inches wide, except where noted otherwise.
3.03 CLEANING: Remove any overspray from surfaces other than those requiring marking paint.
4017
PAVEMENT MARKINGS AND SIGNS
02660 - 1
3.04 SIGNS: Signs shall be installed as located and as detailed on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
PAVEMENT MARKINGS AND SIGNS
4o17 02660 - 2
SECTION 02800
TURFGRASS PLANTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE: This work includes all labor, materials, and equipment for soil preparation, fertilization,
planting, and other requirements regarding turfgrass planting areas shown on the plans.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Section 02200 - Earthwork.
B. Section 02810 - Irrigation System.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
Delivery Receipts and Invoices: All delivery receipts and copies of invoices for materials used
for this work shall be subject to checking by the Owner or his representative and shall be
subsequently delivered to the office of the Owner.
Samples and Producers' Specifications: Various samples, certificates, and specifications of
seed, fertilizer and other materials shall be submitted for approval as required by subsequent
sections of this specification.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 TURFGRASS:
Bermudagrass Seed: Turfgrass seed shall be the "PRIMAVERA" cultivar of "Cynodon
dactylon" (Bermudagrass). The seed shall be harvested within one (1) year prior to planting,
free of Johnsongrass, field bind weed, dodder seed, and free of other weed seed to the limits
allowable under the Federal Seed Act and applicable seed laws. The seed shall not be a
mixture. The seed shall be hulled, extra fancy grade, treated with fungicide, and have a
germination and purity that will produce, after allowance for Federal Seed Act tolerances, a
pure live seed content of not less than 85%, using the formula: purity % times (germination
% times plus hard or sound seed%). Seed shall be labeled in accordance with U. S.
Department of Agriculture rules and regulations.
Certificate Submittal: Prior to planting, provide the Owner or his representative with
the State Certificate stating analysis of purity and germination of seed.
B=
Ryegrass Seed: Turfgrass seed shall be "Lolium multiflorum" (Italian or Annual Ryegrass).
The seed shall be harvested within one (1) year prior to planting and shall be free of perennial
ryegrass seed, other grass seed, and weed seed to the limits allowable under the Federal
Seed Act and applicable seed taws. Seed shall be at least 95% pure and shall have a 90%
minimum germination rate.
Certificate Submittal: Prior to planting, provide the Owner or his representative with
the State Certificate stating analysis of purity and germination of seed.
Hybrid Bermuda Sod: Tuffgrass sod shall be the Tifway 419 hybrid strain of "Cynodon
dactyton" (Hybrid Bermuda grass). Sod shall consist of stolons, leaf blades. rhizomes, and
roots with a healthy, virile system of dense, thickly matted roots throughout the soil of the sod
for a thickness not less than three-quarters (%") inch. Sod shall be alive, healthy, vigorous,
4017
TURFGRASS PLANTING
02800 - 1
free of insects, disease, stones, and undesirable foreign materials and grasses. The grass
shall have been mowed prior to sod cutting so that the height of the grass shall not exceed
two (2") inches. Sod shall have been produced on growing beds of sandy-loam topsoil.
Sod shall not be harvested or planted when its moisture condition is so excessively wet or
dry that its survival will be affected. All sod is to be harvested, delivered, and planted within
a thirty-six (36) hour period of time. Sod shall be protected from exposure to wind, sun, and
freezing. If sod is stacked, it shall be kept moist and shall be stacked roots-to-roots and
grass-to-grass.
1. Dimensions: All sod placed on baseball fields shall have been machine cut in
rolls to uniform soil thickness of one (1") inch plus or minus one-quarter (¼") inch.
All sod shall be of the same thickness. Rectangular sections of sod may vary in
length, but all shall be of equal width and of a size that permits the sod to be lifted,
handled, and rolled without breaking. Typical roll size shall be 42" wide by 100' long.
Broken pads and torn, uneven ends will be unacceptable.
2. Architect/Engineer must approve sod and supplier prior to shipment.
2.02 FERTILIZER:
A. General: Fertilizer shall be a commercial product, uniform in composition, free flowing, and
suitable for application with approved equipment. Fertilizer shall be delivered to the site in
fully labeled original containers. Fertilizer which has been exposed to high humidity and
moisture, has become caked or otherwise damaged making it unsuitable for use, will not be
acceptable.
B. Initial Planting Application: Fertilizer for the initial planting application shall be of an organic
base containing by weight the following (or other approved) percentages of nutrients:
15-15-15 (N-P-K), also containing 10-15% sulphate and traces of iron and zinc as required
and approved by the Owner.
1. Specification Submittal: Submit a sample label or specification of the fertilizer
proposed to be used for the Owner's approval.
C. Post Planting Application: Fertilizer for the post planting application will be a chemical base
fertilizer containing by weight the following ratio of nutrients: 3-1-2 (N-P-K).
1. Specification Submittal: Submit a sample label or specification of the fertilizer
proposed to be used for the Owner's approval.
2.03 HYDROMULCH MATERIALS:
A, Mulch: All mulch will be manufactured from hardwoods only and will be refined specifically
for tuff hydromulch applications. Three approved mulches are manufactured by Conwed,
Weyerhauser, and Texas Fiber Co.
1. Submittal: Submit a sample label or specification and a sample packet of the
proposed mulch for the Owner's approval.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL: All tufting operations are to be executed across the slope, parallel to finished grade
contours.
TURFGRASS PLANTING
02800 - 2
3.02 SCHEDULE:
A. The seven baseball fields must be planted with Tifway419 Bermuda sod by or before August
31,2000.
B. Any seed areas not established by September 15, 2000, will be seeded and established with
ryegrass upon completion of construction. All ryegrass areas will be tilled under, regraded
and Bermuda grass seed (PRIMAVERA) established to a uniform stand before July 15, 2001.
The Contractor will be responsible for producing an acceptable stand of Bermuda grass as
specified.
C. Grass planting can proceed only after the fine grading has been approved by the
Architect/Engineer.
3.03 SOIL PREPARATION:
A. Tillage: Tillage shall be accomplished to loosen the soil, destroy existing vegetation, and
prepare an acceptable seed/sod bed. All areas shall be tilled with a heavy duty disc or a
chisel-type breaking plow, chisels set not more than ten (10") inches apart. Initial tillage shall
be done in a crossing pattern for double coverage, then followed by a disc harrow. Depth of
tillage shall be five (5") inches.
B. Cleaning: Soil shall be further prepared by the removal of debris, building materials, rubbish,
weeds, and stones larger than three-quarter (3,/.,,) inches in diameter.
C. Fine Grading: After tillage and cleaning, all areas to be planted shall be leveled, fine graded,
and drug with a weighted spike harrow or float drag. The required result shall be the
elimination of ruts, depressions, humps, and objectionable soil clods. This shall be the final
soil preparation step to be completed before the commencement of fertilizing and planting.
D. Rock Removal: During the soil preparation process, a "Rock Pick" or other approved piece
of machinery shall be used to gather surface stones as small as three-quarter (~") inch in
diameter. The Contractor shall be responsible for the disposal of collected materials as waste
per "Clean Up," Paragraph 3.12.
3.04 FERTILIZING:
A. Initial Planting Application: The fertilizer shall be applied at the rate of nine (9) pounds per
one thousand (1000) square feet (400 pounds per acre).
1. Timing: The initial planting application of fertilizer for seeded areas shall be applied
after the soil preparation, but not more than two (2) days prior to turfgrass planting.
Fertilizer shall be applied over sodded areas after planting, but not more than two (2)
days later.
B. Post Planting Application: Thirty (30) days after planting, turfgrass areas shall receive the
specified post planting fertilizer at the rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per one thousand
(1,000) square feet (45 pounds per acre).
1. Timing: The Owner or his representative will determine if it is too late in the growing
season for the post planting application. In the event that it is, the application shall
be made in the spring of the next year, or the cost of the application may become a
credit due to the Owner.
TURFGRASS PLANTING
02800 - 3
2. Post Planting Maintenance: See Paragraph 3.9. Areas without a uniform stand
(complete coverage) that must be maintained later than thirty (30) days after the
initial planting shall receive subsequent applications of fertilizer, as described above,
every thirty (30) days until a uniform stand is achieved.
3.05 PLANTING:
A. Seeding: Within two (2) days of soil preparation and initial fertilizing apply Bermuda grass
seed at the rate of three (3) pounds per one thousand (1000) square feet (130 pounds per
acre)/ryegrass seed at the rate of eight (8) pounds per one thousand (1000) square feet (350
pounds per acre), Seed shall be uniformly placed with a Brillion seeder-cultipacker.
B. Hydromulch Capping: Immediately following seeding operations, all seeded tuff areas are to
be capped with wood fiber mulch, using conventional "Hydro-Mulch" equipment as
manufactured by the Bowie Machine Works, or an approved equal. The hydromulch cap shall
be applied at the rate of forty-six (46) pounds per one thousand (1,000) square feet (2,000
pounds per acre), using water at the rate of twenty-three (23) gallons per one thousand
(1,000) square feet (1,000 gallons per acre). "'
C. Solid Sodding:
1. Laying sod: Prior to laying the sod, the planting bed shall be raked smooth to true
grade and moistened to a depth of four (4") inches, but not to the extent causing
puddling. The sod shall be laid smoothly, tightly butted edge to edge, and with
staggered joints.
2. Rolling: The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed by rolling so
as to eliminate all air pockets, provide a true and even surface, and insure knitting
without displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas. All
transitions between sod and existing tuff areas shall be undercut and rolled to
provide a smooth, level transition.
3. Smoothing: Following compaction, fine screened soil of good quality shall be used
to fill all cracks between sod sections. Excess soil shall be worked into the grass with
suitable equipment and shall be well watered. The quantity of fill soil shall be such
that it will cause no smothering of the grass.
4. Topdressing: Approximately one week after initial planting of sod the entire sodded
area shall be mowed to a height of one half (~") inch, then topdressed with a fine
sandy loam material that is similar to the topsoil on the field. Topdressing shall be -
applied at a rate of approximately 0.3 cubic yards per thousand square feet, (0.1"
deep). Subsequently, the topdressing shall be worked in and smoothed over with
a flexible steel drag mater by brushing.
5. Topdressing and/or rolling shall be repeated at no cost to the owner if the NE
determines additional smoothing is required.
3.06 PROTECTION: No heavy equipment shall be moved over the planted tuff area unless the soil is again
prepared, graded, leveled, and replanted. It will be the responsibility of this Contractor to protect all
paving surfaces, curbs, utilities, plant materials, and any other existing improvements from damage.
Any damages shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to the Owner. This Contractor will also locate
and stake all irrigation heads, valve risers, etc., prior to beginning any soil preparation work.
TURFGRASS PLANTING
02800 - 4
3.07 IRRIGATION SYSTEM:
A. The proposed irrigation system must be complete in al_l respects and must be completely
operational before turfgrass planting may begin. After planting, any breakdowns in the
irrigation system attributable to warranty items must be immediately repaired by the
Contractor. Otherwise, the cost of replacing the lost turf caused by the Contractor's failure
to promptly repair the irrigation system will be fully borne by the Contractor.
B. All tuff areas not covered by the proposed irrigation systems must be irrigated with a
temporary above-ground irrigation system. The above-ground temporary irrigation system
shall remain in place until all non-irrigated turf areas have established an acceptable stand
of turfgrass. Contractor shall be responsible for installation, operation and removal of the
temporary system. All cost associated with the temporary system shall be borne by the
Contractor.
3.08 ESTABLISHMENT AND ACCEPTANCE:
A. Regardless of unseasonable climatic conditions or other adverse conditions affecting planting
operations and the growth of the turfgrass, it shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor
to establish a uniform stand of turfgrass as herein specified. When adverse conditions such
as drought, cold weather, high winds, excessive precipitation, or other factors prevail to such
an extent that satisfactory results are unlikely, the Owner may, at his own discretion, stop any
phase of the work until conditions change to favor the establishment of turfgrass.
B. A uniform stand with complete coverage of the specified grass in seeded areas shall be
defined as not less than 80% coverage in a ten foot square area. Growing plants shall be
defined as healthy grass plants of two blades or more at least 1¼" inches tall.
C. Complete coverage of sodded areas shall be defined as no visible joints showing or felt
between individual sections of sod and all sections of sod must be firmly rooted to the
prepared subgrade.
3.09 POST-PLANTING MAINTENANCE: Maintenance shall begin immediately after each grass area is
planted. All planted areas will be protected and maintained by watering, weed control, and replanting
as necessary for at least thirty (30) days after initial planting and for as long as necessary to establish
a UNIFORM STAND OF THE SPECIFIED GRASS and until the entire project has been accepted by
the Owner. It is anticipated that a minimum of one (1) mowing will occur before the grass are
accepted by the Owner. All areas which are not completely covered with the specified grass at the
end of thirty (30) days will continue to be replanted and maintained by the Contractor until complete
coverage and acceptance are achieved.
A. Water: Apply at least one-half (V2") inch of water over the entire planted area every three
days. Contractor shall water thoroughly and infrequently once grass is established to
encourage deep root growth.
B. Mowing: Once grass is established the planted area shall be mowed at least twice a week
during the growing season. Grass shall be mowed to a height of one-half (Y2") inch. Mowing
during dormant season will be done as necessary. Contractor shall include at least eight (8)
mowings in his bid.
C. Weed Control: No sooner than 45 days after grass has germinated any weed growth shall
be arrested by applying MSMA broadcasted over the entire planted area. Additional
applications of MSMA will be required to eliminate weed growth that continues to grow after
the initial application. MSMA will only be used during the growing season. All week growth
TURFGRASS PLANTING
4017 02800 - 5
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
during the dormant season will be controlled with spot applications of "Round-Up." "Round-
Up" will not be used until the grass is totally dormant.
Replanting: All areas that do not produce a UNIFORM STAND OF GRASS must be replanted
until a UNIFORM STAND OF GRASS is established. The Project is not "Substantially
Complete" until the turfgrass exists in a uniform stand.
E. Edging: All tuff areas adjacent to paved areas shall be edged to maintain a neat appearance.
GRADING: All grading and placing of topsoil on any given area will be done prior to the turfgrass
installation. It will be this Contractor's responsibility to maintain the existing grades and leave them
in a true and even condition after planting turfgrass.
EROSION CONTROL: Throughout the project and the maintenance period for turfgrass, it is the
Contractor's responsibility to maintain the topsoil in place at specified grades. Topsoil and turfgrass
losses due to erosion will be replaced by the Contractor until establishment and acceptance is
achieved.
CLEAN UP: This Contractor shall remove any excess material or debris brought onto the site or
unearthed as a result of his turfgrass operations.
GUARANTEE: This Contractor shall guarantee all materials used for this work to be the type, quality,
and quantity specified.
END OF SECTION
TURFGRASS PLANTING
02800 - 6
SECTION 02830
GALVANIZED CHAIN LINK FENCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE: This section covers the furnishing of all labor and materials necessary to install the chain
link fencing as shown on the plans.
1.02 SUBMITTALS: Shop drawings shall be furnished on all fencing and gates to be installed, and the
Contractor shall submit samples of each component part of the various fencing if so required by the
Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FABRIC:
A. All chain link fabric shall be zinc or aluminum coated steel wire with a minimum tensile
strength of 75,000 psi.
1, Zinc-coated: Minimum 1.2 ounces of zinc coating per square foot of coated surface
area (ASTM A392).
2. Aluminum-coated: Minimum 0.40 ounces of aluminum coating per square foot of
coated surface area (ASTM A491 ).
B. Fabric shall be helically wound and interwoven into a diamond mesh in the following gauges
and mesh sizes determined by measuring the clear distance between parallel sides of the
mesh.
Site Fencing No. 9 gauge - 2" mesh
Backstop No. 6 gauge - 2" mesh (where called for on the plans)
C. All fabric shall have knuckled top and bottom selvage.
D. The Contractor shall submit a manufacturer°s certified test result that the zinc and aluminum
coatings meet specified standarcls.
2.02 POSTS:
A. All fence posts shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe.
B. Terminal posts shall be defined as end, pull, corner, and line posts defined as the vertical
posts installed between terminal posts.
C. All posts shall be hot-dip zinc coated on all surfaces after fabrication with a minimum of 1.8
ounces of zinc per square foot of coated surface area, conforming to ASTM A120.
D. All posts shall conform to the following sizes as called for on the plans:
6" o.d. 18.97 Ibs. per foot
4" o.d. 9.11 Ibs. per foot
3" o.d. 6.83 Ibs. per foot
E. Spacing for line posts shall be as shown on the plans.
GALVANIZED CHAIN LINK FENCING
02830- I
F. All exposed ends of fence posts shall be fitted with a formed steel, malleable iron, or
aluminum hot-dip galvanized alloy cap. All line posts shall be fitted with a cap suitable for
passage of the continuous top rail. All terminal posts shall be capped with a domed terminal
top.
2.03 RAILS:
A. All chain link fencing shall have a 1-5/8" o.d. (2.27 Ibs. per foot), continuous top rail. Outside
sleeve-type couplings 7" long, spaced at 20' maximum intervals, of the same material as the
rail shall be used to allow for expansion and contraction. Every fifth coupling shall have a
spring to take up rail expansion or contraction.
B. Intermediate and bottom rails will be installed as shown on the plans and attached to the line
and terminal posts with galvanized end, corner, and line rail clamps. _
C. All rails shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe hot-dip zinc coated after fabrication with a minimum
of 1.8 ounces of zinc per square foot of coated surface area.
2.04 WIRE TIES: Wire ties shall be used to attach fence fabric to rails and line posts. Wire tie gauge size
shall not be less than gauge of the fence fabric. Spacing for wire ties along rails shall not be greater
than 24" and shall not exceed 15" when attaching to line posts. Ties shall be aluminum or zinc coated
steel.
2.05 TENSION BARS: All fence fabric shall be tied to terminal posts with tension bars and tension bands.
All tension bars shall be galvanized steel strip ¼" thick and %" wide. Tension bar shall be threaded
through the chain link fabric and attached to the terminal post with I" wide, No. 11 gauge, tension
bands at 15" intervals or less. Tension bands shall be closed with a %" x 1¼" galvanized carriage bolt
and nut.
2.06 TRUSS RODS: Where shown on the plans a three-eighths (3/8") inch diameter galvanized steel truss
rod and tightener will be installed between the terminal post and the adjacent line posts.
2.07 FITTINGS: All fittings to be hot-dip zinc coated malleable cast iron or pressed steel conforming to
ASTM A153. Hot-dip zinc coating shall be 1.2 ounces of zinc per square foot of coated area.
2.08 CONCRETE POST FOOTINGS: All concrete used shall conform to Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place
Concrete.
2.09 FOUL POLES: Foul pole support post shall be Schedule 40, galvanized steel post. Exposed top of "-
support post shall be capped with a formed steel or malleable iron hot-dip galvanized dome cap.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ERECTION: All fencing shall be installed by skilled and experienced fence erectors to the lines and
grades shown on the drawings.
3.02 COORDINATION: Fence erectors shall coordinate work with the concrete subcontractor for the
placement and location of fence post footings and the void forms. Fence post erectors shall
coordinate with the Owner and General Contractor in locating all existing underground utilities prior
to drilling holes for fence post footings.
3.03 FABRIC: All fabric shall be placed on the inside of the ballfield except at the dugouts where fabric on
the back and sides shall be placed on the outside. _
GALVANIZED CHAIN LINK FENCING
02830 - 2
3.04 FABRIC CLEARANCE: All fence fabric shall have a one-half to three-fourths ('/'2"-%") inch clearance
from the bottom of the fence fabric to the finish grade. Fence fabric shall extend above the top of top
rail no more than one (1") inch.
3.05 FOUL POLES: Foul poles will be installed and fabricated as shown and detailed on the plans. All
welds shall be coated with Galvacon after fabrication. Prior to painting, the foul poles shall be etched
with a solution of ¼ pound of copper sulphate to one gallon of water. Poles, fabric, frame and
hardware shall be painted with two coats of yellow, Benjamin Moore exterior latex paint.
3.06 CLEANUP: Upon completion of the fence installation, any splattered concrete shall be removed from
fence posts, all wire ties and fence hardware shall be picked up, and all excess fence fabric and
equipment removed from the construction site.
END OF SECTION
GALVANIZED CHAIN LINK FENCING
4017 02830 - 3
SECTION 02861
POURED-IN-PLACE PLAYGROUND SAFETY SURFACING
PART I - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE: Work in this section includes furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and services required
to install all playground safety surfacing as specified.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. The Contractor shall supply shop drawings, color samples, and product data sheets for
approval by the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall supply a letter from each vendor of playground equipment assuring that
the equipment to be supplied complies with CPSC Guidelines.
1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: Deliver materials with clearly labeled
manufacturer's unopened containers. Store and handle in a manner which will prevent intrusion of
foreign matter and will assure protection from weather.
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall be responsible for protection of unfinished work.
1.05 SCHEDULING: Coordinate materials deliverywith the scheduled time of installation to effect minimum
storage time at the project site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 RUBBER PLAY SURFACE:
A. General: Rubber safety surfacing shall be "Tot Turf" poured-in-place rubber surfacing as
manufactured and installed by Robertson Industries, Inc., (800) 858-0519, or approved equal.
1. To satisfy accessibility standards, playground surfaces must meet the guidelines
established by the Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA). Product shall evaluated
for shock absorbing properties in accordance with the procedures outlined in ASTM
F-1292-91, Standard Specification for Impact Attenuation of Surface Systems Under
and Around Playground Equipment, as well as U.S. Consumer Product Safety
Commission (CPSC) guidelines. In addition, Manufacturer shall supply information
showing that the surface material meets all handicapped accessible requirements
of the Civil Rights Restoration Act of 1687.
2. Product shall carry a two year warranty on installation and materials. All materials
under this section shall be installed by the Manufacturer's employees. Playground
surfacing installation shall not be performed by subcontractors, "Certified Licensed
Applicators" or anyone not employed full time by the Manufacturer. Manufacturer
shall provide payroll records form previous installations to document compliance.
3. Manufacturer shall provide all product specifications and MSDS documentation to
establish compliance with specifications.
4. Provide documentation that shows that Manufacturer's employees have installed
playground surfacing on projects exceeding 15,000 square feet in scope as well as
experience with projects in various climates.
POURED-IN-PLACE PLAYGROUND SAFETY SURFACING
4017 02861 - 1
B. Base Course: Base course shall consist of shredded styrene 'butadiene rubber (SBR) strands
adhered with a polyurethane binder. Stranded rubber shall vary from 0.5mm - 2mm in
thickness and 3mm-20mm in length. Binder shall be 100 percent solids and shall be not less
than 12 percent nor more than 16 percent of the total weight of the rubber, and shall provide
a 100 percent coating of the SBR strands.
C. Wearing Course: Wear surface shall consist of ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM)
particles adhered with a polyurethane binder. The EPDM particles shall meet the following
requirements:
1. ASTM D 412 for tensile strength and elongation.
2. ASTM D 2240 for a shore A hardness of 50-70.
3. Not less than 25 percent rubber hydrocarbons.
4. Peroxide cured.
Rubber granules shall be not less than 1 mm nor greater than 3mm in size. Binder shall be
not less than 15 nor greater than 20 percent of the total weight of rubber and shall provide
a 100 percent coating of the EPDM granules.
D. Binder: Binder for rubber surfacing shall be nontoxic, weather-resistant, ultraviolet stable,
non-hardening, 100 percent solid polyurethane, methyl diphenel isocynate (MDI). No TDI
shall be used. Weight of polyurethane shall be not less than 8.5 Ibs./gal. nor more than 9.5
Ibs ./gal.
E. Color: Top course shall consist of 50% black granules. Other color(s) shall be as selected
by the Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION: Clean the concrete base as required.
3.02 RUBBER SURFACING:
A. Prior to placing the rubber surfacing the Contractor shall verify that the concrete base is
properly installed with the required cross-slope for drainage.
B. Concrete base must cure for a minimum of thirty (30) days before the surfacing is placed.
C. Components of the poured-in-place rubber surfacing shall be thoroughly mixed in a rotating
tumbler as per the manufacturer's recommendation.
D. Rubber surfacing base course shall be installed in one continuous pour.
E. The wear surface (top course) shall be bonded to the base course with adhesive applied in
small quantities to the base course. The wear surface shall be quickly troweled on before the
adhesive dries, Wear surface shall be hand-troweled for a smooth even continuous surface.
Seams between different colors shall be even and neat. Adjacent colors of surfacing shall
be placed as soon as possible before the initial pour has cured. The initial pour edge shall
be coated with the adhesive and the adjacent surfacing applied immediately.
F. The thickness of the base course and wearing surface shall correspond with the detail shown
on the plan.
POURED-IN-PLACE PLAYGROUND SAFETY SURFACING
4017 02861 - 2
G. No adhesive shall be allowed on adjacent paved surfaces. Any spills of surfacing material
shall be cleaned up immediately.
H. The rubber surfacing shall be allowed to cure a minimum of forty-eight (48) hours before any
traffic is allowed on it.
I. The rubber surfacing manufacturer shall provide a representative experienced in the safety
surfacing installation to supervise the installation.
3.03 CLEANUP: Upon completion of work in this section, remove all tools, equipment, unused material,
and debris from the site; broom clean immediate area. Training will be provided to on site
maintenance personnel in the event they might need to make occasional repairs. Extra material will
be provided for this purpose.
END OF SECTION
POURED-IN-PLACE PLAYGROUND SAFETY SURFACING
02861 - 3
SECTION 02870
-- MISCELLANEOUS PARK EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE: The work to be performed under this section of the specification consists of furnishing and
installing various miscellaneous park equipment.
_ 1.02 SUBMITTALS: Submit shop drawings for each product. Indicate details of fabrication, anchorage, and
related construction. Indicate accessories and finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DUGOUT BENCHES: Dugout benches are twenty (20') feet length and shall have one piece fiat 2xl 0
and 2x12 clear anodized aluminum planks for seats and backrest. The frames shall be 2%" o.d.
_ Schedule 40 round steel tube, hot dip galvanized after fabrication with an extension for a seat support
on top of the backrest, and with extension on the frame for permanent embedment in concrete. The
frames shall be spaced at 4'-0" o,c., maximum. The seats and backrests shall be one piece planks
with no splices. Benches shall be manufactured by Ed Cummings and Associates, Stephenville,
--- Texas, (817) 968-8617, or approved equal.
2.02 SCORING TABLE AND BENCH:
A. Plastisol Coated Planks: All five (5') foot planks for scoring table shall be 2x6 plastisol coated.
Planks shall be attached to the support frame with galvanized countersunk %" diameter
carriage bolts.
B. Support Frame: All members of the support frame shall be 2 %" o.d. Schedule 40 powder
coated pipe in the sizes shown on the plans.
~ C. Bench: Custom make a five (5') foot length straight leg park bench, Model P1835 frames and
2x4 plastisol coated planks, as manufactured by Game Time. Contact Modlin Recreation
Equipment, Inc., P.O. Box 50048, Denton, Texas, 76206-0048, (800) 433-5347.
2.03 DRINKING FOUNTAIN: Provide one (1) Most Dependable Fountain, Model No. 493, as manufactured
by MDF, Memphis, TN, (800) 552-6331. Fountain to be painted dark blue by the manufacturer. Refer
to Section 09900 - Painting. Color to be approved by Owner.
2.04 PLAYGROUND: Provide "Little Tikes" play equipment as shown on the plans (or approved equal).
Play equipment is manufactured in Farmington, Missouri, by Iron Mountain Forge. Representative is
_ Jim Lea & Associates, (800) 237-4739, Install per manufacturer's specifications and
recommendations.
2.05 PICNIC TABLES: Provide five (5) portable picnic tables with concrete pads by Wabash Valley #S511
-- and provide one (1) accessible picnic table, Wabash Valley #S535 (or approved equal). The table
base and top shall be coated with l/.,, plastisol coating. Color to be selected by Owner. Contact The
Playwell Group at (972) 488-9355.
2.06 LITTER RECEPTACLES: Provide six (6) litter receptacles Model LRD55, 55-gal. Receptacle with
10056 in-ground post package and covered with Model DTL32, 32-gal. dome top; manufactured by
Wabash Valley or approved equal. Color to be selected by Owner. Contact The Playwell Group at
A (972) 488-9355.
MISCELLANEOUS PARK EQUIPMENT
02870-1
2.07 PICNIC TABLE GRILL: Provide six (6) Model 200-X rotating grill as manufactured by Iron Mountain
Forge, or approved equal. Contact Jim Lea & Associates at (800) 237-4739.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION: All items shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor as shown on the plans
and as recommended by the manufacturer. --
END OF SECTION
MISCELLANEOUS PARK EQUIPMENT
02870 - 2
SECTION 02900
TREE, SHRUB AND GROUNDCOVER PLANTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE:Thisw~rkinc~udesa~~fina~finegradingandmin~rleve~ing~fpIantingareas~s~i~preparati~n~
and planting. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services required as herein specified and
indicated on the drawings. Refer to planting details on plans.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Section 02200 - Earthwork.
B. Section 02970 - Irrigation System.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 TOPSOIL: Existing topsoil at the site will be used. If sufficient quantities of on-site topsoil are not
available, off-site sources may be used. upon approval by the Landscape Architect.
2.02 SOIL AMENDMENTS:
A. Compost: Shall be decomposed, organic material composed of twenty (20%) percent animal
manure and eighty (80%) percent vegetative material, or other approved formulation. This
material shall have been composted at least nine (9) months and shall be free of fungus,
grass, weed seed, debris, nut sedge tubers, and any toxic substances, as produced by Soil
Building Systems, Inc., Dallas, Texas; Quality Mulch Products, Hillsboro, Texas; Living Earth
Technologies, Inc., Dallas, Texas; or approved equal.
B. Rock Powder: Shall be lava sand.
C. Fertilizer: Shall be a one hundred (100%) percent organic based product containing the
following minimum percentages of available nutrients (N-P-K) 6-3-3 such as Sustain,
Garden-ville Soil Food, or Green Sense.
D. Root Stimulator: Shall be liquid seaweed (kelp).
1. Sample and Specification Submittal: Submit a producer's specification and a one (1
quart sample of the soil amendments proposed to be used for the Owner's approval.
2.03 MULCH:
A. Standard Mulch: Shall be shredded hardwood bark mulch for all planting areas.
B. Submittal: Submit a one (1) quart sample of proposed mulch for approval by Owner.
2.04 WATER: Water shall be available at the site via irrigation system. Water required in connection with
planting will be furnished and paid for by the Owner provided it is not used in a wasteful manner. Any
hose or other watering equipment shall be provided by the Landscape Contractor to water planting
areas until the job is accepted by the Owner.
TREE, SHRUB AND GROUNDCOVER PLANTING
4017 02900-1
2.05 PLANT MATERIALS:
A. Plant Name and Location: The names and locations of all plants are noted on the drawings. _
The nomenclature of all plant materials is per Hortus Third by L. H. Bailey. Plant materials
not conforming with this reference will be rejected by the Architect/Engineer.
B. Quality and Size: All plant materials shall be first class representatives of their normal species --
or variety unless otherwise specified. They shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the
species and shall be healthy, shapely, well-rooted, and vigorous. All plant materials shall be
free from insect pests, plant diseases, and injuries. The containers and balls of all plants _
delivered to the site shall be free from any weeds or grasses which could be considered
noxious or objectionable; i.e., nutgrass or Johnsongrass. ALL PLANT MATERIALS SHALL
BE EQUAL TO OR EXCEED THE MEASUREMENTS SPECIFIED ON THE PLANTING
PLAN WHICH ARE THE MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE SIZES. They shall be measured after --
pruning with the branches in normal position. The requirements for measurement, branching,
grading, quality, bailing and burlapping of plants specified generally follow the code of the
standards currently recommended by the American Association of Nurserymen, Inc., in the
American Standards for Nursery Stock.
C. Packaging:
1. Container Grown Plants: Plants designated as "Cont." on the plans shall be full or
heavy grade and shall have been growing in the specified size container for one full
season prior to delivery to the site.
2. Bailed and Burlapped Plants (B&B): Plants designated "B&B" on the plans shall be
bailed and burlapped. They shall be dug with firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient
diameter and depth to encompass the fibrous and feeding root system necessary for ~
full recovery of the plant. Balls shall be firmlywrapped with burlap or similar materials
and bound with twine, cord, or wire mesh. Where necessary, to prevent breading or
cracking of the ball during the process of planting, the ball may be secured to a
platform. --
3. Trees grown in root control bags will not be accepted as container grown. They will
be accepted as "bailed and burlapped" if they meet the American Standards for _
Nursery Stock standards for bailed and burlapped trees.
4. Alternate to B&B: Plants grown in containers may be accepted as B&B provided that
the plant has been growing in the container for one full growing season prior to "'-
delivery. Alternate must be approved by Owner,
D. Substitutions: Substitutions will be permitted only upon submission of proof that any plant is
not obtainable and authorization by the Owner or his representative by a Change Order
providing for the use of the nearest equivalent obtainable size or variety of plant having the
same essential characteristics with an equitable adjustment of contract price.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 LAYOUT: Location and spacing for plants and outline of areas to be planted shall be as denoted by
stem location or by notations on the plan. All tree and shrub planting locations shall be staked by the
Landscape Contractor and shall be approved by the Owner prior to digging the planting pits.
TREE, SHRUB AND GROUNDCOVER PLANTING
02900 - 2
3.02 SOIL PREPARATION:
A. Planting Beds:
1. Existing topsoil shall be used.
2. Excavation: Bed areas to receive planting shall be scarified to a depth of six (6")
inches. All debris, stone, rubbish, and weeds shall be removed from the site.
3. Soil Mix for Planting Beds: Apply three (3") inches of compost, lava sand at the rate
of sixty (60 Ibs.) pounds per one thousand (1,000 SF) square feet, and the specified
fertilizer at the rate of twenty (20 Ibs.) pounds per one thousand (1,000 SF) square
feet, then rotorill to mix thoroughly with soil to a depth of seven (7") inches.
C. Tree Planting Pits:
1. All tree pits shall be a minimum of three times larger in diameter than the tree ball
or root spread as shown on the planting details.
2. Tree pits shall be backfilled with the soil excavated from the tree pits.
3.03 DELIVERY OF PLANT MATERIALS: Plants shall be packed and protected during delivery and after
arrival at the site, against climatic, seasonal, wind damage, or other injuries, and at no time shall be
allowed to dry out.
3.04 PROTECTION OF PLANT MATERIALS: All plants shall be handled so that roots are adequately
protected at all times from drying out and from other injury. The balls of bailed plants which cannot
be planted immediately on delivery shall be "heeled in" for protection with soil mulch, straw, or other
acceptable material.
3.05 SETTING THE PLANTS: All plants shall be planted in pits, centered, and set to touch such depth that
the finished grade level at the plant after settlement will be the same as that at which the plant was
grown. Each plant shall be planted upright and faced to give the best appearance or relationship to
adjacent plants or structures. No burlap shall be pulled out from under balls or balls broken when
taken from containers. All broken or frayed roots shall be cut off cleanly. When the hole is nearly filled
with the specified soil, add water and the specified root stimulator, and allow it to soak away. Fill the
hole to finished grade and form a shallow saucer around each tree by placing a ridge of topsoil around
the edge of each pit after planting.
3.06 MULCHING: All trees, except as noted in the planting details, shall be mulched after planting with a
one (1 ") inch deep layer of compost and a three (3") inch deep layer of mulch entirely covering the
excavated area around each plant. All shrubs and groundcover shall be mulched with a one (1 ") inch
layer of compost and a two (2") inch deep layer of mulch.
3.07 GRADING: The surface of all planting areas shall slope as shown on the plans. Unless otherwise
shown, slope one-quarter (1/4")inch per foot (two (2%) percent gradient) away from foundations and
walk.
3.08 CLEANUP: All excess soil, soil preparation materials, fertilizer, or plant containers shall be removed
form the site upon completion of the work.
3.09 PRUNING AND SPRAYING: Each tree will be pruned only as necessary to preserve the natural
shape and character of the plant. All pruning will be done after delivery to the site, under supervision
of the Architect/Engineer. All soft wood or sucker growth and all broken or badly bruised branches
and roots shall be removed.
TREE, SHRUB AND GROUNDCOVER PLANTING
4047 02900 - 3
3.10 MAINTENANCE: The Landscape Contractor is responsible for Watering, cultivating, and other
necessary maintenance until the completion and acceptance of all the work.
3.11 WEED INFESTATION: Any shrub or groundcover bed that becomes infested with noxious weeds or
nut sedge shall be excavated to a minimum depth of 18", the soil removed, and completely replaced
with new materials at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.12 INSPECTION FOR ACCEPTANCE:
A. Inspections: Inspection of work and planting to determine completion of the work, exclusive
of possible warranty plant replacement, will be made by the Owner at the time of the final
inspection for the entire project.
3.13 GUARANTEE:
A. Terms: All shrubs, perennials, and ornamental grasses shall be guaranteed for six (6)
months and all trees for one (1) year. Guarantee begins upon final acceptance of work by the
Owner.
B. Plant Replacement: At the end of the guarantee period, inspection will be made by the Owner
and the Contractor. Any plant material required under this contract that is dead or not in
satisfactory growth condition shall be removed and replaced with the same size and kind of
plant specified, at no cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
TREE, SHRUB AND GROUNDCOVER PLANTING
4017 02900 - 4
SECTION 02970
-- IRRIGATION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The General Conditions of the contract and all Supplemental and Special
Conditions are a part of these Specifications and should be consulted in detail for instructions
pertaining to the work.
1.02 SCOPE: Furnish all work, material, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation and
services necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with the installation
of the underground sprinkler irrigation system complete as shown on the drawings and/or specified
-- herein. When the term "Contractor" is used in this section, it shall refer to the Irrigation Contractor.
1.03 APPLICABLE STANDARDS:
A. ASTM - D2241 - Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR)
B. ASTM - D2464 - Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Threaded, Schedule 40
C. ASTM - D2466 - Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Socket Type, Schedule 40
D. ASTM - D2564 - Solvent Cements for Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings
E. ASTM - D2855 - Making Solvent Cemented Joints with Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and
Fittings
1.04 GUARANTEE AND MAINTENANCE:
A. The Contractor shall guarantee material and workmanship and shall provide maintenance for
' one year after final acceptance including repair and replacement of defective materials,
workmanship and repair of backfill settlement.
_ B. Guarantee and maintenance shall include but not necessarily be limited to the following:
1. Adjustment of sprinkler height and plumb to compensate for settlement and/or plant
growth.
2. Backfilling of all trenches.
_ 3. Adjustment of coverage (arc, trajectory and distance of spray) as necessary.
4. Unstopping heads plugged by foreign material.
--- 5. Adjustment of controller as necessary to insure proper sequence and watering time.
6. All maintenance necessary to keep the system in good operating order.
C. Guarantee and maintenance after final acceptance does not include alterations as necessitated
by re-landscaping, re-grading, addition of trees or the addition and/or changes in sidewalks,
walls, driveways, etc.
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02970 - 1
1.05 SUBMITTALS:
A. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect/Engineer six (6) copies of shop drawings or
manufacturer's "cut sheet" for each type of sprinkler head, pipe, controller, valves, valve box,
wire, wire connector, fittings and all other types of fixtures and equipment which he proposes
to install on the job. Each cut sheet shall have the manufacturer's name, model number
(specifically highlight the model number intended for use on the project), equipment capacity
and manufacturer's installation recommendation, if applicable, for each proposed item.
B. Each copy of the submittal shall be logically organized into a binder (Contractor's choice) with
a cover sheet that shall include the following information:
1. Project name and location.
2. Date of submittal.
3. Company name of Irrigation Contractor.
4. Company address of Irrigation Contractor.
5. Company phone and fax no. of Irrigation Contractor.
6. Name of person to contact about project.
7. Stamp of Licensed Irrigator responsible for installation of the irrigation system.
C. No incomplete or partial submittal will be accepted. After the submittal has been approved,
substitutions will not be allowed except by written consent of the Architect/Engineer.
D. Shop drawings shall include dimensions, elevations, construction details, arrangements and
capacity of equipment as well as manufacturer's installation recommendations.
1.06 APPROVED EQUAL SUBSTITUTIONS:
A. Several items in this section and on the plans are specified by a manufacturer's brand name
and model number followed by the phrase "or approved equal." This is not intended to unduly
restrict competitive procurements or bidding but it is done to assure a minimum standard of
quality which is believed to be best for the item specified. If a bidder wishes for a substitute item
to receive consideration as an "approved equal," the bidder and each item must meet all of the
following requirements without exceptions:
1. An item, to be considered a substitute, must meet the same specifications of materials,
fabrication or construction, dimension or size, shape, finish, performance standards,
warranty or guarantee, and any other pertinent and salient features of quality as indicated
in manufacturer's specifications for original specified item.
2. A sample of the item, along with a written request for consideration, shop drawings and
written specifications, must have been received by the Architect/Engineer a minimum of
ten (10) days before the bid opening date. The item shall then be examined and the bidder
shall be notified in writing seven (7) days later whether or not the item is an "approved
equal." The Architect/Engineer shall be the final judge of whether or not an item submitted
for consideration qualifies as being an acceptable substitute.
B. Under no circumstances shall an item be given consideration as an "approved equal" substitute
later than ten (10) days before the bid opening. After that date, all items shall be bid per the
original specifications. Likewise, unless certified as an "approved equal" per the time frame and
the requirements above, the successful bidder, known as Contractor after signing the contract,
shall install all items per the original plans and specifications.
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02970 - 2
C. The Contractor alone shall bear complete responsibility for the' installation and operation of any
material or equipment installed on the job, as a substitute for any specified equipment or
material, should such substituted material prove defective, inoperable or inapplicable.
1.07 CODES/PERMITS:
-- A. All work under this contract shall comply with the provisions of these specifications, as
illustrated on the accompanying drawings or as directed by the Architect/Engineer, and shall
satisfy all applicable local codes, ordinances or regulations of the governing bodies and all
authorities having jurisdiction over this project.
B. Installation of equipment and material shall be done in accordance with the requirements of the
National Electric Code, city plumbing codes and standard plumbing procedures. The drawings
-- and these specifications are intended to comply with all the necessary rules and regulations;
however, some discrepancies may occur. Where such discrepancies occur, the Contractor
shall immediately notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of the discrepancies and apply for an
interpretation. Should the discovery and notification occur after the execution of a contract, any
additional work required for compliance with the regulations shall be paid for as covered by
these contract documents.
-- 1.08 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES:
A. The Contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain all permits and pay all costs in
connection with his work; file with all governmental departments having jurisdiction; obtain all
' required certificates of inspection for his work and deliver to the Architect/Engineer before
request of acceptance and final payment for the work.
_ B. The Contractor shall include in the work any labor, materials, services, apparatus or drawings
in order to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations whether or not
shown on the drawings and/or specified.
-- C. The installation of the irrigation system shall follow all requirements of and shall be made by an
individual or firm duly licensed under Chapter 34, Texas Water Code, "Licensed Irrigators and
Installers," as amended by H.B. No. 2510, 74th Texas Legislature and effective June 28, 1996.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for all work performed under this contract. No
subcontractor shall relieve the Contractor of liability to complete the work shown on the drawing
and indicated in the specifications.
E. The Contractor shall at all times protect his work from damage and theft and replace all
damaged or stolen parts at his expense until the work is accepted in writing by the Owner.
F. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's property from injury or loss. All damage to existing
property, such as buildings, utilities, irrigation systems, etc., or plantings such as trees or lawns,
caused by the Contractor during his operation or as a result of a malfunction of installed work
-- during the guarantee period shall be repaired to its original condition at Contractor's expense.
G. The Contractor shall carefully note all finish grades before commencing work. Any finish grade
changed during the course of work shall be restored to the original contours.
H. The Owner shall not be responsible for damage, caused by labor or materials furnished by the
Contractor under this contract, which might have been prevented by the Contractor's prudence.
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02970 - 3
1.09 SUPERINTENDENT:
A. An English-speaking A superintendent satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer shall be present
on the site at all times during progress of the work.
B. The superintendent shall not be changed except with the consent of the Architect/Engineer.
C. The superintendent shall be authorized to represent the Contractor.
1.10 NOTIFICATION OF ARCHITECT/ENGINEER: The Architect/Engineer shall have free access to the
work whenever it is in preparation or progress and the Contractor shall provide safe, convenient and
proper facilities, for such access and inspection. The Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer
when he will and will not be on the job. Should the Contractor work periodically on the job, the
Architect/Engineer shall have the right to require the Contractor to give a 24-hour notice of each and
every day or partial day that he intends to work on the project. The Contractor shall perform no work,
unless the Architect/Engineer has been properly notified. Failure to notify the Architect/Engineer may
require the Contractor to redo, uncover pipe, expose for inspection, etc., all that the
Architect/Engineer was unable to inspect.
1.11 EXISTING UTILITIES - LOCATION AND ELEVATIONS:
A. Locations and elevations of various utilities included with the scope of this work have been
obtained from the most reliable sources available and should serve as a general guide without
guarantee to accuracy. The Contractor shall examine the site and verify to his own satisfaction
the locations and elevation of all utilities and availability of utilities and services required. The
Contractor shall inform himself as to their relation to the work and the submission of bids shall
be deemed as evidence thereof. The Contractor shall repair at his own expense, and to the
satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer, for damage to any utility shown or not shown on the
plans.
B.Should utilities not shown on the plans be found during excavations, Contractor shall promptly
notify the Architect/Engineer for instructions as to further action.
C. Contractor shall make necessary adjustments in the layout as may be required to connect to
existing water and electrical stubouts and sleeves, should such stubouts and sleeves not be
located exactly as shown, at no increase in cost to the Owner. All such work will be recorded
on record drawings and turned over to the Architect/Engineer prior to final acceptance.
1.12 COOPERATION OF TRADES: Work under this contract may be accomplished with other
contractors and trades on the project site at the same time. The Contractor shall allow each
contractor and trade adequate time at the proper stage of construction to fulfill his contract.
1.13 RECORD DRAWINGS:
A. Record dimensioned locations and depths for each of the following.
1. Point of connection to the city water supply.
2. Sprinkler pressure line routing. Provide dimensions for each 100 lineal feet (maximum)
along each routing, and for each change in directions.
3. Quick coupling valves.
4. Electric remote control valves,
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02970 - 4
5. Control wire routing.
6. Other related items as may be directed by the Architect/Engineer.
B. Locate all dimensions from two permanent points such as buildings, monuments, sidewalks,
curbs or pavements.
C. Record all changes which are made from the Contract Drawings, including changes in the
pressure and non-pressure lines.
D. Record all required information on a set of black line prints of the Drawings. Do not use these
prints for any other purpose.
E. Maintain information daily. Keep drawings at the site at all times and available for review by the
Architect/Engineer.
F. When record drawings have been approved by the Architect/Engineer, transfer all information
to a set of reproducible mylars using permanent india ink. Changes using ball-point pen are not
acceptable, Make dimensions accurately at the same scale used on the original drawings, or
larger. If photo reduction is required to facilitate controller chart, notes or dimensions must be
a minimum 1/. inch in size.
G. Reproducible mylars shall be furnished by the Architect/Engineer at cost for printing and
handling.
.14 CONTROLLER CHARTS:
A. Do not prepare charts until record drawings have been approved by the Architect/Engineer.
B. Provide one controller chart for each automatic controller installed.
1. Chart may be a reproduction of the Record Drawing, if the scale permits fitting the
controller door. If photo reduction prints are required, keep reduction to maximum size
possible to retain full legibility.
2. Chart shall be black line print of the actual system, showing the area covered by that
controller.
C. Identify the area of coverage of each remote control valve, using a distinctly different pastel
color, drawn over the entire area of coverage.
D. Following approval of charts by the Architect/Engineer, they shall be hermetically sealed
between two layers of 20 mil thick plastic sheet.
E. Charts must be completed and approved prior to final acceptance of the irrigation system.
.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:
A. Provide two individually bound manuals detailing operation and maintenance requirements for
irrigation systems.
B. Manuals shall be delivered to the Architect/Engineer no later than 10 days prior to completion
of work.
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02970 - 5
C. Provide descriptions of all installed materials and system~ in sufficient detail to permit
maintenance personnel to understand, operate and maintain the equipment.
D. Provide the following in each manual:
1. Index sheet, stating Irrigation Contractor's name, address, telephone number and name
of person to contact.
2. Duration of guarantee period.
3. Equipment list providing the following for each item:
a. Manufacture's name
b. Make and model number
c. Name and address of local manufacturer's representative
d. Spare parts list in detail
e. Detailed operation and maintenance instructions of major equipment
1.16 CHECKLIST:
A. Provide a signed and dated checklist and deliver to the Architect/Engineer prior to final
acceptance of the work.
B. Use the following format:
1. Plumbing permits: if none required, so note.
2. Material approvals: approved by and date.
3. Pressure line tests: by whom and date.
4. Record drawings: received by and date.
5. Controller charts: received by and date.
6. Operation and maintenance manuals: received by and date.
7. Manufacturer's warranties if required: received by and date.
8. Written guarantee: received by and date.
1.17 ELECTRIC POWER: Electric power to operate the controller shall be furnished by the General
Contractor at the location shown on the drawings. Service wiring to the controller cabinet from the
power source shall be furnished by the Contractor.
1.18 WATER FOR TESTING: The General Contractor shall furnish all water necessary for testing,
flushing, jetting and general operation until final acceptance.
1,19 SLEEVES AND ELECTRICAL CONDUITS: Sleeves and electrical conduits for irrigation needs shall
be installed by the General Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for locating all sleeves and
conduits at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.20 PROGRESS MEETINGS: Contractor shall attend all progress meetings as requested by the
Architect/Engineer during installation (max. of one per week).
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02970 - 6
1.21 STORAGE: The Contractor shall be allocated space on the site for storage of material but he shall
coordinate such storage with the General Contractor. He shall keep such storage areas clean and
_ neat at all times. The Owner assumes no responsibility for protection of this storage area or
materials within it.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL: Unless otherwise noted on the plans, all materials shall be new and unused. The
irrigation equipment model numbers used for reference in these specifications are to establish
_ minimum quality standards and may be substituted with an "approved equal" as outlined in Part I -
Item 1.06.
2.02 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE (PVC PIPE):
A. PVC pipe manufactured in accordance with ASTM Standards noted herein.
1. Marking and Identification: PVC pipe shall be continuously and permanently marked with
following information: Manufacturer's name, size, type of pipe and material, SDR number,
Product Standard number and the NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) Seal.
-- 2. PVC Pipe Fittings: Shall be of the same material as the PVC pipe specified and compatible
with PVC pipe furnished. PVC pipe fittings for sizes '/2"-2~" shall be Schedule 40 solvent
weld type. PVC pipe fittings 3" in size shall be e rubber gasket type.
' 3. PVC Pipe: Shall be Class 200 solvent weld, SDR-21, PS 22~70 for all sizes 3/4" - 2Y2". All
¼" pipe shall be solvent weld SDR-13.5, Class 315. All 3" pipe shall be Class 200 and shall
conform to SDR-21, ASTM D-2241, D-1784 Cell Class 12454-B, D-3139 Gasket Bell with
_ locked-in RSS gasket joint.
4. Flexible PVC Risers: All flexible PVC risers shall be made from virgin PVC material, shall
comply with ASTM D2287, shall be tested at 200 P.S.I. static pressure for 2 hours and
-- have a quick burst rating of a minimum 400 P.S.I. Flexible PVC risers shall be Agricultural
Products 1174 Standard or approved equal.
2.03 SWING JOINTS: Swing joints shall be Lasco factory assembled O-ring seal type. Swing joints for
quick coupling valves shall be Model G17B-218 with brass insert stabilizer elbow and W' retaining
lugs. Swing joints for gear driven rotary heads shall be Model G172-314 or approved equal.
-- 2.04 WIRE AND SPLICES: All wire shall be single strand solid copper, minimum 14 gauge with Type UF
insulation which is Underwriters Laboratory approved for direct underground burial when used in a
National Electrical Code Class II Circuit (30 volts AC or less) as per Articles 725 and 300. Voltage
drop shall be taken into consideration. All wire shall be color coded so that the common wire shall
have white insulation and the signal wires shall have red insulation. All wire connectors shall have
a pre-filled insulator tube with a Scotchlok Y connector which, when pressed together, forms a
permanent, one-piece, moisture-proof wire splice. All connectors shall be U .L. listed and rated 600
-- volts maximum as a wire connector system for use with underground conductors. All direct burywire
splice kits shall be DBY-6 as manufactured by the Electrical Products Division of the 3M
Corporation.
' 2.05 QUICK COUPLING VALVES: Quick coupling valves shall be heavy-duty brass construction with a
locking purple thermoplastic rubber cover and shall be marked with special "Do Not Drink!" warnings
in English and Spanish for use on non-potable systems. Quick coupling valves shall be Rainbird
- Model 44 NP or approved equal. Provide six (6) 44k keys and six (6) SH-2 swivel hose ells.
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
4017 02970 - 7
2.06 BALL VALVES: Ball valves 2" and smaller in size shall be made of PVC, have a non-shock rating
of 200 psi, have ball seals made of Teflon, have Viton O-rings and socket end connectors. Ball
valves shall be Spears "Safe-T-SheaF' Compact or approved equal.
2.07 VALVE BOXES: A box shall be provided for all hydrometers, water meters, backflow preventers,
electric valves, quick coupling valves and wire splices. Valve boxes shall be made of high-strength
plastic, shall have covers with bolt down or locking mechanisms and shall be colored green. Boxes
shall be suitable in size and configuration for the operability and adjustment of the valve. Extension
sections will be used as appropriate to the depth of piping.
1. Electric Valves: Boxes for remote control valves two (2)" inches and smaller shall be "Pro
Series" Model 218 BC or approved equal as manufactured by NDS, Inc.
2. Quick Coupling Valves: Boxes for quick coupling valves shall be "Pro Series" Model 214
BC or approved equal as manufactured by NDS, Inc.
3. Backflow Preventers: Boxes for backflow preventers two (2") inches or smaller shall be
"Pro Series" Model 226 BC or approved equal as manufactured by NDS, Inc.
4. Wire Splices: Boxes for wire splices shall be "Pro Series" Model 212 BC or approved equal
as manufactured by NDS, Inc.
5.Water Meters: Boxes for water meters two (2") inches or smaller shall be "Pro Series"
Model 218 BM or approved equal as manufactured by NDS, Inc.
6. Hydrometers: Boxes for hydrometers two (2") inches or smaller shall be "Pro Series"
Model 214 BC or approved equal as manufactured by NDS, Inc.
2.08 ROTARY HEADS: Rotary pop-up sprinklers shall be in-line combination type with positive drive by
means of a water-driven gear motor. Nozzles shall be readily accessible without removing the upper
head assembly. Sprinkler head shall rotate uniformly at a speed not to exceed one-fifth (1/5)
revolution per minute. Gear driven rotary pop-up heads shall meet the requirements stated on the
plans and shall be Hunter 1-25 series or approved equal.
2.09 4" POP-UP SPRAY HEADS: Spray heads shall have a minimum 4" pop-up. The sprinkler body and
all related parts shall be plastic, cycolac or polycarbonate. They shall have a spring retraction for
positive return action of the pop-up nozzle. The spring for retraction and the nozzle shall be made
of corrosion resistant materials. 4" pop-up spray heads shall be Rainbird 1804-SAM-PRS series or
approved equal.
2.10 ELECTRIC CONTROLLER:
A. The satellite/stand-alone controller shall be Inter Spec No. IS-12A-U4N-00-SS; a 32 station MIR
5000 Irrinet controller, with Secondary Surge protection, and remote capabilities, installed in a
stainless steel cabinet with the following option: Motorola V308 Portable Keyboard/Display.
B. The satellite/stand-alone controller shall be capable of two-way communication with the MIR
5000C central computer (CICS). It shall receive, store, and send all commands generated by
the central. It shall self-initiate communication to the central (polling or interrogation not
required) for reporting alarms, failures, changes made at the satellite, and changes in the status
of certain sensors. It shall upload on re1 quest form the central satellite status, program content
and accumulation tables.
C. The satellite/stand-alone controller shall be a 4-inputs (sensors), 16-station (outputs) control
unit. Expandable to 12 inputs and 48 outputs through the addition of the AC mixed I/O module.
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
4047 02970 - 8
Each station shall be capable of timing in increments of Minu'~es-Seconds or Hours-Minutes,
as well as in the case where the volumetric control feature is used metering water in volumetric
_ increments of 1,10, 100, 1000 or 10,000 gallons. Each station may have 1 - 98 cycles, with the
feature of infinite cycles if 99 is entered.
D. The satellite/stand-alone controller shall also support irrigation by time and include the checking
-- of the flow rates per program and shall support the ability to combine multiple flow meter inputs
and derive a "virtual" main line meter (the sum of all physical meters' flow rates).
E. The satellite/stand-alone controller shall be capable of delivering .50 amperes (holding) at 24
VAC per station and shall be capable of operating as many as ninety-nine (99) main lines each
with capacity for six (6) stations programmed simultaneously.
-- F. The satellite/stand-alone controller shall be capable of operating any stations that are not
assigned to main lines as auxiliary devices, These outputs may be combined with irrigation
valve stations on the same program (for booster pump selection) as well as completely
independently on their own program lines. Programs with only auxiliary outputs shall not be
' affected by a percentage increase/decrease to the water budgeting factor.
G. The satellite shall have ninety-nine (99) possible programs. Each program shall have:
1. Up to 98 cycles, or infinite where 99 is entered.
2. Up to 6 stations assigned.
3. No nominal flow rate expected (volumetric operation).
-- 4. Option of fertilizer injection control., with pre-watering and proportional control.
5. A start condition.
6. A wait condition.
7. A stop condition.
8. A stop time.
9. Choice of day interval (1-99) or individual days.
-- H. The satellite/stand-alone controller shall provide global percentage increase or decrease per
main line, from one (1) to nine hundred ninety-nine (999) percent, in one (1) percent
increments.
' I. The satellite/stand-alone controller shall provide water management reporting by either the
central or in a stand-alone configuration. Reports shall include:
_ 1. Status of each program (High Flow, Low Flow, Unopened, Waiting, In Program, Stopped).
2. Water remaining in each program.
3. Actual flow rate.
4. Cycles remaining and next start time.
' 5. Actual Water Factor for each program.
J. The satellite/stand-alone controller shall provide software support for 250 outputs, 99 main
lines, 99 programs and shall provide random assignment of the physical outputs and inputs to
the logical "station" and "input" names used in the software programming process.
K. The satellite/stand-alone controller shall provide both the radio communications data-link and
-- software to support remote inputs and outputs installed on Scorpio remote terminal units.
L. The satellite/stand-alone controller shall provide random access capabilityto assign any station
__ to any program as well as combining stations (up to six) on a program. Automatic protection
shall prevent mixing stations from different main lines on a single program line. All stations shall
be able to be turned on/off manually from the keyboard/display terminal unit (option V308).
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02970 - 9
M. The satellite/stand-alone controller shall be able to communicate via Motorola UHF radio with
the MIR 5000C central computer. Additionally, up to five (5) satellites may be linked together
via 2-wire communication cable and one of the units shall provide the radio link to the central.
N. The satellite/stand-alone controller shall provide a read-out of current sensor inputs' status.
O. The satellite/stand-alone controller shall provide internal H.V. surge protection for each of the
24 VAC field wire outputs. Satellite inputs shall also incorporate surge protection.
P. The satellite/stand-alone controller shall include an optional keyboard-display terminal unit that
includes a 2-line, dot matrix liquid crystal display and function-keys for menu driven operation.
It shall have alphanumeric displays of descriptive English menus, with built-in HELP as a
dedicated key on the unit that calls up context-sensitive help screens. The hardware shall be
dedicated in function as the terminal, and shall have no on-board RAM (Random Access
Memory).
Q. The satellite/stand-alone controller shall provide status read-outs from Light Emitting Diodes
(LED's) located on the face of each module.
R. The Central Processing Unit (CPU) module shall provide the following status LED's:
1. POWER FAIL
2. REMOTE FAIL
3. RESET FAIL
4. IRRIGATING
5. STOP
6. BATTERY LOW
7. TERMINAL
8. FLOW ALARM
9. LEAK ALARM
10. UNOPENED ALARM
11. FLOW ALARM
12. CENTRAL COMMUNICATION TX, RX, CM
13. REMOTE COMMUNICATION TX, RX, CM
S. Each I/O module shall provide the following status LED's:
1. MODULE DIAGNOSTIC FAIL
2. CLOCK FAILURE
3. OUTPUTS (1-16)
4. INPUTS ('1-4)
T. The satellite/stand-alone controller shall be F.C.C. type accepted and listed.
U. The satellite/stand-alone controller shall have 117VAC 50/60 Hz input, and 24 VAC 50/60 Hz
output to up to 48 stations for operating 24 VAC soleholds.
2.11 ELECTRIC REMOTE CONTROL VALVES: Electric remote control valves shall have plastic glass-
filled bodies and covers and shall be globe-type diaphragm valves of normally closed design.
Operation shall be accomplished by means of an integrally mounted heavy-duty 24-V AC solenoid
complying with National Electrical Code, Class II Circuit. Solenoid coil shall be potted in epoxy resin
within a plastic coated stainless steel housing. Solenoids shall be completely waterproof, suitable
for direct underground burial. A flow stem adjustment, shall be included in each valve. Electric
remote control valves shall be Hardie 200 B series or approved equal.
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02970-10
2.12 BACKFLOW PREVENTER: A double gate valve, double check assembly (DCVA) shall be located
and sized as shown on the drawings. Construction shall be all brass for sizes %"-2". The double gate
valve, double check valve assembly shall be Febco Model 805Y or approved equal.
2.13 WATER METER: The water meter shall be turbine type with a maximum operating pressure of 150
psi within a temperature range of 32° to 130°. The top and bottom case shall be made of bronze,
the rotor shall be thermoplastic, the thrust bearings shall be constructed of tungsten carbide,
magnets shall be e ceramic, shafts and bolts shall be stainless steel and the inlet hub shall be
thermoplastic. The water meter shall meet all performance and material standards of AWWA and
shall be Sensus Series "S" or approved equal.
2.14 HYDROMETER: The hydrometer shall combine a turbine type water meter and a diaphragm
actuated solehold controlled valve mounted in a single globe style valve body. The meter shall power
a gear mechanism which activates a reed switch that transmits a pulse at a pre-determined amount
of flow. The unit shall include integral flow guides to eliminate the need for straight pipe allowances
before and after the valve. The main valve shall fully open and close drip tight in response to an
electrical signal. Remote control hydrometer shall be Bermad Model 910-P (2" in size) as
manufactured by Bermad Control Valves or approved equal.
2.15 CONCRETE MATERIALS: All concrete for thrust blocks shall have a minimum compressive strength
of 2,000 psi after 28 days of curing. Concrete shall be a mix not leaner than 1 part cement, 2 ~ parts
sand, 5 parts gravel. Dry mix will not be permitted. The slump shall not be more than three inches
nor less than one inch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL:
A. Design Pressure: This irrigation system has been designed to operate with a minimum static
inlet water pressure of 65 psi at the point of connection to city water supply. The Contractor
shall take a static pressure reading prior to beginning construction. If the static pressure reading
is less than the number shown above, the Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer for
further instructions.
B. Contractor Responsibility: The Contractor shall not willfully install the irrigation system as shown
on the drawings when it is obvious in the field that obstructions, grade differences or
discrepancies in equipment usage, area dimensions, or static water pressure exist that might
not have been considered in the design. Such obstructions or differences shall be brought to
the attention of the Architect/Engineer. In the event this notification is not performed, the
Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revision necessary at Contractor's expense.
C. Staking: Before installation is started, place a stake or flag where each sprinkler is to be
located, in accordance with the drawing. Staking shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer
before proceeding.
D. Piping Layout: Piping layout is diagrammatic. Route piping around existing trees in such
manner as to avoid damage to plantings. Do not dig within the ball of newly planted trees. In
areas where trees are present, trenches will be adjusted on site to provide a minimum
clearance of ten times the trunk diameter of the tree (at its base) between any tree and any
trench.
E. All material and equipment shall be delivered to the jobsite in unbroken reels, cartons or other
packaging to demonstrate that such material is new and of a quality and grade in keeping with
the intent of these specifications.
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02970 - 11
3.02 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING:
A. The Contractor shall perform all excavation to the depth indicated in these specifications and
drawings. The banks of trenches shall be kept as nearly vertical as practicable. Trenches shall
be wide enough to allow a minimum of four (4") inches between parallel pipelines or electrical
wiring. Where rock excavation is required, or where stones are encountered in the bottom of
the trench that would create a concentrated pressure on the pipe, the rock or stones shall be
removed to a depth of six (6") inches minimum below the trench depth indicated. The over
depth rock excavation and all excess trench excavation shall be backfilled with loose, moist
earth or sand, thoroughly tamped. Whenever wet or otherwise unstable soil that is incapable
of properly supporting the pipe is encountered in the trench bottom, such shall be removed to
a depth and length required, and the trench backfilled to trench bottom grade as hereinafter
specified, with course sand, fine gravel or other suitable material.
B. Bottom of trench grade shall be continued past ground surface deviations to avoid air pockets
and low collection points in the line. The minimum cover specifications shall govern regardless
of variations in ground surface profile and the occasional deeper excavation required at banks
and other field conditions. Excavation shall be such that a uniform trench grade variation will
occur in all Gases where variations are necessary.
C. Trench excavation shall comprise the satisfactory removal and disposition of all materials and
shall include all shoring and sheeting required to protect the excavation and to safeguard
employees.
D. During excavation, material suitable for backfilling shall be stockpiled in an orderly manner a
sufficient distance back from edge of trenches to avoid overloading and prevent slides or cave-
ins. Material unsuitable for backfilling shall be wasted as directed by the Architect/Engineer.
When excavated material is of a rocky nature and the topsoil or any other layer of excavated
material is suitable for pipe bedding and backfill in the vicinity of the pipe, such material shall
be separately stockpiled for use in such bedding and pipe backfill operations, unless
satisfactory imported material is used.
E. All excavations and backfill shall be unclassified and covered in the basic bid. No additional
compensation will be allowed for rock encountered.
F. Restore all surfaces, existing underground installations, etc., damaged or cut as a result of the
excavations to their original conditions in a manner acceptable to the Architect/Engineer.
3.03 PIPE INSTALLATION:
A. Sprinkler Mains: Sprinkler mains are that portion of piping from water source to electric valves
and quick coupling valves. This portion of piping is subject to surges since it is a closed portion
of the sprinkler system. Sprinkler mains shall be installed in a trench with a minimum of 18
inches of cover.
B. Lateral Piping: Lateral piping is that portion of piping from electric valve to sprinkler heads. This
portion of piping is not subject to surges since it is an "open end" portion of the sprinkler
system. Lateral piping shall be installed in a trench with a minimum of 12 inches of cover.
C. Remove lumber, rubbish and rocks from trenches. Provide firm, uniform bearing for entire
length of each pipe line to prevent uneven settlement. Wedging or blocking of pipe will not be
permitted. Remove foreign matter or dirt from inside of pipe before welding, and keep piping
clean during and after laying of pipe.
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02970 - 12
D. PVC pipe shall not be installed when there is water in the trench, nor shall PVC pipe be laid
when temperature is 40 degrees or below or when rain is imminent. PVC pipe will expand and
contract as the temperature changes. Therefore, pipe shall be snaked from side to side of
trench bottom to allow for expansion and contraction.
3.04 PVC PIPE AND FITTING ASSEMBLY:
A. Solvent: Use only solvent recommended by manufacturer to make solvent-welded joints
following standards noted herein. Thoroughly clean pipe and fittings of dirt, dust and moisture
with an approved PVC primer before applying solvent.
B. PVC to Metal Connection: Work metal connections first. Use a non-hardening pipe dope such
as Permatex No. 2 or "Teflon" tape on threaded PVC to metal joints. Use only light wrench
pressure,
C. Threaded PVC Connections: Where required, use threaded PVC adapters into which pipe may
be welded.
3.05 HYDROSTATIC TESTS: Pressure Test: After the pipe is laid, the joints completed and the trench
partially backfilled leaving the joints exposed for examination, the newly laid piping or any valved
section of main pressure line piping shall, unless otherwise specified, be subjected for four hours
to a hydrostatic pressure test of normal city water pressure. Each valve shall be opened and closed
during the test. Exposed pipe, joints, fittings, and valves shall be carefully examined during the
partially open trench test. Joints showing visible leakage shall be replaced or remade as necessary.
Cracked or defective pipe, joints, fittings, or valves discovered in consequence of this pressure test
shall be removed and replaced with sound material, and the test shall be repeated until the test
results are satisfactory. All replacement and repair shall be without additional expense to the Owner.
3.06 CONTROL WIRE INSTALLATION:
A. All control wire less than 1000 feet in length shall be continuous without splices or joints from
the controller to the valves. Connections to the electric valves shall be made within 18 inches
of the valve using connectors specified.
B. All control wires shall be installed at least 18 inches deep. Contractor shall obtain the
ArchitectJEngineer's approval for wire routing when installed in separate ditch. Control wires
may be installed in a common ditch with piping; however, wires must be installed a minimum
of 4 inches below or to one side of piping. Bundle all wires together with a moisture-proof tape
at a maximum interval of every 20 feet.
C. All wire passing under existing or future paving, sidewalk, construction, etc., shall be encased
in PVC Schedule 40 conduit extending at least 2 feet beyond edges of paving, sidewalks or
construction.
3.07 ROTARY HEADS: Rotary pop-up heads shall be installed with the top of the sprinkler head
flush with the top of the installed sod. Rotary pop-up sprinklers shall be installed on swing
joint assemblies as detailed on the drawings. Underthe warranty, the Contractor shall return
within 90 days or upon establishment of the grass whichever comes first and adjust the
sprinklers to proper grade at sod level. Locate all rotary sprinklers four (4") inches from the
edge of pavement or hardscape.
3.08 POP-UP SPRAY HEADS: Provide heads and nozzles as specified and install in locations as shown
on the drawings. Pop-up spray heads shall be installed on a flexible PVC riser directly on to lateral
piping as detailed on the drawings. Heads shall be installed with the top of head flush with the
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02970 - 13
finished grade. Contractor will be required to adjust heads as necessary after establishment of grass
or other plant material.
3.09 QUICK COUPLING VALVES: Quick coupling valves shall be installed on a swing-joint assembly as
detailed on the drawings. Under the warranty, the Contractor shall return after grass is established
and adjust valves and valve boxes to proper grade.
3.10 VALVE AND VALVE BOX PLACEMENT: All valves shall be in boxes as specified and shall be set
with a minimum of six (6") inches of space between their top surface and the bottom of the valve
box. Valves shall be fully opened and fully closed to ensure that all pads are in operating condition.
Valve boxes shall be set plumb, vertical and concentric with the valve stem. Any valve box which
has moved from this required position so as to prevent the use of the flow control of the valve shall
be reset by the Contractor at his own expense.
3ol I IRRIGATION CONTROLLER:
A. Irrigation controller shall be located as shown on the plans and shall be capable of operating
the number of stations indicated. The system is designed to operate only one section at a time
unless otherwise noted on the plans. The controller may be sized for future irrigation expansion
and may have more stations than valves. The Contractor shall install the size controller
specified on the plans in accordance with the manufacturer's published installation instructions.
B. Controller shall be located where shown on the plans and oriented in such a manner as to allow
the operator to view a maximum area of the irrigation system, unless required to be installed
inside a structure.
3.12 ELECTRIC REMOTE CONTROL VALVES:
A, Remote control valves shall be located and sized as shown on the plans. All electrical
connections shall be made when the weather is dry with connection kits as specified in
accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedures. All remote control valves shall be
installed in a horizontal position, and according to the manufacturer's published installation
instructions.
B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish and install the proper size wire on each
of the low voltage circuits from the irrigation controller to the various electric remote control
valves.
C. Consideration shall be given to each circuit for allowance of voltage drop and economy
consistent with accepted practices of electrical installation. Under no circumstances shall the
voltage of any branch circuit be reduced more than proper due to length of run exceeding the
maximum allowable for the wire size used.
3.13 DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY (DCVA): Install the double check valve assembly per
manufacturer's published installation instructions in a valve box as specified and detailed on the
drawings or as required by local plumbing codes.
3.14 WATER METER: Install the water meter per manufacturer's published installation instructions in a
meter box as specified or as required by local plumbing codes.
3.15 HYDROMETER: Install the hydrometer per manufacturer's published installation instructions in a
valve box as specified, Provide and install from the hydrometer to the controller sensor inputs, two
(2) each color coded 14 gauge UF wires (total of 4). Two (2) wires shall have blue insulation and two
wires shall have yellow insulation.
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02970 - 14
3.16 BACKFILL AND COMPACTION:
A. After system is operating and required tests and inspections have been made, the trenches
shall be carefully backfilled with the excavated materials approved for backfilling, consisting of
earth, loam, sandy clay, sand, gravel, soft shale or other approved materials, free from large
clods of earth or stone. Rock, broken concrete or pavement and large boulders shall not be
used as backfill material. The backfill shall be thoroughly compacted and evened with the
adjacent soil level.
B. Compact trenches in areas to be planted by thoroughly flooding the backfill. Compact all other
areas by flooding or hand tamping. The jetting process may be used in areas when flooding.
C. Backfill for all trenches, regardless of the type of pipe covered, shall be compacted to a
minimum 95% Standard Proctor Density.
D. Any trenches improperly backfilled, or where settlement occurs, shall be reopened to the depth
required for compaction, then refilled and compacted with the surface restored to the required
grade and left in a completed surface condition as described above.
E. Specifically tamp backfill under heads and around the flange of heads for one (1 ') foot by a
suitable means after trench backfill has dried from flooding to prevent heads loosening in the
ground.
F. DUE TO THE LOCATION AND ACCESSIBILITY OF THIS PROJECT, Contractor WILL NOT
BE ALLOWED TO LEAVE ANY TRENCHES OPEN AFTER WORK HOURS OR OVERNIGHT.
ALL TRENCHES MUST BE BACKFILLED ON A DAILY BASIS.
3.17 CONCRETE THRUST BLOCKS: Concrete thrust blocks shall be installed on 3" main line
(Contractor's option for main line 2 ¼" and smaller) at plugs, caps, bends, tees, crosses, elbows,
and other fittings as necessary to prevent surge damage to the piping system. Concrete shall be
formed and placed so that fittings, joints, valves, etc., are not contained in the thrust blocking and
they are accessible for future repair. Blocking shall be placed between solid ground and the fitting
to be anchored. Unless otherwise indicated or directed, the base and thrust bearing sides of the
thrust block shall be poured directly against undisturbed earth. The sides of the thrust blocks not
subject to thrust may be poured against forms. The area of bearing shall be as shown in the details
or as directed.
3.18 FINAL ADJUSTMENT:
A. After installation has been completed, make final adjustment of sprinkler system prior to
Architect/Engineer's final inspection.
B. Completely flush each section to remove debris from lines by removing all nozzles from heads
and turning on system.
C. Replace nozzles and check sprinklers for proper operation and proper alignment for direction
of throw.
D. Check each section for operating pressure and balance to other sections by use of flow
adjustment on top of each valve.
E. Check nozzling for proper coverage. Prevailing wind conditions may indicate that arc or angle
of spray should be other than as shown on drawings. In this case, change nozzles to provide
correct coverage and furnish record date to Architect/Engineer with each change.
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02970 - 15
3.19 CLEAN-UP: The project site shall be thoroughly cleaned of all waste materials and all unused or
salvaged materials, equipment, tools, etc. After completion of the work, areas disturbed shall be
leveled and the site shall be raked clean and left in an orderly condition. _
END OF SECTION
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02970 o 16
SECTION 03100
-- CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE: The extent of formwork is indicated by the concrete items shown on the drawings. The work
includes the design, construction, erection, maintenance, and removal of all formwork for concrete
paving, and any other appropriate concrete items called for.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement.
B. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
_ 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and
standards, except as modified or amended herein.
A. ACI 347-68, "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork."
B. ACI 301-72, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DESIGN OF FORMWORK:
-- A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork so that concrete items will be of the
correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position.
B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock, or damage to the
cast-in-place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials.
C. Provide formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete
-- placement. Solidly butt all joints and provide backup material at joints as may be required to
prevent leakage and fins.
D. Wood Forms: Shall be No. 2 common southern pine, or equivalent, materials milled to
' reasonably uniform width and thickness, at least two (2) edges and one (1) side dressed for
tight fit.
_ E. Metal Forms: Clean, unpainted, and in good condition to provide members of widths and
depths required. Severely damaged or indented forms are not acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 FORMWORK:
_ A. All forms shall be observed by the Owner prior to placement of concrete. The Contractor shall
notify the Owner at least twenty-four (24) hours prior to placing concrete.
B. Forms shall be built to the shapes and dimensions of the concrete on the drawings, shall be
' set to lines and grades, braced and secured to withstand placing of concrete.
CONCRETE FORMWORK
03100 - 1
3.02 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES:
A~ Coat the contact surfaces of forms with a form-coating compound before reinforcement is _
placed. Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatment of
concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion nor impede the wetting of surfaces to be cured
with water or curing compounds. Thin form-coating compounds only with the thinning agent --
of the type and in amount and under the conditions of the form-coating compound
manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in the
forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be
placed. Apply in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
B. Coat steel forms with a non-staining, rust preventive form oil or otherwise protect against
rusting. Rust stained steel formwork is not acceptable. --
3.03 REMOVAL OF FORMS: Forms shall not be removed until concrete has adequately hardened.
3.04 RE-USE OF FORMS: Clean and repair the surfaces of forms that are to be re-used in the work, '
except that warped, split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be
acceptable. Apply new form-coating compound material to all concrete contact form surfaces as
specified for new formwork. _
When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins
and laitance, and tighten forms to close all joints. Align and secure all joints to avoid offsets. Do not
use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. --
A. All formwork shall comply with ACI 302-69, "Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and
Slab Construction."
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE FORMWORK
4017 03100 - 2
SECTION 03200
-- CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
' 1.01 SCOPE: The extent of concrete reinforcement is shown on the drawings and in schedules. The work
includes fabrication and placement of reinforcement for the cast-in-place concrete, including bars,
ties and supports.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork.
B. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
_ 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS: Comply with requirements of the following codes and standards, except
as herein modified:
A. American Concrete Institute, ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced
-- Concrete Structures."
B. American Concrete Institute, ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings."
C. American Welding Society, AWS, D 12.1 "Recommended Practices for Welding Reinforcing
Steel, Metal Inserts and Connection in Reinforced Concrete Construction.
-- D. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice."
1.04 SUBMITTALS: Submit to the Architect/Engineer in conformance with the requirements of the
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
A. For information only, submit two (2) copies of steel producer's certificates of mill tests for
reinforcing steel.
B. Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement.
Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete
Structures." Show bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangements and
-- assemblies, as required for the fabrication and placement of concrete reinforcement.
1.05 PRODUCT, DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE:
A. Deliver reinforcement to the project site bundled, tagged, and marked. Use metal tags
indicating bar size, lengths, and other information corresponding to markings shown on
placement diagrams.
B. Store concrete reinforcement materials at the site to prevent damage and accumulation of
dirt or excessive rust.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615 of grade shown on drawings with minimum yield strength of
60,000 psi.
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200-1
B. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing,
supporting, and fastening reinforcement in place. Use wire bar type supports or plastic-type
chairs, complying with P57-66, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use wood, brick, and other
unacceptable materials.
2.02 FABRICATION:
A. General: Shop-fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to required shapes and dimensions with
fabrication tolerances complying with ACI 315. In case of fabricating errors, do not re-bend
or straighten reinforcement in a manner that will injure or weaken the material.
B. Unacceptable Materials: Reinforcement with any of the following defects will not be permitted
in the work:
1. Bar lengths, depths and bends exceeding specified tolerances.
2. Bends or kinks not indicated on drawings or final shop drawings.
3. Bars with reduced cross section due to excessive rusting or other cause.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION: Comply with the specified codes and standards and the Concrete Reinforcing Steel
Institute recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for details and methods of
reinforcement placement and supports and as herein specified.
A. Clean reinforcement to remove loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials
which reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
B. Position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction
or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by chairs as required.
C. Place reinforcement to obtain the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange,
space, and securely tie bars and bar supports together with No. 16 gauge wire to hold
reinforcement accurately in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so
that ends are directed away from exposed concrete surfaces.
D. Provide sufficient numbers of supports and of strength to carry reinforcement. Do not place
reinforcing bars more than two (2") inches beyond the last leg of any continuous bar support.
Do not use supports as bases for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction
loads.
E. Splices: Provide standard reinforcement splices by lapping ends, placing bars in contact, and
tightly wire tying. Comply with requirements of ACI 318 for minimum lap of spliced bars.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200 - 2
SECTION 03300
-- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
' 1.01 SCOPE: This item shall consist of concrete paving and miscellaneous concrete items composed of
portland cement concrete, with reinforcing steel. constructed as herein specified on an approved
subgrade, and in conformance with the lines and grades shown on the plans and details.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A, Section 02200 - Earthwork.
B. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork.
C. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement.
1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS: Comply with the following codes and standards except as modified or
amended herein:
A. ACI 301-72 (Revised 1975) "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings."
B. ACI 318-77 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."
C. AC1304-73 (Reaffirmed 1978)"Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting
and Placing Concrete."
1 .(2)4 TESTING: Refer to General Provisions.
A. Material Evaluation Tests and Design Mixes: The Contractor's testing agency shall sample
' and test proposed concrete materials, test aggregates from each material source and
evaluate for compliance with specified standards. The testing agency shall then compile test
results and proposed concrete mix designs, as specified herein, into a report to be submitted
_ to the ArchitectJEngineer for approval.
B. Quality Control Testing During Construction: Perform testing services as outlined in ACI301 -
72, except as modified herein:
1. Mold and cure three (3) specimens for each sample in accordance with ASTM C31.
Any deviations from the requirements of this standard shall be recorded in the test
_ report.
2. For all concrete work, test one specimen at seven (7) days and one at twenty-eight
(28) days. One set of three (3) specimens shall be taken per the schedule in PART
-- 3 - EXECUTION.
C. Contractor shall pay for all testing.
1.05 WORKMANSHIP: All concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements, including
strength, tolerances, and finishes, shall be removed and replaced or corrected as directed by the
Architect/Engineer at the Contractor's expense, without extension of time.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
4017 03300-1
1.06 SUBMITTALS: Submit to the Architect/Engineer in conformance with the requirements of the
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT.
A. Laboratory Test Reports: Submit two (2) copies of laboratory test reports for concrete
materials, mix design tests, and field quality control tests as specified under "Testing."
B. Delivery Tickets: Furnish duplicate delivery tickets to the Owner as specified under
"Production of Concrete."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE: All concrete shall be 3,000 psi or greater at twenty-eight (28) days, five (5) sacks
cement per cubic yard, portland cement mix, reinforced as specified, and shall be of the size,
dimension, and detail shown on the drawings and in accordance with these specifications.
A. Cement: Provide portland cement, Type 1, ASTM C150, except as otherwise indicated.
B. Aggregates for Normal Weight Concrete:
1. Coarse: Shall conform to ASTM C33 and as herein specified. Use clean, uncoated,
processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam, or foreign matter. Shall be
crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone.
2. Fine: Shall conform to ASTM C33 and as herein specified. Use clean, sharp, natural
sand, free from loam, clay lumps, or other deleterious substances.
3. In proportioning, fine and coarse aggregates shall be regarded as separate
ingredients. Each size of coarse aggregate, as well as combination of sizes when
two or more are used, shall conform to the appropriate grading requirements of
applicable ASTM specifications. Maximum sizes of aggregates shall be determined
by proportioning requirements.
4. Provide aggregates of each type from one source to ensure uniform ity of color, size,
and shape.
5. Maximum size of coarse aggregate and proportion of design mix as follows:
Concrete All Other Concrete
Paving Construction
Maximum Water and Cement
Ratio, Gal./Sack 6 6
Aggregate, Maximum Size 1" 1W'
Weight Normal Normal
Slump Range, Inches 3-5 3-5
Percent Air Entrainment 5% Optional
PSI 3,000 rain. 3,000 min.
C. Water for Mixing and Curing: Clean, fresh, free from oil, acid, organic matter, or other
deleterious substances. Provide water for curing that does not contain impurities in sufficient
amount to etch concrete surfaces or cause discoloration to concrete indicated to remain
exposed and unpainted. --
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 2
2.02 REINFORCING STEEL: Reinforcing steel shall be ASTM A615-GR40 for stirrups and ties, A615-
GR60 for all other and shall conform to Section 03200.
2.03 EXPANSION JOINT FILLER: Resilient, non-bituminous, Type I, semi-rigid, conforming to ASTM
D545. Provide in all expansion joints as shown on the plans.
-- 2.04 EXPANSION JOINT DOWELS: Shall be No. 4 smooth bar dowels eighteen (18") inches long, with
one (1) end capped with plastic or metal cap and placed at thirty-six (36") inches on center (or as
shown) through the center of each expansion joint.
2.05 EXPANSION JOINT SEALER: All joint sealer for expansion joints in concrete paving shall be a
two-part pourable polyurethane sealant, conforming to Interim Federal Specification TT-S-00227E
and shall be Pecora Corporation's Urexpan NR-200 or Tremco Manufacturing Company's THC/900
-- sealant, colors to be selected by the Owner.
2.06 FORMS: Concrete forms shall conform to Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork.
' 2.07 CHAIRS: Use plastic-type chairs, as approved by the Owner. Do not use wood, brick or other
unacceptable materials.
-- 2.08 CURING COMPOUND: Curing compound shall be Type I (clear or translucent) or Type II
(white-pigmented), as defined by ASTM Designation C309. Products offered by manufacturers which
comply with the requirements include the following:
Horncure 30D: A. C. HornAN. R. Grace.
Clear-Bond: Guardian Chemical Company.
LR 151: Protex Industries, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL: Concrete work will have a thickness as shown on the details and shall be placed on the
-- specified subgrade as shown. Standard slopes for paving, unless otherwise shown on the plans, will
be one-quarter (¼") inch per foot.
_ 3.02 FORMS: All formwork shall be observed and approved bythe Owner's Representative prior to placing
any concrete. See Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork. Forms shall be securely staked to line and
grade and maintained in a true position during the placement of concrete.
-- A. Forms for Making Placed Concrete: Forms shall be set true to line and grade in advance of
the concreting for a distance sufficient to permit a finished subgrade. They shall be joined
neatly and tightly and shall be set with exactness to grade and alignment. All forms must be
in firm contact with the subgrade throughout their entire length and base width and securely
staked with at least three (3) pins per ten (10') foot section. If the subgrade becomes
unstable, the forms shall be reset using heavy stakes or other additional supports such as
may be required to provide sufficient stability to withstand vibration and movement of all
-- equipment operated thereon.
1. If forms settle over one-eighth (l/s") inch under finishing operation, paving operations
shall be stopped; forms shall then be reset to line and grade, and pavement brought
' up to standard section and thickness.
2. Forms must be cleaned and oiled before concrete is placed against them.
3. Forms shall remain in place until the concrete is at least twelve (12) hours old, and
removal of forms shall be followed immediately by coating the sides of the slab with
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 3
curing compound and then banking earth against the sides of the slab and wetting
same.
3.03 PLACEMENT OF REINFORCEMENT: All reinforcement shall be placed in the center of formwork
and securely held in place by the use of chairs.
3.04 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE: --
A. Concrete shall be transit mixed as specified herein. All plant facilities are subject to
acceptance of the Owner.
B. Ready Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C94, and as herein specified,
provided the quantity and rate of delivery will permit unrestricted progress of the work in
accordance with the placement schedule. Proposed changes in mixing procedures other than --
specified herein must be accepted by the Owner before implementation. Modifications to
ASTM C94 are as follows:
1. Provide concrete materials, proportions, and properties as herein specified in lieu of
ASTM Section 4.
2. Slump: Slump range in inches shall be within 3"-5" in lieu of ASTM Section 5.1.
3. Mixing and Delivery: Delete the references for allowing additional water to be added
to the batch of material with insufficient slump. Addition of water to be batch will not
be permitted as specified in ASTM Section 9.7. In addition to the requirements of
ASTM Section 9.7., when the air temperature is between 85 and 90 degrees
Fahrenheit reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and
when the air temperature is above 90 degrees Fahrenheit reduce the mixing and
delivery time to 60 minutes. When the truck mixer is used for the complete mixing
of the concrete, begin mixing operation within 30 minutes after the cement has been
intermingled with the aggregate.
4. Certification: Furnish duplicate delivery tickets with each load of concrete delivered
to the site. In addition to the requirements of ASTM Section 14.1, provide the
following information on delivery tickets: type and brand of cement, cement content
per cubic yard of concrete, maximum size of aggregate, amount and brand name of
each admixture, and total water content expressed as water/cement ratio.
5. Strength: Delete ASTM Section 15 and comply with concrete testing requirements
as herein specified.
6. Maintain equipment in proper operating condition with drums cleaned before
changing each batch. Schedule rates of delivery in order to prevent delay of concrete
too long in the mixer before the addition of water admixtures.
C. Cold Weather Requirements: No concrete shall be placed when the temperature is below
forty (40) degrees Fahrenheit or when the temperature is fifty (50) degrees and dropping.
3.05 EMBEDDED ITEMS: Set and build, into the work, embedded items required for other work, as
required. Refer to drawings for location, type, size, etc.
3.06 APPROVAL: No concrete paving shall be placed until adjacent work has been approved by the
Owner's Representative and heavy equipment traffic across the paving location can be terminated.
All forms shall be observed and approved by the Owner prior to any concrete paving,
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 4
3.07 DRY BRUSH FINISH CONCRETE PAVING:
-- A. Placing: Prior to placing concrete, the subgrade shall be moistened and then concrete shall
be placed in forms and thoroughly tamped in place so that all honeycombs will be eliminated
and sufficient mortar will be brought to the surface. The surface shall be troweled with a steel
trowel and then brushed to obtain a smooth uniform brush finish.
B. Curing Compound: As soon as possible after the exposed to view concrete has been poured
and finished, it shall be cured by the use of the specified curing compound. The curing
_ compound shall be applied full strength or as recommended by the manufacturer. It shall in
no way be diluted by the addition of petroleum products.
C. All faces adjacent to the forms shall be spaded before the forms are stripped. The surface
-- of faces will be smooth and free of honeycombs. Edges of all paving shall be finished to a
one-half (~") inch radius with a suitable finishing tool.
D. Expansion Joint Sealing: Expansion joints shall be sealed by an experienced applicator with
the sealant specified to a depth equal to joint width with a minimum depth of one-half ('~")
inch as shown on the plans.
-- 1. Preparation: All surfaces in contact with compounds shall be dry, sound, well
brushed and wiped free. Remove curing compounds, oil, and other such materials
by wire brushing.
' 2. Application: The ambient temperature shall be as recommended by sealant
manufacturers when sealants are applied. Gun-apply compounds with nozzles of
proper sizes to fit joints. Force into grooves with sufficient pressure to expel air and
_ fill grooves solidly. Joints shall be free of wrinkles and tooled smooth.
3. Cleaning: Clean surfaces adjoining sealed joints of smears and other soiling
resulting from sealing application. Clean up all debris caused by the work of this
-- section, keeping the premises clean and neat at all times.
3.08 PROTECTION: After concrete is placed, finished, and cured as required, permit no traffic thereon for
three (3) days thereafter and further protect the surface from damage due to other causes. Vehicles
of all types shall be kept off new concrete pavement during the construction period.
3.09 STRIPPING OF FORMS:
A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as edges of slabs, etc., may be removed
twelve (12) hours after placing concrete provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be
damaged by removal operations and provided that curing and protection operations are
maintained.
B. After forms are removed and prior to backfilling with earth, the edges of the slabs shall be
-- coated with membrane-curing compound. Contractor shall be careful not to allow membrane-
curing compound to fall on any surface to be covered by track surfacing.
3.10 CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS:
A. Contraction Saw Joints: Shall be one-eighth (1/8") inch wide by one and one-quarter (1%")
inch deep, joints placed on ten (10') foot centers, unless otherwise shown. Contraction joints
_ are not required to be sealed. Joints will be sawed as soon as sawing can be performed
without stripping aggregate from the concrete, generally within eighteen (18) to twenty-four
(24) hours after placement.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 5
B. Doweled Expansion Joints: Shall be placed where shown on the drawings.
3.11 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE: Any concrete which, in the opinion of the Owner has crazed or cracked
considerably or possesses a bad finish or is not at the proper grade, size or location or does not meet
the specified strength will be subject to rejection, and it shall be removed and replaced at the
Contractor's expense. Any concrete which needs to be repaired shall be repaired by methods
approved by the Owner.
3.12 CLEANUP: It is the intent of this contract to ensure that an adequate cleanup job will be performed
by the Contractor as soon during the construction procedure as possible. In particular, all concrete
paving shall be backfilled as soon as possible. Before the project is accepted by the Owner, all rocks,
stones, and other construction debris shall be removed. All necessary cleanup work shall be
considered subsidiary to the various bid items in this contract.
3.13 SCHEDULE OF TEST SPECIMENS: Provide the indicated number of sets of specimens for testing,
there being three cylinder specimens per set as described in this specification. Specimens shall be
taken during placement of concrete as directed by the Owner and under the supervision of a
representative of the laboratory testing agency.
Concrete parking lot and drives ....... one set per 25 cubic yards (or less) per day
Concrete walks/plaza paving ......... one set per 15 cubic yards (or less) per day
Concrete retaining walls ............ one set per 10 cubic yards (or less) per day
Building slabs .................... one set per slab or one set per 20 cubic yards per day.
whichever is larger
Piers, footings, others .............. one set per 30 cubic yards (or less) per day
END OF SECTION
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
4o17 03300 - 6
SECTION 04100
-- MORTAR AND GROUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK ELSEWHERE: Section 04200 - Unit Masonry.
1.02 PRODUCT DELIVER, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Store all mortar and grout materials under cover, above ground and in a dry place. Keep
stockpiled aggregates covered with suitable cover at all times.
' B. Deliver all mortar and grout materials in their original, unopened containers. Packages shall
clearly indicate the brand, name of manufacturer, and net weight of each package.
_ PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PORTLAND CEMENT: ASTM C 150, Type I, no air entrainment.
-- 2.02 LIME: ASTM C 207, Type S.
2.03 AGGREGATE:
A. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144-70, locally available, light in color.
B. Aggregate for Pointing: ASTM C 144-70, locally available, light in color and passing No. 16
-- sieve.
2.04 MORTAR: Colored, Type "S", gray in color.
2.05 WATER: Potable.
2.06 MIXES: All cementitious materials and aggregates shall be mixed for a minimum of five (5) minutes
-- in a mechanical batch mixer with amount of water required to produce a workable consistency.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
' 3.02 GENERAL:
A. Provide mortar and grout in sufficient quantity so as not to disrupt the continuous placement
-- of masonry materials.
B. Mortar not used within two (2) hours shall be discarded.
' C. Mortar that has stiffened within time intervals above because of evaporation may be
retempered by adding water to regain its original workability.
_ D. Cementious materials and aggregate shall be mixed with just enough water to make a damp
mixture. Allow to stand for approximately two (2) hours then remix and add water to obtain
proper workability for tuck pointing.
MORTAR AND GROUT
04100 - 1
3.02 CLEANUP: Remove all packages, containers, equipment and other materials associated with this
section at completion of work.
END OF SECTION
MORTAR AND GROUT
04100 - 2
SECTION 04200
-- UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
' 1.01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Section 03100: Concrete Formwork.
B. Section 04100: Mortar and Grout.
C. Section 05500: Miscellaneous Metal.
D. Section 07175: Liquid Water Repellent.
_ E. Section 07920: Caulking and Sealants.
F. Section 09900: Painting.
-- 1,02 WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED BY OTHERS: Notify other trades when ready for installation
of their materials and allow sufficient time for them to execute their work. Build chases, slots.
openings as indicated or required except where formed by sleeves, frames, etc., furnished by other
trades.
1.03 CERTIFICATES: Provide affidavit certifying that all delivered masonry units have been manufactured,
cured and dried under conditions conforming to these specifications.
1.04 SAMPLE PANELS: Construct a 4 foot x 4 foot sample panel with approved masonry units and joint
type. Build in location as directed by Architect. No masonry work shall begin until sample panel has
been completed and approved.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
-- A. Protect all masonry units with tarpaulins or other approved material during freezing weather.
B. Store masonry units on platforms and protect from contact with soil and weather exposure.
' C. All concrete masonry shall be delivered to site dry enough to comply with specified limitations
of moisture content. Masonry units that become wet shall be removed from the site.
_ D. Store all metal reinforcement above ground and protect from construction traffic.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS: Do not place masonry materials when air temperature is 40
degrees F. and falling without prior approval by Architect.
1.07 ALLOWANCE: Allow $265.00 per 1,000 for brick material cost.
PART 2 - MATERIAL
2.01 FACE BRICK:
-- A. Size: Modular, 3-5/8" x 2-1/4" x 7-5/8", ASTM C 216, Grade SW, Type FBS.
B. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3,000 psi, individual brick.
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 1
C. Surfaces: One finish face, 2 finished ends. Provide uncored, unfrogged units where core
holes would be exposed in finished work.
D. Special Shapes: Provide special shapes as shown on drawings, with finished faces on
exposed surfaces. Do not cut brick to make special shapes.
E. Color and Finish: Color and finish shall be selected by Architect and/or Owner.
2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS:
A. Size: Nominal face dimension, 4"x 8" x 16" and 8" x 8"x 16", hollow, lightweight, ASTM C
90-70, Grade N, Type 1, plain grey.
B. Solid, Lightweight: ASTM C 145-70, Grade N-1.
C. Full Split Face, Hollow Lightweight: ASTM C 90-80A, Grade N-l, "Buff," split face one side,
single score one side.
D. Full Split Face Corner Units: Plain grey, split one face and one end, single score one side.
2.03 GLAZED MASONRY UNITS: ASTM C 126-82, structural glazed ceramic facing clay tile.
A. Color selected by Owner.
2.04 ANCHORS AND TIES: Heavy galvanized metal.
A. Masonry Wall Joint Reinforcement: No. 9 gauge deformed side rods with mill finish, truss
style, ASTM A 82. Width shall be two (2") inches less than total masonry thickness.
B. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed billet steel bars, A 615, Grade 60.
2.05 SEALANT: See Section 07951.
2.06 MASONRY CLEANER: "Deox" or "Sure-Klean 6OO."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION:
A. Cleaning: Concrete beam and slab surfaces on which masonry walls and partitions are to be
laid up shall be brushed thoroughly to remove loose dirt and laitance.
B. Scaffolding: Furnish, erect, maintain, and move scaffolding required for installation of
masonry.
C. Reduce initial absorption of brick exceeding 20 gm./min./30 sq. in., as determined by ASTM
C 67, by thoroughly wetting bricks with clean water 24 hours prior to placement.
D. In hot weather, wet down two to four hours prior to placement.
E. Refer to Article 1.06 for cold weather requirements.
3.02 BRACING:
A. Provide adequate temporary bracing of masonry until structure is complete and cured.
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 2
B. Allow 64 hours before allowing construction of concentrated loads of masonry walls and
columns.
3.04 JOINT REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORS:
A. Joint Reinforcement: Provide continuous reinforcement in mortar joints of masonry wall as
' follows:
1. Install continuous reinforcement at 16" o.c. vertically in brick and concrete masonry
_ walls or structural glazed clay units, lap reinforcement 6 inches at ends.
2. Provide supplemental reinforcing or ties required for grouting.
-- 3. Install prefabricated corner and tee ties at wall intersections.
4. Install vertical reinforcing as indicated on the drawings.
B. ANCHORS: Install other anchors or ties as shown on drawings.
3.05 COURSING AND JOINTING:
A. Course brick 3 courses to 8 inches, except where soldier and rowlock courses are shown.
Lay up units with 3/8 inch bed and head joints, uniformly adjusted to produce specified
coursing.
B. Lay units in common running bond unless otherwise noted. Lay rowlocks, soldiers and
patterns or special coursing as detailed.
C. Tightly tool sight exposed joints to a smooth, hard concave joint.
D. Provide sealant and caulking recess joints around outside perimeter of door and glazing
' frames and other wall openings. Rake joints to depth of 3/4 inch and width of 1/4 inch.
E. Lay concrete masonry units in common running bond otherwise noted.
F. Lay structural glazed clay facing tile in running bond otherwise noted, with 1/4 inch mortar
joint.
-- 3.06 INSTALLATION:
A. Lay masonry unit plumb and true to lines, with level courses, head joints lined up vertically.
_ Use no more than one cut closure in a length of wall. Line up closures vertically.
B. Lay up masonry units with completely filled mortar joints. Do not furrow bed joints, then shove
in place. Rock closures in place with head joints thrown against two adjoining brick in place.
C. Tap each unit to line and level as it is placed. Do not disturb units once in place, except to
remove completely and set in fresh bed of mortar.
D. Do not pound corners and jambs to fit stretcher units after they have been set in position.
Where an adjustment must be made after mortar has started to harden, remove mortar and
replace with fresh mortar,
E. Stop off horizontal run by racking back in each course; toothing is not permitted.
UNIT MASONRY
4047 04200 - 3
F. Make cuts with a power masonry saw. Do not use saw-cut faces in exposed work.
G. Lay up only brick which have no chipped, cracked or discolored exposed faces. Lay up with _
good face showing.
H. Use only dry concrete masonry units. Do not place exposed units with broken or chipped
corners or faces. '
3.07 BUILDING IN OTHER WORK:
A. Build in lintels, door frames, windows, flashing. inserts, anchors, blocking, sleeves, wall
plugs, boxes, cabinets, piping, conduit and other items, whether provided as part of masonry
work, as preparation for other work, or furnished in other sections.
B. Full grout hollow metal door frames in masonry walls with mortar.
3.11 CLEANING AND POINTING:
A. At completion of masonry work, inspect masonry for defective joints and damaged masonry
units.
B. Cut out and repoint defective joints. Fill holes and tool smooth.
C. Remove stained and damaged masonry units and replace with new units in fresh mortar bed,
of color and tooling to match adjacent joints. '
D. Dry brush masonry surface after mortar has set, at end of each day's work and after final
pointing.
E. Apply cleaning agent to 20 sq. ft. sample wall area in location acceptable to Architect.
F. Apply cleaning agent as recommended by manufacturer. Do not use tools or solutions that '
would damage or stain masonry.
G. Do not proceed with cleaning until sample area is accepted. ._
H. Work small section at a time; work from top to bottom.
I. Thoroughly rinse with clean water. '
J. Protect adjacent materials which may corrode.
K. Remove efflorescence in accordance with brick manufacturer's recommendations.
L. Leave work and surrounding surface clean and free of mortar spots, droppings and broken
masonry.
END OF SECTION
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 4
SECTION 05500
-- MISCELLANEOUS METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. Specification for Structural Steel, ASTM A 36.
2. Specification for Low-Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Standard
"' Fasteners, ASTM A 307.
3. Specification for Mild Steel Arc-Welding Electrodes, ASTM A 233.
B. American Institute of Steel Construction:
1. Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for
-- Buildings, February 12, 1969.
2. Code of Standard Practice, July 1, 1970.
3. Manual of Steel Construction.
C.American Welding Society: Code for Welding in Building Construction, AWS D1 .O.
D.Latest edition of each of above governing standards shall apply.
. 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS: Prepare large scale shop and erection drawings in advance of fabrication. Give
complete information necessary for fabrication of component parts of structure, including location,
type and size of all rivets, bolts and welds. Clearly distinguish between shop and field bolts and
welds. Make shop drawings in conformity with best modern practice and with due regard to speed
-- and economy in fabrication and erection, all as set forth in AI5C "Structural Shop Drafting."
PART 2 - MATERIALS
' 2.01 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL: Shall conform to ASTM Designation A 36.
2.02 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS: Provide anchors, bolts, screws, and other fastenings required for
-- installation of work of this section.
2.03 LOOSE LINTELS: Conform to ASTM A-36, size as indicated on drawings. Prime coat, chromic metal
primer. Provide adequate length for minimum 8 inches bearing at each end.
2.04 PAINT: Rust-inhibitive shop primer, SSPC 15-68T, Type I, Red Oxide, MWF 3.6 mils.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 FABRICATION:
' A. Execute fabrication in accordance with drawing requirements and in accordance with
applicable provisions of current edition of AISC Specifications.
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500 - 1
B. Provide holes and slots where required for attachment of Work of other trades.
C, Fabricate for types of connections as stipulated by drawing requirements.
D. All connectors not otherwise detailed or noted shall be fabricated and erected as standard
connections as shown in latest edition of Manual of Steel Construction (AISC). Except as
otherwise indicated, weld all shop connections. Make all field connections with high-strength
bolts except where structural drawings indicate use of welding. Execute temporary
connections for field welding by bolting.
3.02 GENERAL ERECTION REQUIREMENTS:
A. Erection includes installations of all anchor bolts, fastenings, etc., required for installation.
Provide all temporary staging, equipment, etc., required for erection, including hoisting
equipment and temporary floors.
B. Set anchor bolts in concrete forms prior to placing of concrete. Set by wood ternplates or
other approved means, and maintain securely in proper position.
C. Connections: Bolted, welded or riveted, as indicated, noted or detailed.
D, Execute erection in accordance with applicable provisions of current edition of AISC
Specifications.
E. Set and level base plates to exact lines and grades indicated. Grouting will be executed
under another section of these project specifications.
3.03 SHOP AND FIELD WELDING:
A. All welding shall fully comply with requirements of American Welding Society's "Code for Arc
and Gas Welding in Building Construction," as amended to date.
B. Welding equipment shall be maintained in good working condition at all times, and shall be
capable of adjustments in full range of current settings.
C. Use American Welding Society's recommended electrodes for use on particular type of steel
being worked.
3.04 DISSIMILAR MATERIALS:
A. Insulate metals of different types from each other in manner to prevent electrolysis between
the two materials.
B. When aluminum surfaces come in contact with incompatible metals, keep aluminum
surfaces from direct contact with such metals by (1) painting dissimilar metal with a prime
coat of zinc-chromate pdmer or suitable protective coating, exclude those containing lead
pigmentation; (2) painting the dissimilar metal with a coating of heavy-bodied bituminous
paint; (3) a good quality caulking placed between aluminum and dissimilar metal; or (4) a
non-absorptive tape or gasket. Steel anchors and connecting members may be hot dip
galvanized or zinc plated after fabrication.
C. Paint dissimilar metals if used in locations where drainage from them passes over aluminum.
D. Paint aluminum surfaces in contact with lime, mortar, concrete, plaster, or other'masonry
materials with alkaline-resistant coatings such as heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500 - 2
3.05 SHOP PAINTING:
_ A. Clean surfaces of loose scale, rust, oil, dirt and other foreign matter, immediately prior to
painting.
B. Prior to application of prime coat of paint, structural steel surfaces that will be exposed in
' completed work shall be prepared to receive paint in accordance with Specifications of Steel
Structures Painting Council (SSPC) described as Power Tool Cleaning and Solvent Cleaning.
_ ~, C. Give all surfaces a full-bodied shop coat of paint, except those to be galvanized, field welded
or embedded in concrete. Give surfaces that are to be field welded a protective coating of
linseed oil at shop. Surfaces that will be inaccessible after erection shall have one additional
coat of paint of different color than first coat.
D. After erection is complete, touch up parts where paint has rubbed off, and paint exposed
parts of welds, bolts, washers and nuts using same type paint used for shop coat.
' E. Leave the entire work in proper condition to receive final field painting which will be executed
as part of work of another section of these project specifications.
-- 3.06 CLEANUP: At completion, remove from site all debris and excess materials resulting from execution
of work of this section.
END OF SECTION
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500 - 3
SECTION 06100
-- ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART '1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork.
B. Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork.
C. Section 09900 - Painting.
1.02 CERTIFICATES:
~ A. Furnish Architect with certificate from lumber treatment company certifying treatment type,
amount, moisture percentage after kiln drying.
1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Upon delivery to the site, place materials in an area protected from the weather.
B. Store six (6") inches above ground and cover with waterproof paper and allow adequate air
circulation or ventilation.
C. All lumber shall be inspected by Architect upon delivery to the site, before any installation of
-- materials.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 LUMBER:
A. No. 2 Douglas Fir or Southern Pine, surfaced dry, with the following structural properties:
Min. allowable bending stress (Fb) ....................... 1,400 psi
Min. allowable compressive strength (Fc) ................. 1,000 psi
Min. modulus of elasticity (E) ....................... 1,500,000 psi
"' Maximum moisture content ................................ 19%
B. All lumber shall be free of fungus, mildew, dry rot, and defects.
2.02 TREATED LUMBER: One of the following methods:
A. 5% by weight pentachlorophenol, by vacuum.
B. Osmose K-33.
- C. Wolmanized, redried to 19% maximum moisture content, stamped "DRY."
2.03 PLYWOOD ROOF DECK: APA rated sheathing, Exp. 1, C, DX plywood.
-- 2.04 TEXTURED PLYWOOD CEILINGS AND SOFFITS: APA texture 1-11, %" thick. C.A. Douglas Fir,
grooves at 4" o.c.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-1
2.05 ROUGH HARDWARE: Provide all nuts, bolts, washers, expansion shields, lag screws and bolts,
toggle bolts, screws, joist hangers, etc., for the proper execution of all rough carpentry. Fasteners
used with exterior cedar shall be non-corrosive.
2.06 ROUGH SAWN LUMBER: Rough sawn lumber shall be #2 or better Douglas Fir.
2.07 INSECT SCREEN WIRE: Galvanized mesh.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 TREATED WOOD: Treated wood shall be used in the following locations.
A. Where used in contact with the ground, concrete, masonry, stucco or steel,
B. When used for sills, cant strips, blocking, gravel stops, nailers and bucks,
3.02 PLYWOOD ROOF DECK:
A. Install with the long dimension of the panel across supports, and with panel continuous over
two or more spans.
B. Provide suitable edge supports by use of lumber blocking between rafters or by APA
approved panel clips.
C. Stagger panel end joints. Panel end joints shall occur over framing.
D. Allow 1/a" spacing at panel ends and ¼" at panel edges unless otherwise recommended by
panel manufacturer.
E. Nail at 6" o.c. and panel edges and at 12" o.c. at intermediate supports. Use 6d common
nails for %" panels.
3.03 GROUNDS: Provide treated permanent wood grounds and temporary wood grounds as required for
proper execution of work of all trades. Remove temporary grounds when they are no longer required.
END OF SECTION
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 2
SECTION 06400
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART I, GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry.
B. Section 09900 - Painting.
1.02 QUALITY STANDARDS: Fabrication and installation of finish carpentry shall conform to quality
standards of the Architectural Woodwork Industry (AWl).
1.03 FABRICATORS QUALIFICATIONS: Architect reserves the right to approve or disapprove
Architectural Woodwork fabricator. Fabricator shall have reputation for doing quality work and shall
have successfully completed comparable work.
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS: Shop drawings of architectural woodwork shall show installed location of items
furnished, detail of joints, species of each item, hardware, etc. All dimensions shall be field measured
before fabrication is begun.
1.05 SAMPLES: Furnish complete line of plastic laminate for color finish selection.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: Deliver, store and handle wood cabinets in manner to
prevent damage. Defer delivery to the job until the installation and storage areas are complete and
dry of wet-type construction. Protect all surfaces of cabinets subject to damage while in transit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 QUAL~TYGRADE:Materia~sandfabricati~nsha~~becust~mgradef~rtransparentandpaintedfinish~
and premium grade for plastic laminate work in accordance with "Quality Standards Illustrated" of the
Architectural Wood Institute, 1962 Edition, Revised 1966 and 1968.
2.02 MATERIALS:
A. Exposed Solid Wood for Paint Finish: Clear, white pine, birch, ash or magnolia.
B. Exposed Plywood for Paint Finish:
1. Both Sides Exposed: Group I, birch or ash, A-A, INT., sanded both sides.
2. One Side Exposed: Group I, birch or ash, A-D, INT., sanded one side.
C. Particle Board: 45 Ib./cu. ~. density, factory filled, smooth.
D. Adhesive: Type II, CS 36-61.
E. Plastic Laminate: Nevamar ARP Surface, high pressure laminated plastic, GP grade, solid
color as selected by Architect.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
4017 06400-1
2.03 CABINET AND COUNTER HARDWARE SETS:
A. Each hinged door to have: --
1 pair hinges Stanley 35 x US 26D
1 catch Stanley No. 46
I pull Stanley 448 x US 26D
B. Each drawer to have:
I pull Stanley 4484 x US 26D
1 set drawer slides Knape & Vogt 1300
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WORKMANSHIP: All architectural woodwork shall conform to the custom grade requirements of the
AWl Quality Standards.
3.02 GENERAL:
A. Construct built-up items with glued-up joints, as well as the use of other mechanical
fasteners.
B, Kerf back of wide flat members.
C. Fit and scribe all work to adjacent materials.
END OF SECTION
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06400 - 2
SECTION 07150
~ LIQUID WATER REPELLENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK ELSEWHERE:
A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry.
B. Section 09900 - Painting.
1.02 DEFINITION: "One coat" shall be one mist coat and one flood coat.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
,- A. Qualification of Applicator: Minimum of two (2) years experience.
B. Mock-up:
-- 1. Apply liquid water repellent to approximately 100 square feet substrate material
which matches actual job conditions.
-- 2. Verify that substrate is coated with sufficient water repellent to effectively repel
moisture from surface.
3. Verify that application of water repellent materials to substrate material will provide
no surface stains·
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit manufacturers literature specifications and application instructions forwater repellent
materials.
- B. Certificate: Submit manufacturers certificate of conformance.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: Deliver materials in original sealed containers,
clearly marked with manufacturers name, brand name, and type of material.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS:
_ A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Do not proceed with application of materials when ambient temperature is less than
50 degrees F.
2. Do not apply water repellent in rainy conditions or within three days after surfaces
become wet from rainfall or other moisture.
3. Do not apply materials when low temperature of 40 degrees F. or less is predicted
within a period of 24 hours after applications.
LIQUID WATER REPELLENT
07150 - 1
B. Protection:
1. Protect plants and vegetation which might be affected by water repellent fumes or
alkalinity of the materials.
2. Protect adjacent surfaces of aluminum and glass.
1.07 SCHEDULING: Architect shall be notified not less than 24 hours before each water repellent
application is scheduled. Failure to notify Architect will be cause for re-application of water repellent
at no additional expense to Owner
1.08 GUARANTEE: Contractor, applicator and materials manufacturer shall jointly guarantee that all
surfaces treated shall prevent leakage or seepage of water for 5 years from date of application.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 WATER REPELLENT FOR EXTERIOR MASONRY: Clear Prime-A-Pell by Chemprobe.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION: Examine surfaces to receive water repellent treatment to assure conditions are
satisfactory for application of materials.
3.02 PREPARATION: Clean surfaces to remove dust, dirt, oil, wax and other foreign materials in
accordance with water repellent manufacturer's instructions.
3,03 APPLICATION:
A. Masonry: Apply water repellent to all exterior masonry. Apply with a low pressure airless
spray. Water repellent shall be applied in its concentrated solution only. Application shall
begin at the top of a wall and shall not move downward until treatment totally wets the surface
being treated. Apply enough water repellent to thoroughly wet the wall but not too excessive
to run down.
B. Brush apply water repellent only at locations where overspray wou Id affect adjacent materials
and where not practicable for spray application.
C. Start application at top of wall and work down surfaces, keeping a wet edge at all times.
D. Avoid letting water repellent dry between passes.
3.04 ADJUST AND CLEAN: Clean spillage and overspray from adjacent surfaces as recommended by
water repellent manufacturer.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Spray Test: After water repellents have dried, spray coat surfaces with water.
B. Recoat surfaces that show water absorption.
3.06 CLEANUP: At completion, remove from site all excess materials, debris and rubbish from the work.
END OF SECTION
LIQUID WATER REPELLENT
,o17 07150 - 2
SECTION 07400
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE: All labor, materials, services, and equipment necessary to complete the installation of
roofing work as indicated on drawings and specified in this Section.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry.
B. Section 10200 - Louvers and Vents.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit samples of roof panels with manufacturer's literature.
B. Detail shop drawings, indicating gauges, profiles, fasteners, flashing details, fastener types
and locations.
1.04 WARRANTIES:
A. Manufacturer's Product Warranty:
1. Manufacturer's standard warranty for 20 years, following delivery date that under
normal usage panels will not rupture, fail structurally, or perforate due to corrosion.
2. Paint System shall have a warranty for 20 years against peeling and blistering.
B. A two year weather-tightness is required from panel applicator.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Applicator shall have at least two (2) years experience applying these types of materials with
successful completion of projects of similar scope.
B. Competent and skilled sheet metal applicators shall be familiar with manufacturer's standard
details, and recommendations.
1.04 DELIVERY:
A. Delivery of material shall be made only after suitable facilities for its storage and protection
are available on the site.
B. Upon receipt of preformed metal panels, flat sheets, flashings and panel accessories;
installer shall examine each shipment for damage and for completeness of the consignment.
1.05 STORAGE:
A. Store materials out of the weather in a clean dry place. One end of each container shall be
slightly elevated to allow any moisture to run off.
B. Panels and/or flashings with stdppable film shall not be stored in areas exposed to sunlight.
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING
07400 - 1
C. Care shall be taken to prevent contact with any substance which may cause a discoloration
in finish during storage.
D. Store materials to provide ventilation and prevent bending, abrasion, or twisting.
1.05 HANDLING:
A. Care shall be taken to avoid 9ougin9, scratching, or denting.
B. Do not allow traffic on completed roof. If required, provide cushioned walk boards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER: Manufacturer shall be AEP-SPAN or approved equal.
2.02 MATERIALS:
A. Profile shall be High Seam, PG 10-11 HS panel.
B. Panel shall be HS20, 20 inches wide, 24 gauge, with 1-1/2 inches high rib.
C. Finish shall be KYNAR 500, color as selected by Architect/Owner.
D. Flashings, Closures, Trim, etc., fabricate of same materials, gauge and finish as adjacent
panels.
E. Fasteners shall be as per manufacturer's recommendations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONNECTING WORK: The applicator shall examine surfaces on which his work is to be applied,
and shall notify the Architect in writing if not suitable to receive his work. Work on any surface shall
constitute acceptance of this surface by the installer.
3.02 FIELD MEASUREMENTS: Take field measurements to verify or supplement dimensions indicated
prior to fabrication of metal panels.
3.03 INSTALLATION:
A. Workmanship shall conform to standards set forth in the architectural sheet metal manual
as published by SMACNA.
B. Panels shall be installed in such a manner that, horizontal lines are true and level, and
vertical lines are plumb.
C. All starter and edge fiashings shall be installed prior to panels. . -.
D. Do not allow panels or trim to come into contact with dissimilar materials.
3.04 TOUCH-UP: Only minor scratches and abrasions will be allowed to be touched up. Any other
damaged material shall be replaced.
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING
4017 07400 - 2
3.05 CLEAN-UP:
A. Leave work areas clean, free from grease, finger marks and stains.
B. Remove scrap and debris from surrounding areas and grounds.
END OF SECTION
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING
07400 - 3
SECTION 07920
CAULKING AND SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DEFINITIONS:
A. The term "sealant" or "sealing" shall refer to exterior joints exposed to weather or interior
joints exposed to moisture. When "sealant" is used in an outside joint in aluminum or steel
frames, "sealant" shall be required on the inside joint also.
B. The term "caulk" or "caulking" (calking) shall refer to interior joints not normally exposed to
weather or moisture conditions.
1.02 SUBMITTAL:
A. Submit to Architect manufacturer's literature, specification data, and color chart for all
materials proposed for this project.
B. Identify their use and location.
1.03 GUARANTEE: General Contractor, subcontractor and product manufacturer shall jointly guarantee
the work against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of five (5) years from date of
Substantial Completion.
A. Repair and/or replace such defective work, and other work damaged thereby, which
becomes defective during guarantee pedod without additional cost to the Owner.
B. This guarantee will not apply to defects caused by failure of work of other trades, if such
defects were impossible to detect at time of installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SEALANTS: As manufactured by Pecora or approved equal.
A. Aluminum Storefront-to-Masonry: 60+ Unicrylic.
B. Concrete-to-Concrete (Horizontal Joint): NR-201 with primer.
C. Masonry-to-Masonry Vertical: Dynatrol II.
D. Thresholds and Sills: BC-158 Butyl Rubber.
E. Interior Caulking: AC-20 Acrylic Latex.
2.02 PRIMERS: Type as manufactured by manufacturer of sealing or caulking material and completely
compatible with compound.
2.03 JOINT BACKING: Rods or tape in sizes and types as recommended by manufacturer of sealing or
caulking material, and completely compatible with compound.
CAULKING AND SEALANTS
07920-1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL:
A. Work shall be performed by experienced mechanics skilled in execution of type of work
required and in application of specified materials.
B. Deliver materials to job site in manufacturer's name and brand clearly marked thereon.
C. When perimeter joints around frames that are to be caulked do not have built-in stops or
other means to prevent depth of compound from exceeding % inch, pack joint with back-up
materials of correct type and to the depth as necessary to provide minimum %" and
maximum %" depth of compound.
D. Materials and methods shall be as specified herein, unless they are contrary to approved
manufacturer's directions or to approved trade practice; or unless Contractor believes they
will not produce a watertight job which he will guarantee as required. Where any part of these
conditions occur, Contractor shall notify Architect in writing. Deviation from procedure
specified will be permitted only upon Architect's approval and providing that work is
guaranteed by Contractor as specified.
E. If, prior to beginning work, Contractor,does not notify Architect in writing of any proposed
changes, it will be assumed that he agrees that materials and methods specified will produce
results desired, and that he will furnish required guarantee.
3.02 PREPARATORY WORK:
A. Where weather molds, staff beads, etc., do not form integral part of frames to be caulked,
but are removable, remove same priorto caulking, execute caulking, replace molds, etc., and
point.
B. Clean all joints, etc., that are to be caulked or sealed, prior to executing work.
3.03 PRIMING: When conditions of joints so require, or when types of materials used adjacent to joints
so require, or when compound manufacturers recommendations so require, clean and prime joints
before starting caulking. Execute priming operations in strict accordance with manufacturer's
directions.
3.04 JOINT BACKING: Joint backing shall be installed in all joints to receive sealants. Backing shall be
sized to require 20% to 50% compression upon insertion, and shall be placed so that sealant depth
is approximately % joint width. In joints not of sufficient depth to allow backing, install bond breaking
tape at back of joint.
3.05 APPLICATION: Apply sealant and caulking material under pressure to fill joint completely, allowing
no air pockets or voids. Tool the joint surface to compress the compound into the joint.
3.06 THRESHOLDS AND STOREFRONT SILLS: Place all exterior door thresholds and storefront sills in
a fill bed of sealant during setting procedures.
3.07 CLEANING: Clean adjacent surfaces free of caulking and sealant and clean all work of other trades
that has in any way been soiled by these operations. Finished work shall be left in a neat and clean
condition.
END OF SECTION
CAULKING AND SEALANTS
07920 - 2
SECTION 08110
-- METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK ELSEWHERE:
A. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware.
B. Section 08730 - Weatherstripping and Thresholds.
. C. Section 09900 - Painting.
1,02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER: Metal doors and frames shall be manufactured by one of the
following:
A. Amweld.
B. Fenestra,
C. Republic Steel Corp.
_ D. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co.
1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Contract Conditions, covering each
type of door and frame, frame conditions, and complete anchorage details, door and frame elevation.
--- supplemented by suitable schedules covering doors and frames. Indicate location of each unit in
project.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver, store and handle hollow metal doors and frames in a manner to prevent damage and
deterioration.
B. Follow recommended storage and handling requirements of manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DOORS:
~ A. Non-Label Doors: Shall be flush seamless, Series 1500, Amweld full flush, supercore doors,
as manufactured by Amweld Metal Doors and Frames.
B. Doors shall be fabricated from two (2) sheets of No. 16 gauge steel with no visible seams on
' either face.
C. Welds at 2" on center around perimeter of door.
D. Tops and bottoms shall be closed with No. 16 gauge steel channels.
E. Tops of doors shall be sealed flush to exclude water.
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08110 - 1
4017
2.02 FRAMES:
A. Non-Label: Frames shall be 14 gauge, Areweld, Series 400, pressed steel and be of profiles
as detailed.
B. Corners and connections shall be mitered and welded with welds ground smooth. Steel
spreaders shall be furnished to insure parallel alignment of jambs.
C. Anchors:
1. Provide an anchor at each jamb for each 2'-6" of door height or a fraction thereof,
minimum of three per jamb.
2. Vary anchor types to provide positive fastening to adjacent construction.
3. Secure metal clip angle at bottom of each jamb member for anchoring to floor, with
a minimum of two (2) fasteners.
2.03 FINISH:
A. Door and frames shall be leveled and ground smooth.
B. Apply mineral filler to eliminate weld scars and other blemishes.
C. Give factory coat of rust-inhibitive metal primer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF FRAMES:
A. Exercise care in setting of frames to maintain schedule dimensions, hold head level and
maintain jambs plumb and square.
B. Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction.
C. Wherever possible, leave frame spreader bars intact until frames are set perfectly square
and plumb, and anchors are securely attached.
D. Allow for expansion movement as required.
3.02 PREPARATION FOR FINISH HARDWARE:
A. Prepare doors and frames to receive hardware:
1. Hardware supplier shall furnish hollow metal manufacturer-approved hardware
schedule, hardware templates and samples of physical hardware where necessary
to insure correct fitting and installation.
2. Preparation includes sinkages and cut outs for mortise and concealed hardware.
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08110 - 2
B. Provide reinforcements for both concealed and surface applied hardware:
1. Drill and tap mortise reinforcement at factory, usin9 templates.
2o Install reinforcements with concealed connections designed to develop full strength
of reinforcements.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF DOORS:
A. Apply hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's templates and instructions.
B. Adjust operahie parts for correct function.
C. Remove hardware, with the exception of prime-coated items, tag, box and re-install after
finish paint work is completed,
3.04 PRIME COAT TOUCH-UP:
A. Immediately after erection, areas where prime coat has been damaged shall be sanded
smooth and touched up with same primer as applied at shop.
B. Remove rust before above specified touch-up is applied.
C. Touch-up shall not be obvious.
D. Protect installed hollow metal work against damage from other construction work.
END OF SECTION
· ~:~ METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08110 - 3
4017
SECTION 08334
ROLLING COUNTER DOORS
PART '1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. All of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and
Division I General Requirements, apply to the work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. The work of this Section includes rolling counter doors.
B. Related Sections: Other specification sections which directly relate to the work of th is Section
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each type
of rolling counter door. Include both published data and any specific data prepared for this
project.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for approval prior to fabrication. Include detailed
plans, elevations, details of framing members, required clearances, anchors, and
accessories. Include relationship with adjacent materials.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Rolling counter doors shall be manufactured by a firm with a minimum of five
years experience in the fabrication and installation of rolling counter doors. Manufacturers
proposed for use, which are not named in these specifications, shall submit evidence of
ability to meet performance and fabrication requirements specified, and include a list of five
projects of similar design and complexity completed within the past five years.
B. Installer: Installation of rolling counter doors shall be performed by an authorized
representative of the manufacturer.
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide doors, guides, motors, and related primary
components from one manufacturer for each type of door. Provide secondary components
from source acceptable to manufacturer of primary components.
D. Pre-lnstallation Conference: Schedule and convene a pre-installation conference just prior
to commencement of field operations, to establish procedures to maintain optimum working
conditions and to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials and products in labeled protective packages. Store and handle in strict
compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Protect from damage
from weather, excessive temperatures and construction operations.
ROLLING COUNTER DOORS
4017 08334 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A. Provide rolling counter doors by Overhead Door Corporation, Pennsylvania Division; (800)
929-2553 or (717) 248-0131; Fax (800) 929-1274.
2.02 COUNTER DOORS
A. Trade Reference: 650 Series Counter Doors by Overhead Door Corporation.
B. Curtalp: Interlocking slats, Type F-128 fabricated of galvanized steel. Endlocks shall be
attached to alternate slats to maintain curtain alignment and prevent lateral slat movement.
C. Finish: Slats and hood shall be galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A 525 and receive
rust-inhibitive, roll coating process, including bonderizing, 0.2 mils thick baked-on prime paint,
and 0.6 mils thick baked-on polyester powder coated top coat. Non-galvanized exposed
ferrous surfaces shall receive one coat of rust-inhibitive primer.
D. Color: Gray polyester top coat. Powder coating finish in color as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's standard colors.
E. Bottom Bar: Single galvanized steel angle bottom bar with weatherstrip. Tubular locking
bottom bar.
F. Guides: Powder coated steel shapes.
G. Brackets: Steel plate to support counterbalance, curtain and hood,
H. Counterbalance: Helical torsion spring type housed in a steel tube or pipe barrel.
I. Hood: Galvanized primed steel hood. Provide intermediate support brackets as required.
J. Manual Operation: Manual push up.
K. Locking: Slide bolt locks suitable for use with padlock.
L. Wall Mounting Condition: Between jambs mounting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Take field dimensions and examine conditions of substrates, supports. and other conditions
under which this work is to be performed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory
conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Strictly comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.
Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances and allow for
maintenance.
B. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper operating procedures and maintenance schedule.
ROLLING COUNTER DOORS
08334 - 2
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Test rolling counter doors for proper operation and adjust as necessary to provide proper
operation without binding or distortion.
B. Touch-up damaged coatings and finishes and repair minor damage, Clean exposed surfaces
using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of material or
product being cleaned,
END OF SECTION
ROLLING COUNTER DOORS
08334 - 3
SECTION 08625
TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, and services to install tubular skylight system and
related components as shown on drawings and specified herein.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM B209 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate.
B. ASTM D635 - Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of self-
supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position.
C. ASTM D1929 - Test Method for Ignition Properties of Plastics.
D. ASTM D2843 - Test Method for Density of Smoke from the Burning of Decomposition of
Plastics.
E. ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors.
F. ASTM E331 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain walls and
Doors by Static Air Pressure Difference.
G. UL 181 - Factory Made Air Ducts and Connectors
H. UL 746C - Polymeric Materials Used in Electrical Equipment Evaluation.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General
1. Provide certified independent laboratory test reports.
2. Provide tubular skylight system, which maintains U. L. (Underwriters
Laboratories) listing.
3. Provide tubular skylight system which has been evaluated and approved by ICBO
and maintains a current Evaluation Report.
4. Deliver units to job in as pre-assembled manner as possible. Bottom tube and
diffuser ring assembly shall be by manufacturer.
B. Test Units
1. Perform all tests unless otherwise noted per reference standards on unit size(s)
which will be incorporated in the project.
TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS
4o17 08625 - 1
C. Test Procedures
1. Air Infiltration Test
a. Air infiltration maximum 0.10 cfm per foot of crack length at 6.24 psf
pressure differential when tested in accordance with ASTM E283.
2. Water Resistance Test
a. No uncontrolled water leakage at 6.00 psf pressure differential with water
rate of 5 gallons/hour/s.f. when tested in accordance with ASTM E331.
3. Uniform Load Deflection Test
a. No breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, or
damages to make tubular skylight inoperable at both a positive and a
negative load of 146.8 psf. All tests shall be in accordance with ASTM
E330.
Reference Note: Design wind pressures are obtained from ANSI A58.1,
local building codes or specified boundary layer wind tunnel data.
4. Uniform Load Structural Test
a. Unit to be tested at 3 X positive wind and 2 X negative wind pressure
design wind pressure, acting normal to plane of roof in accordance with
ASTM E330.
b. No breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, or
damage to make tubular skylight inoperable or permanent deflection of
any section in excess of 0.2 % of its span.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings/Samples
1. Shop drawings complete and full scale (where practical) showing construction of
all components dimensions and details.
2. Samples of product as requested by the Architect.
B. Test Reports/Calculations
1. Certified independent laboratory test reports verifying compliance with all test
requirements of Section 1.03.
1.06 GUARANTEE
A. Tubular Skylight and Related Materials
1. Ten-year guarantee on materials and workmanship from the Manufacturer. One-
year guarantee from the installer for materials and labor.
TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS
08625 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Brighten-Up Series - 10" diameter model as manufactured by:
Totally Tubular Lighting
1115 N. Windomere Ave.
Dallas, TX 75208
(972) 263-6033
is approved for use and is the design standard.
1. Other manufacturers may be acceptable subject to full compliance with Section
1.03, and all other requirements of this specification.
B. Manufacturers shall have been engaged in the manufacture of tubular skylights for a
period of not less than ten years.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Roof Dome:
1. Injection molded polycarbonate classified as CG1 material. Thickness shall be
not less than 0.125". Visible light transmission shall be 92 percent or greater.
Acrylic dome shall be approved in non-UL applications provided it meets
characteristics of Duradome 10 (i.e. DR101 blend). Roof dome shall contain
Raybender Technology, a series of concentric, light refracting etched lines a
minimum of 2" high to improve light input when sun is low on horizon.
B. Ceiling Diffuser:
1. Injection molded, acrylic plastic classified as CC2 Plexiglas. Thickness shall be
not less than 0.087". Provide special prismatic design to maximize light output.
C. Roof Flashing:
1. Roof flashings shall be manufactured in a single piece without seams, joints or
welds. Select flashing from manufacturer's standard options to suit job site
conditions:
Aluminized Steel - pitched for:
Composite or Asphalt Shingle - between 3:12 to 8:12
Cedar Or Shake Shingle-between 3:12 to 8:12
Cement Tile - between 3:12 to 8:12
Aluminized Steel - no pitch for:
Roofs with: 0:12 - 3:12 roof slope
6" high spun aluminum, .060 inch thick A93003 for:
Flat Roof- between 0:12 and 1:12 & problem drainage area.
Use factory supplied flashing adapters/extensions for pitches greater than 8:12
TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS
08625 - 3
D. Main Tube and Reflector:
1. Fabricate from Aluminum sheet meeting the requirements of ASTM B209, alloy _
and temper as required by the manufacturer to suit forming operations and finish
requirements, .020 inch thick.
2. Finish - Provide exposed aluminum surface with high polished specular finish '
meeting AAMA designation M21 C31A31. Reflective surface to be Spectralight
2000 or equal. Specular reflectance to be 92 percent and total reflectance to be
95 percent,
E. Accessories:
1. Dress Ring to be 30 percent talc filled polypropylene or high impact ABS. --
2. Sealant - Polyurethane or copolymer - based elastomeric sealant - use type
provided or recommended by the manufacturer.
3. Seals: Weather seal - Medium density pile weatherstripping and light density
polyvinyl chloride foam tape or UV resistant EPDM rubber. Ceiling Diffuser seal -
Closed cell polyethylene foam, 3 pounds per cubic foot, and white polyvinyl _
chloride seal butt joint welded or EPDM rubber.
4. Fasteners shall be same as metals being fastened or non-magnetic stainless
steel or other non-corrosive metal as recommended by the manufacturer.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Finish, fabricate and shop prepare all assemblies under responsibility of one
manufacturer. --.
2. Fabricate to allow for thermal movement of materials when subject to a
temperature differential from - 30 degrees F to +180 degrees F._
3. Provision shall be made to insure that water will not accumulate and remain in
contact within system components.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install tubular skylights in accordance with manufacturers printed installation instructions.
B. Installer to be factory trained and/or certified by the manufacturer prior to commencement --
of installation.
C. After installation of first unit - conduct field check to determine compliance with specified
requirements. Water test in presence of Owners Representative or Architect or Contractor
Representative. Correct any deficiencies prior to commencing with subsequent units.
END OF SECTION
TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS
08625 - 4
SECTION 08710
-- FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Section 08110 - Hollow Metal Doors.
B. Section 08735 - Weatherstripping and Thresholds.
1.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Items of other manufacturers will be acceptable for substitution
-- provided they meet the quality standards of this specification for finish, function and grade. The
following were used in the preparation of this schedule:
_ A. H = Hager.
B. Tr = Trimco.
-- C. T = Trego.
D. S = Sargent.
E. B = Best.
1.03 SAMPLES: Furnish one sample of each item required, if requested. After samples are approved by
-- Architect, they will be retained in the Architect's office for the purpose of checking with hardware
furnished for work and then used in the work if so arranged by the Contractor.
1.04 SCHEDULE: Furnish six (6) complete finish hardware schedules to conform with the hangs, bevel,
' door thickness, swing, etc., to obtain perfect operation of all members. Provide operation of all
members. Provide approved schedule in quantity as required by other trades. Prepared schedule
with doors grouped under heading number and all hardware subsequently delivered to site for
_. installation shall be numbered in accordance with these hardware headings. Furnish manufacturer's
catalog sheet on each item included in the schedule.
1.05 HANDLING OF MATERIALS: Upon delivery of hardware to job, Contractor shall sign for, receive and
' be responsible for same until completion of the project.
1.06 HANDICAP REQUIREMENTS: Applicable hardware shall comply with the standards of the State
_._ Purchasing and General Service Commission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SEE SCHEDULE.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL: All hardware shall be fitted in a thorough workmanlike manner. All locks to be fitted and
removed before painting or finishing and replaced after painting is complete.
-- A. Fastenings: Hardware shall be complete with all necessary screws, bolts, anchors, or other
fastenings for proper application. Such fastenings shall be of suitable size and type, and
shall harmonize with hardware as to material and finish.
FINISH HARDWARE
08710-1
B. Typically, all exposed hardware shall have anodized finish. Closers to be sprayed enamel
to match adjacent hardware finish. Butts to have finish.
3.02 INSTALLATION: The General Contractor shall install all finishing hardware. All butts, locks, plates,
strikes, etc., shall be neatly and accurately mortised flush, properly placed and accurately aligned to
smooth and quiet operation without sticking, binding, hanging or rattling. All doors shall be hung with
equal clearance at jambs and heads. Adjust all hardware properly and leave in smooth operating '*
condition. The following dimensions shall be used in installation of hardware.
A. Distance from floor to centerline of doorknob - 40-5/16".
B. Distance from floor to centerline of lower base on door pulls - 45".
C. Distance from edge of door to centerline of dead lock strike - 60". _
D. Distance from floor to center of dead lock strike - 60".
E. Any other installation location in question shall be in accordance with NBHA recommended '
standards.
3.03 TEMPLATES: Hardware supplier shall furnish templates as they are required and shall deliver such
hardware as may be necessary for the various trades to install. All templates shall be clearly marked
as to their respective heading number and shall give full instructions as to installation, screws, full
product dimension and other pertinent details affecting their operation.
3.04 KEYING:
A. Two keys will be furnished with each lock identified with fiber key tags. _
B. Ten master keys will be furnished.
C. Master keys will be delivered only to the Owner or Owner's Representative and a signed
receipt obtained.
D. Refer to door schedule for doors not to be master-keyed. -,
3.05 SCHEDULE: Refer to Allowance.
END OF SECTION
FINISH HARDWARE
08710 - 2
SECTION 08730
WEATHERSTRIPPING AND THRESHOLDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Section 07920 - Sealants and Caulking.
B. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware.
1.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Itemsofothermanufacturerswillbeacceptableforsubstitution
provided they meet the quality standards of this specification for finish, function and grade.
1.03 SAMPLES: Furnish a 12" length of each item specified. Sample shall show the complete color and
finish range of the proposed item.
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SCHEDULES: Furnish shop drawings, schedules and manufacturer's
literature on all items furnished under this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 THRESHOLD: Shall extend the full width of openings.
A. Type "A": Pemko 2OO-5AV.
B. Type "B": Pemko 154 A.
2.02 WEATHERSTRIPPING: Continuous on both jambs and overhead. Pemko Weatherstripping Tape,
sponge vinyl (PVC), closed cell (adhesive) tape.
2.03 ASTRAGALS: Pemko 375 AR.
2.04 DOOR BOTTOM: Pemko 315 AN.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION: Install all weatherstripping and threshold level, square and in proper alignment and
relationship to surfaces to be sealed. Attachment shall be with appropriate nails, screws, bolts and/or
anchors or corresponding materials to properly attach weatherstripping and thresholds to subsurface.
Notch all thresholds around stops and set in sealant bed as specified in Section 07951.
3.02 ADJUST WEATHERSTRIPPING: Adjust all weatherstripping to ensure a weathertight seal all
around.
END OF SECTION
WEATHERSTRIPPING AND THRESHOLDS
08730-1
SECTION 08810
GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Section 07951 - Caulking and Sealants.
1.02 QUALITY CRITERIA:
A. Federal Specification DD-G-451c.
B. FGMA Glazing Manual.
C. Federal Specification DD-M-441.
D. Federal Specification DD-G-1403.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: Deliver all glass materials to site in such manner that will
protect glass from weather and breakage.
1 °04 PROTECTION: After installation of glass and before final cleaning, adequately mark glass to identify
that the opening is glazed. Tape not allowed.
1.05 REPLACEMENT: All glass shall be free from cracks, scratches and other defects. Contractor shall
replace all broken or damaged glass before Owner's final acceptance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 TYPES OF GLASS: Glass shall be tempered as shown on drawings or as required to meet building
code requirements.
A. Glazing Compound: Channel Glazing Compound M-251 as manufactured by Pecora
Chemical Corporation.
B. Glazing Tape: Butyl Rubber Tape as manufactured by Pecora.
C. Putty: Shall meet or exceed Federal Specification TT-P-791a.
D. Accessories: All glazing clips, all wood, lead and neoprene shims, zinc paints, or other
accessories necessary for a complete glazing job.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION: Before glazing work begins, inspect the frames for the following. Glazing will not
proceed until glazing contractor is satisfied that frames and stops are in proper condition.
A. Sash and frames are to be firmly anchored in proper position, plumb and square within 1/8"
of nominal dimension or approved shop drawings.
B. All corners and fabrication intersections are sealed and sash and frames are watertight.
C. All sash members shall be free of grease, lacquer and mortar.
GLAZING
08810 - 1
D. Check dimensions of openings to be sure that adequate clearances are maintained on all
four edges at perimeter.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. No attempt shall be made to change the size of heat strengthened or tempered glass after
they leave the factory.
B. Center glass in glazin9 rabbet to maintain recommended clearance at perimeter on all four
sides. Neoprene settin9 blocks shall be placed at quarter points and shall be chosen to limit
the load from the 91ass weight to 15 pounds per square inch and in no case shorter than 4
inches
3.03 CLEANING: Remove all excess putty or compound smears.
END OF SECTION
GLAZING
08810 - 2
SECTION 09800
-- SPECIAL COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The conditions of contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
" 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Apply special coating to the floor of the rest rooms and concession areas.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
-- 2.01 SPECIAL COATING:
A. Special coating shall be STOP-SLIP-HD as manufactured by Garon, telephone 1-800-631-
5380 or approved equal.
B. Color shall be gray.
-- PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
" A. Inspect concrete floor and repair or correct any defects.
B. Install special coating as per manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
SPECIAL COATINGS
09800 - 1
SECTION 09860
GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK ELSEWHERE:
A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry.
1.02 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver sealed containers with manufacturer's label, legible and intact.
B. Storage of Materials: 1. Store only acceptable project materials onsite.
2. Store in a suitable location.
3. Comply with health and fire regulations.
1.03 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Environmental Requirements:. 1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations as to environmental conditions under
which coatings and coating systems can be applied.
2. Do not apply finish in areas where dust is being generated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Graffiti Resistant Coating: Coating as manufactured and supplied by SeaI-Kete, Inc. Contact
1-800-323-7357 or 941-967-1535.
B. Items of other manufacturers will be acceptable for substitution provided they meet the quality
standards of this specification for finish, function and grad.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION:
A. Apply by brush, roller or spray equipment.
B. Examine the areas and conditions under which work this section will be performed. Correct
conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
C. Apply coating as per manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS
4017 09860-1
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Include on label of containers:
1. Manufacturer°s name.
-- 2. Type of paint.
3. Manufacturer's stock number.
4. Color,
5. Instructions for reducing, where applicable.
B. Field Quality Control:
1. Request review of first finished room space or item of each color scheme required
' by Architect for color, texture and workmanship.
2. Use first acceptable room, space or item as project standard for color scheme.
3. For spray application, paint surface not smaller than 100 square feet as project
standard.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. Prepare color/texture sample on each type of surface to be painted.
B. Prepare stained wood samples on type and quality of wood specified for use on project.
C. Make samples not less than 12 inches square.
D. Submit in duplicate.
1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver sealed containers with manufacturer's label, legible and intact,
B. Storage of Materials:
1. Store only acceptable project materials on project site.
2. Store in a suitable location.
3. Restrict storage to paint materials and related equipment.
4. Comply with health and fire regulations.
PAINTING
09900 - 1
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Complywith manufacturer's recommendations as to environmental conditions under
which coatings and coating systems can be applied.
2. Do not apply finish in areas where dust is being generated.
B. Protection: Cover or otherwise protect finished work or other trades and surfaces not being
painted concurrently or not to be painted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Except as otherwise specified, the only acceptable materials shall be the products
manufacturers:
1. P.P.G. Industries.
2, Sherwin-Williams.
3. Pratt Lambert.
4. Cook.
B. Notwithstanding any reference in the specifications to any article, device, product, material,
fixture, form or type of construction as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be
construed as limiting competition; and the contractor, in such cases, may at his option use
any article, device, produce, material, fixture, form or type of construction which in the
judgment of the Architect expressed in writing is equal to that specified.
C, Materials selected for coating systems for each type surface shall be product of a single
manufacturer.
2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS:
A. Submit substitute paint schedule, listing all surfaces and proposed products.
B. Obtain approval by Architect prior to purchase and delivery in writing.
2.03 MATERIALS: Products specified are as manufactured by P.P.G. Industries unless otherwise
indicated; similar products of acceptable manufacturers listed in Article 2.01 may be furnished in lieu
of those listed.
2.04 COLORS: Colors are to be selected by Architect. Manufacturers listed above may be used if they
are able to match the selected colors.
2.05 MIXING AND TINTING:
A. Deliver paints and enamels ready-mixed to job site.
B. Mix only in containers placed in suitable sized non-ferrous or oxide resistant metal pans.
PAINTING
09900 - 2
C. Use tinting colors recommended by manufacturer for the specific type of finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION:
A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and finishes for conditions that will adversely
affect execution, permanence or quality of work and which cannot be put into an acceptable
condition through preparatory work as included in Article 3.02, "Preparation."
B. Do not proceed with surface preparation or coating application until conditions are suitable.
-- C. Application of paint finish to surfaces constitutes acceptance of that surface.
3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES:
A. Wood:
1. Clean soiled surfaces (with alcohol wash).
2. Sand to smooth and even surface, then dust off.
3. Fill nail holes, cracks, open joints and other defects with appropriate wood filler after
' primer coat has dried.
4. Color to match finish color.
B. Ferrous Metal Surfaces:
1. Prepare surface in accordance with recommendations of or directions of
manufacturer of rust-inhibitive primer.
2. Feather edges of sound paint by grinding if necessary.
3.03 APPLICATION:
A. General Requirements:
- 1. Do not apply initial coating until moisture content of surface is within limitations
recommended by paint manufacturer.
2. Apply paint with suitable brushes or rollers.
a. Rate of application shall not exceed that as recommended by paint
manufacturer for the surface involved less 10% allowance for losses.
b. Keep brushes and rollers clean, dry, free from contaminants and suitable for
finish required.
3. Comply with recommendation of product manufacturer for drying time between
succeeding coats.
4. Vary slightly the color of successive coats.
PAINTING
09900 - 3
5. Sand and dust between each coat to remove defects visible from a distance of 5
feet.
6. Finish coats shall be smooth, free of brush marks, streaks, laps or pile-up of paints,
and skipped or missed areas.
7. Leave all parts of moldings and ornaments clean and true to details with no undue
amount of paint in corners and depressions.
8. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors clean and sharp with no
overlapping.
9. Apply primer on all work before glazing.
10. Refinish whole wall where portion of finish has been damaged or is not acceptable.
B. Painted Work:
1. Back prime all exterior woodwork with paint primer as specified.
2. Back prime all interior trim.
3. Runs on face not permitted.
3.04 CLEANING:
A. Touch-up and restore finish where damaged.
B. Remove spilled, splashed, or splattered paint from all surfaces.
C. Do not mar surface finish of items being cleaned.
D. Leave storage space clean and in condition required for equivalent spaces in project.
3.05 PAINTING SCHEDULE:
A. Exterior Ferrous Metal - Painted: Spot prime all burns, nicks, and other breaks in fabricator's
shop coat.
1 st coat: P.P.G.'s Speedhide Exterior Enamel (MWF 3.6 mils).
2nd coat: Same as 1 st.
B. Exterior Galvanized Iron - Painted: Wash all galvanized iron with acetic acid to clean it of
grease and oil.
1st coat: P.P.G. Galvanized Steel Primer, White 6-209.
2nd coat: P.P.G. Speedhide Exterior Enamel (MWF 3.6 mils).
3rd coat: Same as 2nd,
C. Interior Ferrous Metal - Painted: Spot prime all burns, nicks and other breaks in fabricator's
shop coat.
1st coat: P.P.G. Speedhide 6-90 Enamel (MWF 3.6 mils).
2nd coat: Same as 1 st.
PAINTING
09900 - 4
D. Interior Wood - Painted Finish: Wood to be sanded prior to finishing.
1st coat: PoP.G. Quick Dry Enamel Undercoater 6-6 (54-225).
2nd coat: P,P.G. Satinhide Lo-Lustre Latex Enamel (MWF 3.6 mils).
3rd coat: Same as 2nd.
' E. Exterior Wood - Painted Finish: Wood to be sanded prior to finishing (existing painted wood
to be scraped).
1st coat: P.P.G. Speedhide Exterior Wood Primer 6-9 (MWF 4.0 mils),
2nd coat: Speedhide Exterior Wood Finish 6 Line (MWF 3.2 mils),
3rd coat: Same as 2nd.
- F. Interior Concrete Masonry Units:
1st coat: Sherwin Williams Heavy Duty Block Filler.
2nd coat: Sherwin Williams Tile Clad II Epoxy Enamel (DFT 4 mils).
3rd coat: Same as 2"~ coat,
-- G, Mechanical Equipment: No paint required.
END OF SECTION
PAINTING
09900 - 5
SECTION 10170
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
' 1.01 RELATED WORK ELSEWHERE:
_ A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop Drawings: Shall be submitted to the Architect for approval before start of fabrication.
B. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog data and color samples for selection
of colors by Architect.
1.03 MANUFACTURER'S QUALIFICATIONS:
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Product similar and equal to those specified herein will be
acceptable for use on this project when approved by the Architect.
B. Standards: For purposes of designating type and quality of work under this section, drawings
and specifications are based on products manufactured or furnished by Santana Products
Company.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL: Toilet pilasters and doors shall be as manufactured by Santana Products Co., or
approved equal.
' 2.02 CONSTRUCTION:
A. Doors shall be one (1") inch thick Poly-Mar HD with Plasti-Glaze 280.
B. Pilasters shall be one (1") inch thick Poly-Mar HD with Plasti-Glaze 280.
C. Hardware and Fittings:
1. All brackets shall be die-stamped chrome-place steel.
2. Hinges shall be equipped with controlled, gravity-type hinges, adjustable, self-
lubricating and be completely concealed with thickness of the door.
3. All screws shall be vandal resistant.
4. Hardware: Each door shall be equipped with a cast alloy chrome-plated coat hook
and bumper, a latch assembly, and a one-piece heavy cast-non-ferrous alloy stop
and keeper with a rubber locked in place.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10170 - 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ERECTION:
A. All items shall be erected in rigid and substantial manner, straight and plumb, with all
horizontal lines level.
B. Pilasters shall be fastened to C.M.U. partitions with a continuous galvanized channel from
floor to top cross brace.
C. The clearance of the vertical edges of doors shall be uniform from top to bottom and not
exceed 3/16".
D. Hardware shall be carefully adjusted and left in perfect working order.
E. Finished surfaces shall be cleaned and left free from imperfections.
END OF SECTION
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10170 - 2
SECTION 10800
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: To define requirements forquality, function, size, gauge, grade,
etc., material specification, designate manufacturer's model number. Equal products of reputable
_ manufacturers will be considered. Products of the following manufacturers are acceptable:
A. Bradley Washfountain Co.
B. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
1.02 SUBMITTALS: Submit manufacturer's printed information for each item according to Contract
_ Conditions. Furnish complete templates to partition supplier for cut-outs and holes to be attached to
items of this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCTS:
A. Hand Dryer- Bradley No. 2875-28
B. Toilet Holder- Bradley No. 5126
C. Mirror- Bradley No. 740 (16"x36")
D. Grab Bars - Bradley No. 8122-0013600; 8122-014200
E. Shelves - Bradley No. 756 48"
F. Diaper Table - Safe-Strap No, 4302
- PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION: Type ofwall and wall surface shall determine method of installation. Each item shall
be installed plumb, level, secure and in proper relation to floor, partitions and plumbing fixtures.
3.02 SCHEDULE: See drawings for location and quantity.
END OF SECTION
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
4017 10800 1
SECTION 10990
_ MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
' 1.01 SCOPE: Furnish miscellaneous specialty items as specified herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS: Submit manufacturer's literature, indicate materials, construction, size, quantities,
_ finishes, and installation details.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
' 2.01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS:
A. Surface Cabinet: Equal to Larsen's 2409 - Surface.
B. Fire Extinguishers: Equal to Larsen's Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical, MP5, for Class ABC fires.
2.02 BUILDING PLAQUE: 18" x 24" cast aluminum building plaque with project name and completion date,
-- and names of the City Council, City Manager, Parks and Recreation Board, Parks and Recreation
Director, Architect and General Contractor. Architect will furnish general location of all names and
approve rubbing of plaque before casting.
2.03 RESTROOM SIGNS:
A. Provide Asintouch plaque signs as manufactured by ASI Sign Systems, 2007 108th Street,
Suite 701, Grand Prairie, Texas 75050. Contact: John Staider, (214) 641-4747, Fax (214)
641-5842.
B. Face panels shall be manufactured utilizing liquid photopolymer on 0.007" mil polyester
' backing and shall incorporate raised copy, Braille and design accents into a single sign
element. Tactile and Braille graphics shall be raised a minimum of 1/32". Polyester back to
be treated to assure paint adhesion. Tactile face panels shall be permanently laminated to
1/8" acrylic panel.
C, Backer plate shall be 1/8" acrylic panel.
' D. Colors shall be as selected by Architect to meet ADA requirements for contrast. Characters
and background of all signs shall have eggshell, non-glare finish. Braille characters shall be
same color as background. Sign edges shall be painted to match background.
E. Sign edges shall be smooth and free of saw marks and imperfections.
F. Lettering shall be computer generated, accurately reproducing the letter form.
G. Signs shall be for exterior use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION: Install according to manufacturers instructions and in locations as shown on
drawings.
END OF SECTION
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
10990 - 1
SECTION 11452
-- APPLIANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE: Provide and install all appliances as listed in Part 2 - Products and as shown on the
drawings. Provide all electrical, water installation as required for proper installation.
-- 1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340.
' B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice
to Proceed, submit:
_ 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Dimensioned drawings as needed to depict the space required for these items, and
their interface with the work of other trades.
4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the
; Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation
_ procedures used on the Work.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
-- and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ICE CUBE MACHINE:
' A. Manitowoc Series 150, B Model, having Ari-Certified ice production capacity of 175 pounds
of ice per 24 hours at 90% air and 70% water temperatures, cube size shall be 3/e" x 11/8 x %".
Ice machine will include, as standard, a self-cleaning feature consisting of one 10-minute
-- clean cycle and 6 rinse cycles. Manufacturer's phone (414) 682-0161.
B. Glass Door Merchandiser: True Model NO. GDM-23, (800) 325-6152.
' C. Refrigerator: Admiral Model #2114906, MFR #HMG21149.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Verify all electrical and plumbing requirements before installation.
B. Install and hook up appliances in locations as shown on drawings.
APPLIANCES
11452 - 1
C. Remove all protective covers.
D. Clean all appliances if required. _
E. Replace all dented appliances.
END OF SECTION
APPLIANCES
4017 11452 - 2
SECTION 13122
-- SHADE STRUCTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
' 1.01 SCOPE: This section of the specifications shall cover the construction and installation of shade
structures.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
-- B. Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metal.
C. Section 09900 - Painting.
1.03 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS: Comply with the following codes and standards except as
modified herein:
-- A. U.B.C., BOCA, and SBCCI.
1.04 SUBMITTALS: Submit to the Engineer four (4) copies of the shop drawings of the "Bounding Main"
structure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Sun Ports International, Inc., Dot Hayman, 8510 Sovereign Row, Dallas, Texas
75247, (214) 905-9500.
2. Approved equal.
2.02 STRUCTURAL STEEL:
A. All structural steel shall be ASTM A 36, except steel pipe columns which shall be ASTM A
53, Grade B, unless otherwise noted. Slip fittings shall be manufactured of drawn-over-
_ mandrel steel with a minimum yield strength of 70 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 80
ksi.
B. Structural steel shall be detailed, fabricated, and erected in accordance with AISC
-- specifications.
C. All shop and field welding shall be executed by certified welders in accordance with the latest
._ edition of the American Welding Society specifications.
D. Shop connections shall be welded unless noted otherwise. Field connections shall be as
indicated on the drawings.
E. All erection bolts shall be ASTM A 307, treated to retard corrosion.
SHADE STRUCTURES
-- 4017 13122-1
F. All welds shall be performed using E70 electrodes. All fillet welds shall be 3/16" unless
otherwise noted.
G. All structural steel shall be primed and painted.
H. Wire rope as required shall be ¼" nominal diameter, 7 strand, 7 wires per strand (minimum),
with a minimum nominal tensile strength of 9,000 pounds. Wire rope shall be secured with
approved fittings and cable hardware,
I. All steel framing shall be constructed as shown on Sheet A-8.
2.03 ELECTRICAL: Electrical wiring, if required, shall conform to all applicable local codes, and shall be
installed by a licensed electrician.
2.04 SHADE FABRIC:
A. Shade fabric shall be a knitted high density polyethylene (HDPE), color concentrated and
ultra-violet light stabilized, monofilament and tape yarn, in a relationship of 57% and 43%
respectively.
1. Burst strength: 48 pounds per square foot.
2. Approximate shade: 80% (dark colors).
3. Nominal thickness: 0.045 - inch.
4. Fire retardancy: ASTM E84-91A; Class I (FS110) Flame spread; Smoke-developed
index (SDI) 30.
5. Conforms to: U.B.C., BOCA, and SBCCI.
6. All seams shall be sewn with waterproof, U.V. stabilized thread,
B. Contractor shall provide color samples for selection by the Owner or Owner's representative.
Provide a 5 year limited cloth warranty.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Install all steel members flush and true. Weld all members, grind smooth, prime and paint.
Paint to be selected by Owner or Owner's representative.
B. Install shade fabric as per manufacturer's recommendation.
END OF SECTION
SHADE STRUCTURES
13122 - 2
MECHANICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
15040 General Requirements for Mechanical Work 15040-1 - 6
15050 Basic Materials and Methods 15050-1 - 10
' 15055 Project Closeout 15055-1 - 4
15056 Submittal Data 15056-1 - 3
15057 Cleaning 15057-1- 2
' 15100 Valves 15100-1- 4
15251 Insulation 15251 - 1 - 4
15371 Refrigerant Piping 15371-1 - 3
15401 Domestic Water Piping System 15401-1 - 4
15405 Waste Water Piping System 15405-1 - 3
15421 Floor Drains 15421-1 - 2
15424 Domestic Water Heaters 15424-1 - 3
15450 Plumbing Fixtures 15450-1 - 2
_ 15760 Electric Unit Heaters 15760-1 - 2
15771 Split System Heating and Cooling Units 15771-1 - 3
15829 Fans 15829-1- 3
15841 Low Velocity Metal Ductwork 15841-1 - 7
15860 Ductwork Accessories 15860-1 - 3
15867 Air Diffusers 15867-1 - 2
15950 HVAC Control Sequence 15950-1 - 2
15953 HVAC Test-Adjust-Balance 15953-1 - 3
SECTION 15040
-- GENERAL EQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK
-- PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.02 BASIC REQUIREMENTS
A. In accordance with the Conditions of the Contract, each Mechanical Cbntractor
executing work in Division 15 is acting in the capacity of a sub-contractor.
However, throughout Division 15, the mechanical sub-contractor is hereinafter
referred to as the Contractor.
B. The Contractor is duly bound to all applicable requirements of the prime
contractor as stipulated in the Conditions of the Contract.
C. The Contractor shall execute all work hereinafter specified or indicated on
accompanying drawings, and provide equipment and labor as required in
connection with his work and systems.
1.03 SITE INSPECTION
A. Contractor shall visit the site and veri~ the following:
1. Items shown or indicated as "existing" on the drawings, including
structures, trees, utilities, obstructions, etc.
2. Work conditions.
' 3. Hazards.
4. Soil grades and conditions.
B. Acceptance of a contract shall be deemed as evidence that the site visit has been
made and that the Contractor has familiarized himself with the conditions noted
above.
_ 15040-1
1.04 PERMITS, UTILITY CONNECTIONS AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all required utility connections, meters and --
meter boxes, utility extensions and/or relocations and shall pay all costs and
inspection fees for all work included therein. Coordination of this work with the
Civil pan of the work is required. '
1.05 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Except as hereinafter modified in individual sections of Division 15 and contract
drawings, materials and installation shall meet the requirements prescribed in the
latest editions of the applicable manuals and standards of the following codes and
standards:
1. National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA):
a. NFPA No. 70, National Electrical Code
b. NFPA No. 90A, Air Conditioning Systems
c. NFPA No. 91, Blower & Exhaust Systems
d. NFPA No. 101, Life Safety Code
e. NFPA No. 200 Series, Building Construction
2. United States of America Standards Institute (ASA) Standards:
a. A40.8, 1955 National Plumbing Code
b. B31.1 and B31.1 a, Code for Pressure Piping
3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
4. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute Standards (ARI).
5. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association.
Inc. (SMACNA).
6. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA).
7. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM).
8. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
9. American Water Works Association (AWWA).
10. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA).
11. City of Coppell, Texas Fire Department as applicable to construction on
this site.
15040-2
12. City of Coppell, Texas Building Code for Construction.
' 13. Occupational Safer' and Health Act (OSHA).
14. State and Local safety and health standards.
15. All work shall be in accordance with all regulations and requirements of
the Standards and Specifications for Handicapped and Disabled for the
' Construction of Public Buildings and Facilities in the State of Texas
Usable by Physically Handicapped and Disabled Persons. Reference
028.13.03.579 of Section 7, Article 601b, V.T.C.S.
16. See individual sections for additional codes, standards, and special
_ requirements.
B. Where materials or equipment are specified to be approve& listed, tested, or
_ labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or constructed and/or tested in
accordance with the standards of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers
or the Air Moving and Conditioning Association, the Contractor shall submit proof
that the items furnished under this section of the specifications conform to such
requirements. The ASME stamp, AMCA label, or the U.L. label, will be
acceptable as sufficient evidence that the items conform to the respective
- requirements.
C. It is the intent of Division 15 and the related drawings to comply with the above
- mentioned requirements, standards and codes. However some discrepancies may
occur. Where discrepancies occur, the Contractor shall noti~' the
Architect/Engineer in writing of discrepancies and request an interpretation.
1. Request for interpretation shall be made before an)' work is performed or
material is fabricated.
2. Should the Contractor fabricate and/or install materials and/or
workmanship in such a manner that does not comply with the applicable
' codes, standards, and/or regulations, the Contractor shall bear all costs
arising in correcting the deficiencies to comply with the codes, standards
and/or regulations.
3. Should a conflict or discrepancy occur between codes, standards and/or
regulations, the Contractor shall be obligated to comply with the most
stringent, at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.06 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The specifications and accompanying drawings of the building indicate plans and
_ details showing installations and locations of equipment, piping, ductwork, outlets.
controls, etc. Due to the intricacies of construction it is impractical to specify or
15040-3
indicate every detail; in such cases the current rules of good construction practices
and applicable specifications shall govern.
B. If departures from the drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details
of such proposed departures shall be made to the Architect/Engineer in writing.
Each request shall state reasons and recommended correction for proposed
departure. No departure shall be made without prior written approval of the
Architect/Engineer.
C. The Contractor shall familiarize himself with all drawings and specifications and
properly use information found on the Architectural, Structural, Civil, Mechanical
and Electrical drawings and specifications affecting his work.
D. Dimensional information pertaining to new work in the structure shall be taken
from the appropriate drawings. Dimensional information pertaining to existing
conditions and outside the structure shall be made by the Contractor on the site.
E. Should the drawings or specifications disagree within themselves, or with each
other, the better quality or greater quantity of work or materials shall be performed
or furnished at no additional cost to the Owner.
F. Interrelation of the specifications and drawings and schedules is as follows:
1. Specifications determine type and installation of material.
2. Drawings establish location, quantities, dimensions and details.
3. Schedules establish performance characteristics of equipment.
G. Dimensions indicated on drawings govern scaled measurements. Large scale
details govern small scale drawings.
1.07 SPACE AND EQUIPMENT
A. The size of mechanical equipment indicated on the drawings is based on the
dimensions of the equipment by the manufacturer indicated on the drawings, in the
specifications and/or as listed in equipment schedules. Other manufacturers may
be acceptable if equal in physical size, design and function.
B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine if the equipment proposed
to be furnished will fit in the allotted space.
C. Space is critical; therefore, equipment of larger sizes than shown, even though of
specified manufacturer, will not be acceptable unless Contractor can demonstrate
that ample space exists for proper installation, operation, and maintenance.
D. Equipment shall be installed in a manner to permit access to all surfaces and
accessory items such as valves, pumps, motors, drives, filters, gauges, controls,
15040-4
etc. Accessories shall be installed to allow removal for service without
disassembly of another part.
E. If requested by Architect/Engineer, Contractor shall prepare and furnish detailed
installation drawings indicating arrangement and installation of proposed
' equipment, and submit to Architect/Engineer for approval. Approval, in writing,
shall be obtained before ordering equipment.
' 1.08 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. All mechanical (plumbing and HVAC) equipment shall be furnished and installed
complete and ready for use. The Contractor or Subcontractor furnishing the
equipment item shall furnish and install all auxiliary piping, valves, controls,
_ control wiring, conduit, alarms, etc., required. All necessary devices, control
wiring, conduit, etc., will not necessarily be shown on the drawings. Control
wiring, conduit, etc., for equipment items provided by the General Contractor shall
_ be furnished and installed by the General Contractor unless shown on the
mechanical and electrical drawings or so stated in the specifications.
1.09 SUPERINTENDENT
A. It shall be the responsibility, of each superintendent to stud}; all Contract
- Documents and familiarize himself with the work to be done by other trades. The
superintendent shall coordinate his work with other trades and before material is
fabricated or installed, make sure that his work will not cause any interference that
- cannot be resolved without major changes to the Contract Documents.
1.10 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall guarantee all work, labor and materials, for a period of one year
from date of substantial completion in accordance with the Conditions of the
-- Contract.
B. Refer to individual sections of the specifications for guarantees which may be
' required in addition to the above-specified one-year guarantee.
1.11 PROJECT OBSERVATION
A. Project observation by the Architect/Engineer is for the express purpose of
verifying compliance by the Contractor with the Contract Documents, and shall
not be construed as construction supervision nor indication of approval of the
manner in which the work is being performed.
1.12 FINAL OBSERVATION
_ A. The Architect/Engineer will make a final observation of the project in accordance
with the Conditions of the Contract.
-- 15040-5
B. Before calling upon the Architect/Engineer to make a final observation, it shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor to personally make a detail observation of the
complete project assuring himself that the Work on the project is ready for final --
acceptance.
C. Contractor shall comply with all requirements of Project Closeout before receiving '
final acceptance of the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS '
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
15040-6
SECTION 15050
-- BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
-- PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
' 1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Unless otherwise specified, materials are to be new and of current
U.S. manufacture, free from defects and of the best quali~ of their respective
kinds.
B. Equipment and/or materials damaged in shipment or handling, or otherwise
damaged before installation, shall be replaced with new equipment and/or
_ materials. Damaged equipment and/or materials shall not be repaired at the
jobsite.
_ C. Furnishing of the proper equipment and/or materials and to see that it is installed
as recommended by the manufacturer is entirely the responsibiliD' of the
Contractor. If required for proper installation, the Contractor shall obtain advice
_ and supervisory assistance from a representative of the specific manufacturer of
the equipment being installed.
-- D. Materials and adhesives to conform to Federal Standard Flame-Spread Properties,
Inc., with composite fire and smoke hazard ratings, maximum 25 for flame spread
and 50 for smoke developed. Adhesives to be waterproof.
E. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of
conflict between the requirements of the Contract Documents and the
-- manufacturer's directions and shall obtain the Architect/Engineer's instructions
before proceeding with the work. Should the Contractor perform any such work
that does not comply with the manufacturer' s directions or such instructions from
' the Architect/Engineer, he shall bear all costs arising in connection with the
deficiencies.
F. Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting screws, keys or other rotating
parts which are located so that a person can come in close proximity thereto shall
be full>' enclosed properly provided with a guard.
15050-1
1.03 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
A. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to provide an installation complete in
every respect. If additional work is required for Work indicated or specified, it
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide same as well as to provide
material and equipment usually furnished with such systems or as required to
complete the installation.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for placing his material and equipment into the
building and shall carefully lay out his work in the project to conform to the
structural conditions, to avoid all obstructions, to conform to the details of the
installation supplied by the manufacturer of the equipment to be installed and
thereby provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation.
C. Investigate structural and finish conditions and coordinate all work with the
various trades to avoid interferences between the different phases of Work.
Harmonize work so that it may be installed in the most direct and workmanlike
manner without hindering or handicapping each other.
D. Unless specifically noted to be exposed, lay out work in finish portions of the
building so that it will be concealed in chases, suspended above ceilings, etc.
Allow proper clearances where pipes and ducts are to be insulated. Bending or
installing pipes in a strain in order to insulate or to clear obstructions will not be
permitted.
E. Lay out work as required to avoid crippling of structural members. Inserts for
pipe hangers are to be set before concrete is poured. Provide and properly lay out
sleeves in concrete for penetrating pipes and ducts. Hold pipes and ducts as tight
to structure as possible and provide proper and required sloping to pipes.
F. Lay out and install equipment as required to provide convenient and safe
maintenance and access for future replacement as well as providing easy access
to oiling devices and parts requiring adjustment.
1.04 STOK~kGE AND PROTECTION
A. Contractor shall provide the required protection of equipment and materials from
the time of delivery until the completion of the Work. Protect from damage, rust,
rain. humidity and dust.
B. Do not receive equipment or materials on the job site until adequate space has
been provided for storage.
C. Provide adequate supports for protection from the Wound and erect required
shelters for items stored in the open.
15050-2
D. Items stored within the building are to be adequately protected and covered with
tarpaulins or other protective covering.
E. Protect the building at all times during construction from damage by workmen,
their tools and/or equipment. Protect floors, steps, wall, ceilings, doors, windows
' and other finish surfaces.
F. Equipment and materials found in a rusty condition at completion of the work will
' be thoroughly cleaned of rust and refinished as required to its original condition.
1.05 PRECEDENCE OF MATERIALS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of his equipment and
material into the allotted spaces in the structure so as to provide complete and
acceptable systems.
_ B. Piping interferences shall give precedence to pipe lines which require a stated
grade for proper operation.
_ C. To prevent a conflict in space requirements, the following order of precedence, in
general, shall be observed.
_ 1. Building lines
~ Structural members
3. Soil and drain piping
-- 4. Vent piping
5. Supply ductwork
6. Exhaust ductwork
-- 7. Domestic hot and cold water piping
8. Electrical conduit
-- 1.06 INTEGRATED CEILING SYSTEMS
A. The ceiling grid system with light fixtures, as indicated on the drawings, shall be
' maintained.
B. Coordinate the location of dampers, supply air diffusers/grilles, return air grilles,
' etc., with the ceiling grid and light fixture grid to assure proper location of all
items in a manner approved by the Architect/Engineer.
C. The order of space allocation priority in plan and in elevation shall be as follows:
1. Light fixtures, at finished ceiling +7"
2. Graded plumbing waste systems
3. Grilles, registers and diffusers, etc.
_ 4. Ductwork
5. Pressurized piping systems
_ 15050-3
6. Electrical conduit, junction boxes and pull boxes
7. Ceiling support system, where required
1.07 LOCATION OF OUTLETS
A. Supply and return air outlets in suspended acoustical tile ceilings shall occur '
symmetrically in tile joints or in the centers of whole tiles. The final
determination of the exact location of each outlet and the arrangement to be
followed shall be acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. '
B. The drawings shox~; the locations of the various outlets and equipment. Exact
locations of these outlets and equipment shall be determined by reference to the
general construction plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings,
roughing-in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation
with the other trades. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to make any
reasonable change in location of any outlet or equipment before installation,
without additional cost.
C. The Contractor shall install his work complete and in good working order. If any
of the requirements of the drawings and specifications are impossible to perform, _
or if the installation when made in accordance with such requirements will not
perform satisfactorily, he shall report same to the Architect/Engineer for
correction. _
D. No extra compensation will be allowed for extra work or change caused by failure
to comply with the above requirements. _
1.08 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS
A. Rough-in and make all water, sewer, etc., connections to all fixtures, equipment,
machinery, etc., provided bv others in accordance with detailed roughing-in
drawings provided by the equipment suppliers and by actual measurements of the
equipment connections.
B. After the equipment is set in place, make all final connections and provide all
required pipe, fittings, valves, traps, etc.
C. Provide all air gap fittings required, using materials specified. In each water line
serving an item of equipment or piece of equipment, provide a shut-off valve.
Furnish a suitable trap on each drain not provided with a trap.
D. All pipe fittings, valves, traps, etc., exposed in finished areas and connected to
chrome-plated lines provided by others shall be chrome plated to match.
15050-4
1.09 INSTALLATION METHODS
-- A. Unless noted otherwise, piping and ductwork may be run exposed in mechanical
rooms, storage rooms and janitor's closets. Piping and ductwork where exposed
shall be run tight against the structure, ceiling or walls as required by the
' Architect/Engineer.
B. Conceal piping and ductwork to be installed as hereinbefore specified.
C. Where piping must be exposed in finished areas, install to meet the following
requirements:
1. Do not expose unless so indicated on the drawings.
2. If piping must be exposed because of unforeseen interferences or job
conditions, obtain approval in writing from the Architect/Engineer.
3. Exposed domestic water pipe (copper) shall be chrome plated (insulation
shall be omitted if approved by Architect/Engineer) and no joints shall
_ appear in pipe line if at all possible. If insulation must remain, insulated
pipe shall be in chrome plated sleeve.
_ 4. Exposed sanitary sewer or drainage piping shall be DWV copper (or DV~rV
PVC if code allows) and shall be inside chrome plated sleeve or cast iron
piping housed inside gypboard furring.
D. Piping and ductwork suspended from the structure shall be adequately and
properly supported on hanger rods or clamps as specified or as approved by the
- Architect/Engineer. Perforated strap hangers will not be permitted.
E. Where space is limited above ceilings, belov,, concrete beams or other concrete
- projections, piping shall be sleeved through the beam or projection, rather than
hung below. Provide sleeves where required and locate where approved by the
Architect/Engineer.
F. Cut pipe accurately to measurements established at the building and install into
position without springing or forcing. All open ends of pipes shall be capped or
' otherwise closed until the systems are closed with final connections.
G. No pipe joints nearer than 12" to a wall, ceiling or floor penetration will be
' permitted, unless joint is of the welded type.
H. Piping systems shall be made up straight and true and run at proper grades to
permit proper flow of the contained material. Piping shall be graded for proper
drainage.
15050-5
I. Piping shall follow as closely as possible the routes shown on plans, which take
into consideration conditions to be met at the site and in the building. Should any
unforeseen conditions arise, lines shall be changed or rerouted as required after --
approval from the Architect/Engineer.
J. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction and so '
as to prevent excessive strain and stress in the piping and in connections to
equipment.
K. All piping shall be clean when it is installed; rust and/or dirt shall be removed.
L. Screw joints shall be made with taper threads, properly cut. Threads shall be cut
using graphite and oil applied to the pipe only. When threads are cut on pipes,
the ends shall be carefully reamed to remove any burrs. Pipe shall be up-ended
and hammered to remove all shavings and foreign material, before installing.
M. Requirements for assembling joints in cast iron and copper lines are set forth _
elsewhere in these specifications. For any special materials, consult the
manufacturers for the recommended procedures in assembling the joints.
N. For additional requirements for installation of mechanical work, refer to individual
sections in Division 15.
1.10 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Where pipes penetrate walls and/or floors in exposed areas, provide stainless steel _
escutcheon plates.
B. Escutcheon plate shall be set screw type and sized to fit pipe and to cover
penetration opening.
1.11 WELDING PROCEDURES
A. Welded pipe joints shall be made by the fusion welding method, using a metallic
arc or gas welding process.
B. Pipe shall have the ends beveled 37-1/2 degrees with joints aligned true before
welding.
C. Except as otherwise specified, all changes in direction, intersection of lines.
reduction in pipe size and the like shall be made with factory-fabricated welding
fittings. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notthing of straight runs to form tees,
or any similar construction will not be permitted.
D. All welding operations shall conform to the latest recommendations of the
American Welding Society and to Section Six of the Code for Pressure Piping,
ANSI B31.1, current edition. All qualifying tests, welding and stress relieving
15050-6
procedures shall, moreover, be in accordance with Standard Qualification for
Welding Procedures, Welders and Welding Operators, Appendix A of the Code,
' current edition.
E. Schedule 40 pipe shall be welded with not less than three passes including 1 tack,
' 1 filler and 1 lacer. Schedule 80 pipe shall be welded with not less than 4 passes
including 1 tack, 2 fillers and 1 lacer.
1.12 UNIONS
A. Unions shall be installed on each side of all special valves, regulators, traps, and
at all pieces of equipment (pumps, condensers, tanks, etc.), so that equipment may
be readily disconnected.
B. Unless written approval has been obtained from the Architect/Engineer, no unions
are to be placed in a location which will be inaccessible after completion of the
_ building.
1.13 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut and patch walls, floors, etc., resulting from failure to provide proper openings
or recesses in new construction. If cutting and patching is required, it shall be
-- performed by trades specializing in that type work.
B. Openings cut through concrete and masonry. shall be made with masonry saws
-- and/or core drills and at such locations acceptable to the Architect/Engineer.
Impact-type equipment will not be used except where specifically acceptable to the
Architect/Engineer.
C. Openings in precast concrete slabs or walls for pipes, etc., shall be core drilled to
exact size.
D. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide and install lintels or other
structural supports to protect the remaining masonry. Adequate supports shall be
' provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry
occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc.. shall be of the
proper size and shape, and shall be installed in a manner acceptable to the
' Architect/Engineer.
E. Openings cut through plaster or drywall shall be cut prior to plaster finish coat or
texture coat on drywall. Cutting of the finish coat of plaster or texture coat of
drywall will not be permitted unless written approval of the Architect/Engineer is
obtained.
F. Openings shall be restored and/or repaired as required to replace the cut surface
_ to an "as-new" and/or "as original" condition. Refer to the appropriate section of
the specifications for the material involved.
-- 15050-7
G. No cutting, boring or excavating which will Weaken the structure will be
permitted.
1.14 ROOF PENETRATIONS
A. Pipes and/or ducts penetrating the roof shall be installed as directed by roofing '
supplier/installer and shall be compatible with roofing system.
1.15 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING '
A. Items of mechanical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved
nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16" thick, 3 ply,
with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least
1/2" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name
of the item, its mark number, area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent
information. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the
following: _
1. Heat pump units (indoor and outdoor sections)
2. Cooling, heating and ventilating control panels, thermostats and switches _
3. Water heaters
4. Fans
5. Miscellaneous - similar and/or related items
1.16 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Contractor shall, during the progress of the work and upon its completion, test
his work and make all tests as required by the specifications, State, Municipal and
other authorities having jurisdiction of the work. Piping pressure tests shall be --
made before pipe is concealed or covered.
B. Tests shall be made in the presence of the Architect/Engineer and other authorities
requiring tests. The Architect/Engineer shall be notified at his office 24 hours
prior to each test.
C. The Contractor shall pay all costs, inspection charges and fees required for the
tests of his work.
D. The Contractor shall provide all apparatus, temporary piping connection. etc..
required for tests. The Contractor shall take all due precautions to prevent damage
to the building or its contents incurred by such tests. The Contractor shall repair
and make good at his own expense any damage caused by failures or leaks during
the tests.
E. Leaks, defects or deficiencies shall be repaired and/or replaced, and tests shall be
repeated until the test requirements are fully complied with.
15050-8
F. Equipment shall be placed in operation and tested for proper automatic control
before the final balancing of the system is started.
G. Tests shall have pertinent data logged by the Contractor at the time of testing.
Data shall include date, time, personnel, description, and extent of system tested,
test condition, test results, specified results, and an}' other pertinent data. Data
shall be delivered to the Architect/Engineer.
1.17 COOPERATION AND CLEANUP
_ A. The Contractor shall cooperate full>' with the other trades on the job to help keep
the job site in a clean and safe condition. At the end of each day's work, each
trade shall properly store all of his tools, equipment and materials and shall clean
_ his debris from the job.
B. Upon the completion of the job, the Contractor shall immediately remove all of
_ his tools, equipment, an}, surplus materials and all debris caused by his portion of
the work.
_ C. Refer to Section 15057, Cleaning, for additional cleaning requirements.
1.18 CLEANING AND PAINTING OF EQUIPMENT
A. Equipment, piping, ductwork, grilles, insulation, etc., in finished areas furnished
and installed by the Contractor shall be painted. Finished areas include outside the
-- building as well as occupied areas (all rooms) inside the building.
B. Thoroughly clean all pans of materials and equipment of cement, plaster, and
-- other materials. All oil and grease spots shall be removed. Sink surfaces shall be
carefully wiped and all cracks and corners scraped out. Exposed metal work shall
be carefully brushed down with steel brushes to remove rust and other spots and
-- shall be left smooth and clean.
C. Thoroughly clean the finish on all parts of the materials and equipment with
' factory applied finishes. If the finish has been damaged, the surfaces shall be re-
painted to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer.
' D. No nameplates on equipment shall be painted, and suitable protection shall be
afforded to the plates to prevent their being rendered illegible during the painting
operation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
-- 15050-9
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used. --
END OF SECTION
15050-10
SECTION 15055
-- PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 ELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. In order to close out this project, the work hereinafter noted is required.
B. Requirements for project closeout are, but not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Tests.
3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals, include brand/manufacturer model
name and number.
4. Owner' s Instructions.
5. Shop Drawings.
-- 6. Correction of Deficiencies Found on Final Observation.
7. Guarantees.
1.03 RECORD DRAWINGS
' A. Maintain a set of Contract Drawings consisting of a complete set of blueline prints
at the jobsite.
' B. Indicate on the record drawings the installed locations of main lines of:
1. Piping
2. Ductwork
3. Equipment
4. Dimensional locations of underground work
5. Dimensional locations of site work
15055-1
C. Include addenda, change orders, clarifications, and other modifications to the
Drawings.
D. Deliver Drawings to the Architect/Engineer on the completion of the work.
E. Do not use these Drawings for reference or construction, nor allow them to leave
the field office.
F. Drawings will be reviewed by the Architect/Engineer as required and prior to '
approval of each month's Certificate for Payment. Certificate for Payment will
not be approved until record drawings are brought up to date.
1.04 TESTS
A. Conduct tests as elsewhere specified for the various systems.
B. Log pertinent data at the time of testing, including:_
1. Date and time
2. Personnel
3. Description and extent of system tested
4. Test conditions
5. Test results and specified results _
6. Other pertinent data
1.05 OPERATION AND MA/NTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. Complete written instructions of each system and its related equipment shall
include, but not limited to. the following: --
1. Preventative maintenance procedures
2. Starting and stopping --
3. Checking for normal operation
4. Manufacturer's repair and parts replacement lists and instructions
B. Bind instructions in book form, three copies for each system and its related
equipment.
1. Typed copy
2. Diagrams
3. Manufacturer's printed data '
C. Provide, laminated in plastic, typed instructions and diagrams for each system and
its related equipment.
D. Demonstrate the operating and maintenance procedures to the Owner or his _
authorized representative.
15055-2 _
E. Submit a release, signed by the Owner.
' 1. List the systems and equipment demonstrated.
2. List the dates and names of personnel present for demonstrations.
~' 1.06 SYSTEM START-UP
A. Prior to the start-up of any components, item of equipment or system:
1. Adjust controls and other miscellaneous equipment.
2. Complete other manufacturer's instructions.
3. Adjust and service other components as required for proper and safe
operation.
4. Install clean filters in heat pump unit.
1.07 REQUIREMENTS FOR FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Complete the construction.
_ B. Correct deficiencies listed at time of Substantial Completion.
C. Submit three (3) copies of Owner's Manual in three-ring loose-leaf binder
~ containing the following:
1. System diagrams and drawings
2. System operating instructions
-- 3. System maintenance instructions
4. Revised copy of material and equipment list
5. Serial numbers of principal pieces of equipment
' 6. List of manufacturers', suppliers', and subcontractors' names, addresses,
and telephone numbers, both local representatives and manufacturers'
service headquarters
7. Equipment operating and maintenance instructions
8. Spare parts data as follows:
. a. List of parts and supplies
15055-3
b. Current unit prices
c. Sources of supply (local and national; names, addresses and
telephone numbers)
d. List of parts and supplies recommended by manufacturer for Owner
to have on hand
9. Certified performance curves
10. Tests and reports
D. Instructions:
1. Bound copy
2. Demonstration
E. Provide three (3) bound copies containing the following:
1. Acceptance certificates of authorities having jurisdiction
2. Log of tests made during course of Work
3. Owner's acknowledgement of demonstration
4. List of manufacturers' guarantees executed by the Contractor
F. Record Drawings: Deliver the Record Drawings to the Architect/Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used. --
PART3-EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
15055-4 _
SECTION 15056
-- SUBMITTAL DATA
'- PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. As soon as practical after the date of award of contract and before purchasing or
starting installation of any materials or equipment, the Contractor shall submit
complete shop drawings and/or manufacturer's data of all materials and equipment
to be incorporated in the work.
B. Materials and equipment requiring detailed submittal data shall be submitted with
_ sufficient data to indicate that all requirements of the specifications have been met.
1. Where products are noted or specified by brand names, it is for the
._ purpose of establishing standards of quality, style and size.
C. Manufacturer's data shall have all non-applicable features crossed out or deleted
_ in a manner that will clearly indicate exactly what is to be furnished.
D. Samples shall be furnished when requested.
1.03 REVIEV~~ OF SUBMITTALS
-- A. The Contractor shall allow a minimum of two (2) weeks time frame for review of
each submission by the office of the design discipline involved after receipt of
such submissions by that design discipline.
B. The Contractor is responsible for allowing sufficient time in the construction
schedule to cover the aforementioned cycles of data processing, including time for
' all resubmission cycles on non-acceptable materials, equipment, etc., covered by
the data submitted.
' C. Construction delays and/or lack of timeliness in the above regards are the
responsibility of the Contractor and will not be considered in any request for
scheduled construction time extensions.
15056-1
1.04 ACCEPTANCE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Acceptance of materials and equipment will be based on manufacturer's published
data and will be tentative subject to the submission of complete shop drawings
and/or manufacturer' s data indicating compliance with the contract documents and
that adequate and acceptable clearances for entry, servicing, and maintenance will
exist.
B. Acceptance of materials and equipment under this provision shall not be construed
as authorizing any deviations from the contract documents, unless the attention of
the Architect/Engineer has been directed in writing to the specific deviation.
C. Data submitted shall not contain unrelated information unless all pertinent
information is properly identified.
! .05 CERTIFICATION
A. The Contractor shall furnish certification where required.
1.06 EQUIPMENT SERVICE
A. All equipment installed on this project shall have representation, factory. authorized
service, and a stock of repair parts within a 200 mile radius.
1.07 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall check all items of submittal data and verify by statement and
initial that each item has been checked for the following conditions:
1. Item is equal to specified item in construction. quality and function.
2. Item is of the same physical size.
a. If not of the same physical size, the dimensions have been checked
and item will fit within the allocated space shown on the plans.
b. Furnish 1/4" scale plan and 1/4" sections on tracing paper (for
direct overlay) of proposed equipment, including ductwork, piping,
etc., connections.
c. The tracing of 1/4" plans and 1/4" sections must be furnished with
submittal for other than scheduled equipment in order to compare
proposed 'equipment with specified equipment.
3. System connections to the item can be made as shown on the plans.
15056-2 --
4. Shop drawings show in detail all connections, etc., required to meet the
overall specifications in every detail.
5. Statement of guarantee that the proposed equipment shall operate properly
as applied to the project and will not require additional device or changes
'~ in the installation shown on the plans.
1.08 Complete specification data shall be submitted for all mechanical items and including the
" list below:
A. Plumbing fixtures and trim
B. Valves
C. Insulation
D. Exhaust fans
E. Temperature and operating controls
F. HP units (indoor and outdoor)
G. Air devices
H. Fly fan
I. Unit heaters
2- J. Piping materials
K. Electric water heaters
1.09 Complete minimum 1/4" scale shop drawings shall be submined for the following:
A. Ductwork
B. Plumbing system layouts (if to be revised from contract documents)
PART ~ PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
15056-3
SECTION 15057
CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 ELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
"' 1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be
cleaned.
B. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DURING CONSTRUCTION
-- A. Clean up and remove litter and construction debris which results from work under
Division 15 in construction areas on an as-needed and as-directed basis.
-- B. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from
cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
- 3.02 FINAL CLEANING
A. Employ experienced workmen, or professional cleaners for final cleaning.
B. In preparation for substantial completion or occupancy, conduct final inspection
of sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces, and of concealed spaces, and clean
as follows:
1. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign
materials from sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces; polish surfaces
so designated to shine finish.
15057-1
2. Repair, patch and touch-up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match
adjacent surfaces.
C. Owner will assume responsibility for cleaning as of time designated on Owner's
final acceptance of Project.
END OF SECTION "
15057-2
SECTION 15100
VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
" 1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This work covers the requirements for the valves as indicated and required for the
various systems throughout the project.
B. The requirements of this section apply to all piping work specified in other
sections of these specifications.
_ 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Special Tests and Quality Requirements:
1. Bronze ball valves shall be rated for 150 SWP/600 WOG. Ball valves
shall be equipped with blowout proof stems and adjustable packing glands
__ and to be of a two piece screwed end cap design. Packing shall be teflon
or glass filled teflon. Seats to be glass filled teflon.
~ 2. Iron valves shall have pressure containing parts conforming to ASTM
Specification A-126, Orade B. Wedge and seat ring material for iron
valves shall conform to ASTM Specification B-584 Alloy C84400.
3. Stem materials for bronze valves shall conform to ASTM B-99 Alloy
C65100, ASTM Specification B-371, Alloy 694 (rolled silicon brass) or
-' other approved materials with less than 15% zinc. Stem material for
IBBM valves shall conform to ASTM B-371 Alloy 694 or ASTM B-16
Alloy C36000 brass.
B. Valves of the same type shall be furnished by the same manufacturer, unless
approved by Engineer. If approval is requested, substitution must be one of
_ approved manufacturer on approved list.
15100-1
1. Submittal data for substitute shall consist of manufacturer' s name, size,
figure number, detailed technical drawings and appropriate engineering
information to substantiate qualit>,.
1.04 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Where a manufacturer has been listed, it is for qualit>,, design and function.
B. Products equal in quality, design and function by one of the following will be
acceptable.
1. Valves:
a. Crane
b. Nibco
c. Homestead
d. Stockham
e. Mueller
No Substitutions
2. Hydrants:
a. Josam
b. Wade
c. Zurn
No Substitutions
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 VALVE TYPES AND SIZES
A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated valves of the type, body
material and pressure class indicated. Except as otherwise indicated, provide valve
size same as connection pipe size.
B. Check Valves. 2-1/2" and smaller bronze: Class 150# steam/300# WOG; Crane
137, Stockham B345, Nibco T433BY.
C. Ball Valves bronze: Class 150# steam/600 WOG; Nibco T-580-70, Stoc'kham
S-216-BR-R-T with valve stem extension to clear insulation thickness.
D. Wall Hydrants: Non-freeze type with integral vacuum breaker; Wade W-8625,
cast bronze.
1. The following equal in design and function are acceptable (no substitutes):
a. Zurn
15100-2
b. Woodford
E. Hose Bibbs: Chicago No. 952, or equal, polished chrome plated, loose key.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General Requirements: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following
requirements:
1. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment,
including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of
piping.
a. Locate valves so as to be accessible.
b. Provide separate support where required for a rigid installation.
2. Install valves with stems pointed up, in the vertical position wherever
possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from a horizontal
plane, unless approved by Engineer. If approved, install valve drains with
hose-end adaptor for each valve with stem below horizontal plane.
3. Where insulation is required or indicated, install extended-stem valves and
arranged in the proper manner to receive insulation.
4. Install valves with bodies of metal other than cast-iron where thermal or
mechanical shock is indicated or can be expected to occur.
5. Do not install bronze valves and bronze valve components in direct contact
with steel, unless the bronze and steel are separated by a dielectric
insulator. Install bronze valves in steam and condensate service and in
other services where corrosion is indicated or can be expected to occur.
3.02 VALVE ENDS AND CONNECTIONS
A. Except as otherwise indicated, select and install valves with the following ends or
' types of pipe/tube connections:
.... 1. Pipe size 2" and smaller shall have threaded valves.
2. Pipe size 2-1/2" and larger shall have fianged valves.
3. Install threaded adapters at each valve and component such that the item
can be removed without the use of a torch. Unions at valves and
._ equipment shall be Elkhart 102M wrought copper, or equal.
_ 15100-3
3.03 TYPE REQUIREMENTS
A. If not specificall3, indicated or noted, install the following types of valves:
1. Install ball valves to comply with ANSI B31.
END OF SECTION
15100-4
SECTION 15251
INSULATION
-- PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
' 1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
"' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Installation of insulation of piping, equipment, ductwork as herein indicated.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
~ A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Fiberglass Insulation:
a. Owens-Coming Fiberglas
b. Schuller
' c. E.O. Wood
d. Certain Teed
e. Knauf
2. Elastomeric Insulation: Armstrong (Arma~ex)
3. Mastics:
a. Benjamin Foster
..... b. Insul-Coustic
c. Chicago Mastic
d. Childers Products
1.04 GENERAL
~
A. All materials shall be applied by workmen skilled in this trade. Mechanical
fasteners shall be used whenever possible to assure permanent construction.
-_ Unsightly work shall be cause for rejection.
B. Materials will be applied only after all surfaces have been tested and cleaned.
15251-1
C. All material shall be finished with surfaces having a maximum flame spread rating
of 25 under ASTM Method 84.
D. Non-compressible insulation material shall be installed at hangers of cold piping
to eliminate through metal conductance.
E. Sizing, paint, pipe shield or saddle, and internal duct insulation shall be provided
under other sections of Division 15.
F. Insulation of cold surfaces shall be vapor sealed.
G. Minimum thickness of insulation shall be as listed. However, sufficient insulation
shall be provided to eliminate condensation on the cold surfaces and to maintain
a maximum exterior insulation surface of 125°F (OSHA Standard) on the hot
surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE INSULATION
A. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Piping:
1. Owens/Coming Fiberglas 25ASJ/SSL or approved equal, one piece pipe
insulation (3 Ib/cu. ft. density) with all service jacket.
a. Insulation thickness shall be as follows:
1/2" Pipe - 1/2" Thick
3/4" - 1-1/2" Pipe - 1" Thick
2" and Larger Pipe - 1-1/'2" Thick
b. Use pre-formed PVC fining covers with fiberglass inserts.
Fiberglass shall be same densiD' as pipe insulation.
c. Where insulation is exposed to weather, use J-M Flame-Safe ML
or approved equal, Metal-Jacketed Fiberglass pipe insulation.
B. Drain Lines: All sections of condensate drain lines from air conditioning
equipment; P-traps and first 10'-0" of horizontal drain line at floor drains
receiving air conditioner drainage where such traps are above ceiling or finished
floors.
1. Armstrong "AP Arma~ex", or approved equal, flexible elastomeric pipe
insulation. Insulation shall be 1/2" thick.
15251-2
C. Refrigerant Suction and Hot Gas Piping:
' 1. Armstrong "AP Armaflex", or approved equal, flexible elastomeric pipe
insulation. Insulation shall be 3/4" thick.
' 2. Where insulation is exposed to weather, paint entire surface with 2 coats
UL Classified, Elastomeric finish, WB finish.
~' 2.02 DUCTWORK SYSTEMS
A. All un-lined supply, return air and outside air duct systems above ceilings shall be
insulated with 2" thick fiberglass flexible ductwrap with vapor barrier and all
joints and penetrations sealed. (Duct systems with less than 1" thick liner are to
be considered as un-lined.)
2.03 ADHESIVES
A. A water based, polymeric, UL classified lagging adhesive for applying canvas and
glass cloth; Foster 30-36 or Childers CP-50.
B. A fast setting, rubber based, UL classified, vapor barrier lap and attachment
adhesive; Foster 85-15 or Childers CP-85.
C. Same adhesive, except non-flarnmable when wet; Foster 85-20 or Childers CP-82.
D. A rubber based, UL classified, fast setting contact adhesive for adhering flexible
' elastomeric insulation; Armstrong 520.
2.04 DUCT SEALANTS
A. A fast setting, rubber based, UL classified, high velocit]..' duct sealer: Foster 32-14
or 3M EC-800.
B. Same sealer, except non-flammable when wet; Foster 30-02.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. Piping: Insulation shall be butted together and adhered in place with a contact
_ cement. Where possible tubing shall be slipped on without slitting. Where
insulation terminates, it shall be neatly bevelled and finished.
___ B. Ductwork:
1. Flexible fiberglass insulation shall be wrapped around ducts and secured
_ with outward clinching staples. Ducts 24" wide and larger shall have the
insulation additionally secured with stick clips on 18" centers or with 4"
15251-3
wide bands of adhesive applied on 18" cemers. Insulation shall be lapped
a minimum of 4" and all seams and penetrations shall be sealed with an
approved mastic reinforced with 3" glass mesh reinforcement. Where
insulation terminates, all raw glass shall be sealed to duct.
2. Flexible elastomeric insulation shall be adhered to clean, oil-free surface
by compression fit method and full coverage of 520 adhesive. Seal butt
joints with same adhesive. Apply same thickness on standing metal duct
seams as installed on the duct surface.
END OF SECTION
15251-4
SECTION 15371
-- REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 ELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The extent of refrigerant piping work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and
by the requirements of this section, and is hereby defined to include liquid and
vapor, both suction and discharge, piping of compressible refrigerant.
B. The types of refrigerant piping required include the following:
1. Low-pressure liquid piping to evaporator.
2. Vapor suction piping from evaporator.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ANSI Code Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI B31.5,
"Refrigeration Piping", and extend applicable lower pressure limits to pressures
below 15 psig.
B. Safety Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI B9.1, "Safety
Code for Mechanical Refrigeration".
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data, Refrigerant Piping: Submit manufacturer's data on refrigerant
' piping products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with the other sections for product requirements of piping
materials. For each service, provide the piping materials indicated including pipe,
_ tube, fittings, hangers, supports, anchors, valves and accessories. Where more than
one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option.
_ 15371-1
B. Materials: Provide products complying with ANSI B31.5 Code for Refrigeration
Piping, where type is not indicated.
C. Refrigerant Piping:
1. Tube: Copper tube of the size indicated.
a. Wall Thickness: Type L.
b. Fittings: Wrought copper solder-joint, made with Sil-Fos.
D. Refrigerant Piping: ACR (Air Conditioning and Refrigeration) tube, ASTM B280,
copper No. 122, hard-drawn temper except as otherwise indicated. '
2.02 REFRIGERANT PIPING PRODUCTS
A. General: Provide factory-fabricated piping products of the size and type
indicated. Where not otherwise indicated, provide products as determined b? the
Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types
matching piping and equipment connections.
B. Refrigerant Suction Line Filter-Drier: Provide steel shell, corrosion resistant
finished filter-drier, with molded felt core with 10 micron particle retention, in
size and working pressure indicated, with copper connectors, and access valve.
C. Evaporator Pressure Regulator: Provide corrosion resistant, spring loaded.
stainless steel springs, pressure operating, evaporator pressure regulator, in the size ...
and working pressure indicated.
2.03 PIPING ISOLATION PRODUCTS
A. Piping Isolators: Provide products complying with the applicable requirements of
other sections of the specifications. _
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INST.4&LATION OF PIPING SYSTEM
A. General: Comply with the requirements of other sections of these specifications
for installation of basic piping materials. Install piping products in accordance
with the manufacturer' s written instructions, the applicable requirements of ANSI
B31.5, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products
serve the intended function.
15371-2
3.02 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
-- A. General: Connect refrigerant piping to mechanical equipment in the manner
shown and comply with equipment manufacturer's instructions where not
otherwise indicated.
3.03 PIPING ISOLATION
' A. Install piping isolators in accordance with other sections of the specifications.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refrigerant Piping Leak Test: Prior to initial operation, clean and test refrigerant
_ piping in accordance with ANSI B31.5, Refrigerant Piping.
B. Repair or replace refrigerant piping as required to eliminate leaks, and retest as
_ specified to demonstrate compliance.
END OF SECTION
15371-3
SECTION 15401
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
]. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The extent of domestic water piping system work is indicated by drawings and
schedules, and by the requirements of this section.
_ B. The applications for domestic water piping systems include the following:
1. Domestic cold water piping
,_ 2. Domestic hot water piping
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Install piping to meet requirements of all applicable codes, latest edition.
-- B. Provide manufacturer's certification that materials meet or exceed minimum
requirements as specified.
-- PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE .~'qD PIPE FITTINGS
A. Water Piping System lines above grade and 2-1/2 inches and smaller:
~ 1. Copper Water Tube and Fittings:
a. Type L
' b. Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder Joint: 95 percent tin. 5 percent
antimony solder
15401-1
B. Water Piping System lines in or below slab and 2 inches and smaller:
1. Copper Water Tube and Fittings:
a. Type K, soft
b. Run continuous without joints or fittings
2.02 TRAP PRIMERS
A. Furnish and install trap primers and associated piping from cold water supply
source to floor drain trap. Trap primers shall be Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
(PPP, Inc.) Model No. PO-500 with Model SS-8 supply tube and DU-2, 3 or 4
distribution units as required. Install trap primers where they are accessible.
Furnish and install access doors where required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install the water supply system concealed above ceiling, in crawl space,
in pipe chases, in walls, and underground.
B. Piping System:
1. Cover: Install horizontal underground piping with not less than 24 inches
of cover. -
2. Pitch: Down at not less than 3 inches per 100 feet in direction of main
supply risers or to fixture connections to allow drainage of the system.
3. Clearances:
a. Maintain following minimum horizontal clearances between lines:
(1) Pipe 2 inches and smaller: 4 inches.
(2) Pipe 2-1/2 inches and larger: 12 inches.
(3) Other Services: 12 inches.
b. Maintain a minimum 1 inch vertical clearance between lines
crossing at an angle greater than 45 degrees.
4. Provide a stop valve in each supply at each fixture faucet and other water
connected device.
5. Use Central Plastics ground joint isolating unions where copper pipe
connects to iron or steel items.
15401-2
6. Install system shut-off valves and drain valves in a valve box, where
shown on the drawings, extending from grade to valve body, with a
minimum of 4 inches cover measured from finish grade to top of valve
stem. Box shall be concrete with a cast iron cover and frame. Box shall
be of sufficient size for installation and maintenance of valves. Cover
shall have cast-in letters for the word "WATER". Top of box shall be
installed flush with final grade.
C. Install trap primers in accord with manufacturer's instructions and Plumbing Code.
3.02 INSPECTION
A. Do not enclose or cover any work until it has been inspected, tested and accepted.
3.03 TESTING AND FLUSHING
A. Flushing:
1. After piping, risers, and valves are in place and connected, but prior to
_ installation of equipment and fixtures, thoroughly flush piping system
under a full head of water and drain system a minimum of two (2) times
with domestic cold water.
2. Maintain flushing for three (3) minutes through furthermost valve.
-- 3. After flushing, cap risers.
B. Testing: Conduct tests in presence of Architect/Engineer.
1. Pressure Test:
-- a. Hydrostaticall)' test piping system prior to installation of insulation,
equipment and fixtures.
-- b. Maintain a minimum test pressure of 125 psi (8.78 KGF/CM2)
without pumping for period of not less than two hours.
~ c. Test is acceptable if no leakage or loss of pressure is evident during
test period.
' d. Detect and repair leaks.
e. Retest the system until test pressure can be maintained for duration
of the test.
15401-3
C. Chlorination: Isolate and sterilize each piping system with a solution containing
not less than 50 parts per million available chlorine with retention in each system
for a minimum of eight (8) hours, at which time the system shall be flushed and --
drained until the residual chlorine contact is less than 0.2 parts per million.
Powdered chloride or liquid slurry shall be used in lieu of gaseous chlorine.
END OF SECTION '
15401-4
SECTION 15405
-- WASTE WATER PIPING SYSTEM
-- PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
-- 1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
~ 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The extent of waste water piping work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and
-- by the requirements of this section.
B. The applications for waste water piping include the following:
1. House drain piping
2. Vent stacks
3. Soil stacks
4. Combined soil and vent stacks
5. Lateral drain piping to stacks
6. Branch vent piping
7. Piping for drainage from plumbing fixtures
8. Sanitary floor drains
9. Waste-type floor drains
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Install piping to meet requirements of all applicable codes, latest edition.
B. Provide manufacturers' certification that materials meet or exceed minimum
' requirements as specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
' A. Waste Water System Lines Below Grade 1-1/2 Inches and Larger:
1. Cast Iron Soil. Waste and Sanitary Vent Pipe and Fittings: Service weight,
' bell and spigot, compression joint.
15405-1
B. Waste Water System Lines Above Grade 1-1/2 Inches and Larger:
1. Cast Iron Soil, Waste and Sanitary Vent Pipe and Fittings: Service weight,
bell and spigot, compression joint.
C. Air Conditioning Unit Condensate Drain Piping:
1. Copper Drainage Tube and Fittings: Drain, waste, vent copper, Type M
hard drawn temper, cast brass drainage fittings, 95/5 solder joint.
D. Cleanouts:
1. In Walls: Josam Series 58790 with chrome plated brass cover.
2. Floors: Josam Series 58200 adjustable type with polished nikaloy frame
and cover.
3. Grade: Josam Series 58500 with recessed square plug installed in concrete
block as detailed, top of block shall be flush with final finished grade.
E. At each drain provide cast iron deep seal P-trap.
F. Exposed pipe connections to waste stacks located in toilets and other occupied
spaces shall be chrome plated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Pitch:
1. Inside building and to a point five (5) feet beyond building: Down at a
uniform slope of not less than one-fourth (1/4) of an inch per foot or two
(2) percent toward the point of disposal.
2. Outside Building: Down at a uniform slope of not less than one-eighth
(1/8) of an inch per foot or one (1) percent toward the point of disposal.
B. Vent Termination: Waste water vents shall extend 15 inches above roof. Flash
waste water vents as instructed and as required by the manufacturer/supplier of
roofing system. Roof penetration shall also be in accord with codes. Flashing
base shall extend over the roof 12 inches from the stack. Dress or seal the
flashing for a rain-tight, leak-proof installation.
C. Waste water piping below grade shall have a grade cleanout installed at eveD'
change in direction.
15405-2
3.02 INSPECTION
-- A. Do not enclose or cover work until it has been inspected, tested and accepted.
3.03 TESTING AND FLUSHING
A. Testing: Conduct tests in presence of Architect/Engineer.
-- 1. Pressure Test: Upon completion of rough-in work and before fixtures and
traps are connected:
-- a. Hydrostatically test the piping system in place before backfilling or
enclosing.
-- b. Maintain a minimum test pressure of 15 feet head for period of not
less than two (2) hours.
_ c. Test is acceptable if no leakage or loss of pressure is evident during
test period.
_ d. Detect and repair all leaks.
e. Retest the system until test pressure can be maintained for duration
of the test.
2. Pressure Test: Upon completion of systems and before fixtures are
cormected:
a. Hydrostatically test the piping system in place by plugging all
outlets and filling the systems with domestic cold water to the top
of the highest pipes.
b. Maintain the test for a period of not less than four (4) hours
without drop in water level.
c. Test is acceptable if no leakage or loss of water is evident during
test period.
d. Detect and repair leaks.
e. Retest the system until test level can be maintained for duration of
the test.
B. Flushing: Flush floor drains with a minimum of ten (10) gallons of water to
assure that lines are not blocked.
-- END OF SECTION
15405-3
SECTION 15421
FLOOR DRAINS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
' 1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The extent of floor drain work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by the
requirements of this section.
-_ B. The types of drains required for the project including the following:
1. Waste-type floor drains
_ 2. Sanitary floor drains
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Provide products produced by one of the following:
_ 1. Josam Mfg. Co.
2. J.R. Smith Mfg. Co.
3. Tyler Pipe Co. (Wade)
- 4. Zurn Industries
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Floor Drains (Toilet Rooms and General): Provide vandal-proof floor drains, in
sizes indicated, with flashing collar, construction features as indicated, and
constructed of the following materials except as otherwise indicated; Josam
30000A, Wade W-1100, Zurn Z-415B:
1. Body: Cast iron.
2. Strainer Finish: Polished nickel bronze.
15421-1
2.02 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Flashing for Vent Stacks: Flashing for vents shall be as required by the metal
roofing system supplier and installer. Flashing shall also be in accord with code.
Extend stack 15" above roof.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Installer must examine the subsirate and conditions under which the drains are to
be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the '
proper completion of the work.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR DRAINS
A. Install floor drains in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and
in locations indicated.
B. Coordinate flashing work with work of roofing, waterproofing and adjoining
substrate work.
C. Install floor drains in the low points of the surface areas to be drained. Set tops
of drains flush with finished floor, except as otherwise shown.
D. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maimain integrity ofwaterproofmembranes, where penetrated.
E. Position drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain.
F. Connect pipe using threaded outlet and making water-tight.
3.03 PROTECTION AND TESTING
A. Protection: The Installer of the drains shall advise the Contractor of required
protection for the drains during the remainder of the construction period, to avoid
clogging with construction materials and debris, and to prevent damage from
traffic and construction work.
END OF SECTION
15421-2
SECTION 15424
DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
-- PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. A.O. Smith
2. Rheem-Ruud
3. State
_ B. Certif.ving Agency: Certified bv Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
C. Codes and Ordinances: Conform to requirements of ASME (American SocieD' for
_ Mechanical Engineers) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IV.
1.03 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee tank against discolored water or leakage due to corrosion for 5 years
from date of project acceptance.
B. Repair or replace all faulty' equipment within guarantee period.
- PART '~ PRODUCTS
2.01 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
A. HeaterType: Electric.
' B. Heater Style: Standard vertical, table top type.
C. Materials:
1. Tank: Welded steel.
2. Tank Lining: Porcelain enamel.
3. Outer Shell: Steel with baked on enamel fmish.
15424-1
4. Insulation: Blanket type glass fiber.
5. Cathodic Protection Anode: High density magnesium.
6. Base and Legs: Steel or cast iron.
D. Heaters to be free of:
1. Sharp edges.
2. Scratches on enameled surfaces.
3. Loose screws.
4. Loose panels.
5. Dents on outer jacket.
E: Service Conditions: As scheduled.
F. Electric Heat Source:
1. Heating Element and Operation: Immersion type.
2. Voltage: 208 volt, 60 Hz, single phase (verify with Electrical Contractor).
3. Cold water dip tube shall be copper. Plastic of any type is not acceptable.
G. Thermostat: 100°F-180°F water temperature range.
H. Drain Valve: Manufacmrer's standard drain valve on tank bottom or lower side
to completely drain tank.
I. Shop Tests: Each vessel shall be tested at one and one half times the working
pressure.
ACCESSORIES
A. Temperature limiting device to interrupt 120 volt control circuit in event water
temperature inside tank exceeds 205°F.
B. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve:
1. Tapping: 3/4 in. (min.) tapped connection in heater tank.
2. Valve: 3/4 in. (min.) American Society of Mechanical Engineers style
temperature and pressure relief valve.
3. Capacity and size of valve to relieve heater capacity at specified pressure
and temperature settings.
4. Settings:
a. Pressure Relief Setting: 150 psi.
b. Temperature Relief Setting: Nominally 210°F.
15424~2
C. Cathodic Protection: Rigidly supported anode rod in heater tank.
-- PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install heater, piping and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions.
B. Furnish and install drain pan as required by City Code.
3.02 TESTING AND FLUSHING
A. Flushing: After piping, valves and accessories are connected, but prior to start-up
and testing, flush heater unit under full system pressure.
B. Start-up and Testing:
1. Start-up: After flushing, drain heater tank, refill tank, and start-up unit in
accordance with manufacturer's operating instructions.
2. Operations Test:
a. Test heater unit after field adjustments have been made.
b. Retest until specification requirements have been met.
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
-- A. Adjust: Adjust thermostat to desired outlet water temperature.
B. Clean: Upon completion of testing and adjusting, clean parts of heater unit to
-- remove grease, sludge and foreign substances.
END OF SECTION
15424-3
SECTION 15450
-- PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers' products and materials noted in this section are listed to form a
standard of quality and type. Manufacturers of products of equal design and
function will be acceptable.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
_ 1. Kohler
2. American Standard
3. Crane
_ 4. Eljer
5. Sloan
6. Josam
-- 7. Bradley
8. Halsey-Taylor
9. Elkay
-- 10. Speakman
11. Haws
12. Zurn
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All fixtures shall be new, of current manufacturer and of the best of their re-
spective kinds. They shall be free of blemishes and discoloration. All fixture
surfaces in contact with walls, floors, etc., shall be ground truly fiat.
B. All directly exposed metal associated with fixtures including pipe, traps, bolts.
nuts, washers, etc., shall be stainless steel or chrome plated brass. Nuts exposed
to direct view shall be cap nuts (closed top) type leaving no screw threads
exposed.
15450-1
C. Submit data on plumbing fixtures.
2.02 AIR CHAMBERS
A. Each branch supply pipe to a fixture shall have a concealed vertical air chamber
to prevent water hammer. Air chambers shall be of same diameter as the fixture
supply pipe and extend 12" above the fixture runout.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.0 1 GENERAL
A. Plumbing fixtures shall be grouted at walls and floors to within 1/4" of surface
with fine dental plaster. Fill top 1/4" of joint with silicon white sealant. Polish
top of sealant and remove excess from fixture.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all fixtures and equipment _
during construction and shall deliver fixtures to Owner in perfect condition as to
appearance and operation at the conclusion of the project. The Contractor shall
cover fixtures as required for proper protection during construction. All fixtures
and trim shall be cleaned spotless for the final project examination and shall be
clean at time of Owner occupation.
C. Supply piping to all plumbing fixtures, hose bibbs, equipment, etc., shall be
anchored with "U" bolts and a steel angle at wall penetrations to prevent pipe
movement. Copper fittings connecting fixtures to service shall be "flared" type.
3.02 FIXTURE SUPPORTS
A. Contractor shall provide proper support for fixtures and piping. Wall hung fix-
tures not specified to be furnished with carriers shall be supported with angle iron
back-ups located inside chase or wall. Bolts shall extend through and be welded
to the angle and extend through wall to fixture hangers. Wall hung lavatories
shall have drilled bolt holes through lower skin and shall be additionally secured
by bolts through skirt into the angle iron back-up.
3.03 FIXTURE SCHEDULE
A. Refer to drawings for Plumbing Fixture Schedule.
END OF SECTION
15450-2
SECTION 15760
-- ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS
PART1-GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
' 1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish and install factory built, forced air electric heaters as manufactured by
Emerson, or approved equal.
B. Heater shall have capacities as scheduled.
C. Heater shall be hung from mounting brackets for either ceiling or wall swivel
mounting.
D. When equipment other than specified is proposed, the Contractor shall be
responsible for the proper design and installation of electrical power to equipment.
Submit listing of electrical feeder size, conduit size, breaker size, etc., for each
item of equipment to the Architect/Engineer for review.
E. Heater to be of the draw-thru air flow' design to eliminate element hot spots.
F. Heater shall have electric heating element automatic reset thermal overhear
protection, motor.
G. Heater shall be UL listed and meet the requirements of the National Electrical
Code.
H. Heater shall be furnished with remote mounted low voltage thermostat. Provide
transformer if required. Thermostat shall have a heavy du~' guard where
indicated.
I. Submit data on electric unit heaters and thermostat.
15760-1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION --
A. Except as otherwise indicated, install unit heaters, including components required,
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Locate each unit accurately in the position indicated in relation to other work.
Position unit with sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance,
includi. ng clearance for cabinet removal.
C. Level or pitch elements to the indicated tolerance. Install shims as required. '
D. Comb out damaged fins where bent or crushed before closing elements in cabinets.
E. Touch-up finish on each unit heater cabinet after final adjustments are made.
F. Verify operation of heater and controls.
END OF SECTION
15760-2
SECTION 15771
-- SPLIT SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING UNITS
-- PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 ELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
' 1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Furnish and install split system heating and cooling units as indicated on the
drawings, in schedules, and by the requirements of this section.
B. Units shall have indoor gas furnace or electric heater-blower unit and outdoor
condensing units.
_ C. Units shall be a complete package system with matched indoor and outdoor
components, all operating controls including room thermostat. Refer to controls
sections for detailed temperature control requirements.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
,_ A. Units shall be as manufactured by one of the following:
1. Lennox
-- 2. Carrier
3. Trane
4. York
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
' 2.01 SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMPS
A. Furnish and install an air-to-air electric heat pump (outdoor unit) in combination
' with a direct expansion fan-coil heat pump (indoor unit) in the location and
manner shown on the drawings. The units shall be designed and tested for use
with Refrigerant R-22. System shall be complete with all operating controls.
B. Total cooling and heating capaciD7 shall be equal to, or greater than scheduled
_ capacities.
15771-1
C. Outdoor units shall have the following features:
1. Heavy gage galvanized steel cabinet with baked on outdoor enamel finish.
2. Separate compressor and controls compartments.
3. Rugged steel outdoor coil guard.
4. Coils constructed of aluminum fins machine fined to copper tubes. Silver
soldered joints, pressure tested at 450-500 psi.
5. Outdoor coil fan shall be of rugged design and shall be easily accessible.
6. Hermetically sealed compressor, suction cooled, overload protected.
Compressors shall have crankcase heater. Running gear shall be spring
mounted within the sealed can. Compressor shall be installed on resilient
rubber mounts. Compressor shall have five year warranty, including parts
and labor.
D. Indoor units shall have the following features:
1. Coils shall be aluminum fins machine fitted to seamless copper tubes.
Coils shall be pressure tested at 450-500 psi. Joints shall be silver
soldered.
2. Blowers shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Motor shall be
resiliently mounted.
3. Entire blower section shall be easily removed from the cabinet.
4. Cabinet shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel with thick
fiberglass insulation.
5. Units shall have auxiliary electric heating coil with capacity as scheduled.
Auxiliary coil cabinet shall match the fan coil cabinet and shall have access
panels.
6. Drain pan and auxiliary drain pan shall be of rugged design and coated
with corrosion resistant material. Drain pan shall have two (2) drain line
connections.
7. 1" thick replaceable type filters and filter frame.
E. The system shall include the following:
1. Reversing valve factory installed and piped.
15771-2
2. Expansion valve specifically designed for heat pumps. Factory installed
and piped.
3. Suction line accumulator factory installed and piped.
4. High pressure switches factory installed and wired.
5. Factory installed dryer, check valve, Schrader fitting in suction and
discharge lines, and shut-off valves with gauge posts on the vapor and
liquid liner.
6. Demand defrost system factory set and calibrated.
7. Programmable room thermostat shall be equal to Honeywell Model
T7300/Q7300 with unbreakable clear plastic removable guard. Thermostat
shall be specifically designed for control of the heat pump system.
8. Timed-Off control to prevent compressor short cycling and to allow for
suction and discharge pressure to equalize. Automation reset control shall
shut compressor off and hold it off for 5 minutes.
9. Outdoor thermostat to allow' the heating load on the heat pump as long as
possible before allowing the auxiliary heating coil to come on the line.
F. Systems shall be in accordance with ARI Standard 240 Conditions and ARI
Standard 270 Conditions for sound.
G. System shall have controls on thermostat sub-base, timer. night setback thermostat,
outdoor thermostat, etc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF UNITS
A. Install units in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Start-up and initial adjustments of units shall be done by the manufacturer's
authorized service personnel.
C. When equipment other than specified is proposed, the Contractor shall be
responsible for the proper design and installation of electrical power to
equipment. Submit listing of electrical feeder size, conduit size, breaker size, etc.,
for each item of equipment to the Architect/Engineer for review.
END OF SECTION
15771-3
SECTION 15829
-- FANS
-- PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fans shall be as manufactured by one of the following:
1. Penn
2. Cook
3. Greenheck
4. Mars
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
_ 2.01 INLINE CABINET EXHAUST FANS
A. Furnish and install direct drive inline cabinet exhaust fans equal to Greenheck
-- Type CSP. Fans shall have capacities as scheduled.
B. Fans shall have acoustically insulated housings and shall have maximum sound
-- level rating as noted.
C. All fans shall bear the AMCA certified rating seal for air capacities and the UL
-- label.
D. Integral backdraft dampers shall be chatterproof.
E. Fans shall have centrifugal wheels with inlet perpendicular to. or remote from,
inlet grille.
F. Terminal box shall be provided with cord, plug and receptacle inside the housing.
G. Entire fan, motor and wheel assembly shall be removable without disturbing the
housing.
15829-1
H. Fan motor shall be suitably grounded and mounted On rubber-in-shear vibration
isolators.
I. Fans operating with objectional noise, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer,
shall be removed and replaced at Contractor's expense.
J. Fans shall be controlled by on/off switch.
2.02 CEILING EXHAUST FANS '
A. Furnish and install direct drive ceiling mounted exhaust fans equal to Greenheck
Type SP. Fans shall have capacities as scheduled. '
B. Fans shall have acoustically insulated housings and shall have maximum sound
level rating as noted.
C. All fans shall bear the AMCA certified rating seal for air capacities and the UL
label.
D. Integral backdraft dampers shall be chatterproof.
E. Fans shall have centrifugal wheels with inlet perpendicular to, or remote from,
inlet grille.
F. Grille shall be of aerodynamic design of white eggcrate shape and provide a
minimum of 85% flee open area.
G. Terminal box shall be provided with cord, plug and receptacle inside the housing.
H. Entire fan, motor and wheel assembly shall be removable without disturbing the
housing.
I. Motor speeds shall not exceed 1100 rpm and all fan motors shall be suitably
grounded and mounted on rubber-in-shear vibration isolators.
J.Fans operating with objectional noise, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer,
shall be removed and replaced at Contractor's expense.
K. Fans shall be controlled by on-off local switch.
2.03 FLY FAN
A.Furnish and install fly fans where indicated. Fans shall be as manufactured by
Mars Sales Co. Inc., or equal.
B. Fans shall be unheated, outdoor, weatherproof, wall mounted type, specifically
manufactured for installation over entrance doors of restaurants.
15829-2
C. Fans shall be UL listed.
-- D. Furnish micro switch for automatic on/off operation when door opens and closes.
E. Fans shall have a factor3, finish, color as selected by Architect/Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
' 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Fans shall be set on walls above entrance door as indicated. They shall be
' securely mounted. Fly fans shall be positioned above doors as directed by
manufacturer.
' B. When equipment other than specified is proposed, the Contractor shall be
responsible for the proper design and installation of electrical power to
__ equipment. Submit listing of electrical feeder size, conduit size, breaker size, etc.,
for each item of equipment to the Architect/Engineer for review.
END OF SECTION
15829-3
SECTION 15841
-- LOW VELOCITY METAL DUCTWORK
-- PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 ELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent:
1. The extent of low velocity metal ductwork is indicated on the drawings
_ and in the schedules, and by the requirements of this section.
2. Low velocity ductwork is hereby defined to include work with velocities
_ not exceeding 2000 fpm and static pressures not exceeding 2" w.g.
B. The types of ductwork specified in this section include, but are not necessarily
_ limited to the following:
1. Heating supply and return air systems
-- 2. Air conditioning supply and return air systems
3. Fresh air supply systems
-- 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Industry Standards:
1. Comply with SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'
National Association) recommendations for fabrication, construction and
' details, and installation procedures, except as otherwise indicated.
2. Comply with ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
' Air Conditioning Engineers) recommendations, except as otherwise
indicated.
_ 15841-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DUCTWORK MATERIALS --
A. Ductwork Metal and Gages:
1. Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from
galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, G90 zinc coating,
mill phosphatized. '
2. Gages, Ductwork: Fabricate steel ductwork (galvanized and stainless, if
any) from the following minimum gages for diameters and sizes up to the
corresponding maximum dimensions indicated:
Round Duct Rectangular Duct
26 gage up to 13" diameter 26 gage up to 12"
24 gage up to 22" diameter 24 gage 13" to 30"
3. Gages, Thicknesses, Weights: Comply with SMACNA "Low Velocity
Duct Construction Standards" for steel and aluminum sheets.
B. This Contractor shall furnish and install complete systems of ductwork shown,
including plenums, casings, splitters, extractors, dampers, etc. Unless otherwise
indicated or specified, ductwork and plenums shall be constructed of new
galvanized prime grade lock forming steel sheets.
C. Ducts and plenums shall be fabricated in accordance with the latest edition of the
ASHRAE Guide and SMACNA Manual. The Contractor shall present the
A.rchitect's representative with a copy of the SMACNA Manual at start of project.
D. All flat panels of ducts 12" and larger shall be crossbroken or machine beaded.
E. At each duct or plenum connection to heat pump units, or fans, provide a flexible
connection of Ventfabrics "Ventglass" (30 oz.) installed with sufficient slack to
render it flexible.
F. In each square elbow, provide airfoil pattern double thickness turning vanes.
Turning vanes shall be constructed in accordance with the SMACNA Manual.
G. At each low pressure ductwork branch from a low pressure duct and at each
sweeping elbow take-off to a grille or ceiling diffuser, provide a splitter damper
consisting of blade on a square operating rod fined with an adjusting device.
Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, the adjusting devices located in finished
ceilings shall be Ventfabrics, Inc., No. 666, with the adjusting device securely
fastened to the furring and ceiling and cover shall be painted to match ceiling.
15841-2
Where splitters occur above removable ceiling, the damper quadrant shall be above
the ceiling against the duct and shall be Ventfabrics, Inc., No. 637.
H. Each individual air ceiling diffuser, shall be fined with a device to permit the
adjustment of the amount of air supplied to the unit independent of any other
-- outlet. These devices may take the form of outlet boots with extractors, or of
branch ducts with splitter dampers, as installation conditions dictate, but in any
case, each shall be fined with a means of manual adjustment of the amount of air
' delivered to the outlet.
I. Where internal acoustical lining is indicated on the drawings, the duct sizes shown
' have allowed for the lining thickness.
J. install flexible ductwork as indicated on the plans. Install flexible ductwork such
' that continuous bends do not exceed 90° and bend radius is no less than 3D.
1. Low pressure flexible duct shall conform to the Class 1 requirements of the
National Fire Protection Association. A nominal 1" thickness of fiberglass
insulation shall be enclosed in a factory applied and sealed vapor barrier
_ jacket. Insulated flexible duct shall be Thermaflex Type M-KE
manufactured by the Flexible Tubing Corp. Flexible duct shall be installed
per manufacturer's recommendations. All joints and connections shall be
_ made with positive locking steel straps. Flexible ductwork shall conform
to mechanical code.
_ K. Provide Young 1100, or equal, instrument test ports in each supply duct, in each
coil discharge plenum, in mixed air plenum, and in return duct at fan and coil
units.
2.02 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS
-- A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of the types and sizes
indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to
comply with ductwork system requirements including proper connection of
-- ductwork and equipment.
B. Duct Liner: Flexible acoustical insulating liner shall be Manville Linacoustic 1.5
-- lb. per cu. ~. density with permacote facing meeting ASTM C1071. The liner
shall not support microbial growth as determined by tests in accord with ASTM
1071 and ASTM G21/G22.
C. Duct Sealant: Non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant (type
applicable for the fabrication/installation detail) as compounded and recommended
' by the manufacturer specifically for sealing joints and seams in ductwork.
15841-3
D. Ductwork Support Materials:
1. Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized steel
fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork.
2. For aluminum ductwork, provide aluminum support materials except where
materials are electrolitically separated from ductwork.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate rectangular ductwork with joints, seams and reinforcements as indicated,
complying with SMACNA "Low- Velocity Duct Construction Standards".
B. Fabricate round ductwork with girth joints and girth reinforcements as indicated,
complying with SMACNA ,'Low Velocity Duct Construction Standards".
1. Provide girth joints of the following types (type is fabricator's option
where more than one type is indicated):
a. Continuously welded
b. Flanged
c. Beaded sleeve
C. Duct Fittings:
1. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct
requirements as applicable to fittings.
2. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with center-line radius
equal to associated duct width.
3. Fabricate to include turning vanes in elbows where shorter radius is
necessary.
4. Limit angular tapers to 15 degrees.
D. Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest
extent possible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK
A. General:
1. Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with SMACNA "Low
Velocity Duct Construction Standards", which will achieve air tight and
15841-4
noiseless systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install
each run with a minimum of joints.
2. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misatignment
tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth.
3. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of the
type which will hold ducts true-to-shape and will prevent buckling.
4. Complete fabrication of work at the project as necessary to match shop
fabricated work and accommodate installation requirements.
B. Locations and Runs:
1. Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and
horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible.
2. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and notations or, if not
otherwise indicated, run ductwork in the shortest route which does not
_ obstruct usable space or block access servicing the building and its'
equipment.
_ 3. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns. and other
structural and permanent-enclosure elements of the building.
-- 4. Limit clearance to 0.5" where furring is shown for enclosure or
concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any.
-- 5. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1.0" clearance outside of
insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal
ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall
-- construction or above suspended ceilings.
6. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically
-- shown.
7. Coordinate the layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and
' similar finished work.
C. Penetrations Through Walls and Partitions:
1. Conceal the space between the construction opening and the duct or duct-
plus-insulation with sheet metal flanges of the same gage as the duct.
2. Overlap the opening on all sides by at least 1-1/2".
_ 15841-5
3. At mechanical rooms, caulk the flange to the wall and stuff compressed
mineral fiber insulation into the space between duct and flange.
D. Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil flames,
equipment, controls and other associated work of the ductwork system.
E. Support ductwork from building structure as required and, where not otherwise
indicated, anchor with bolts, concrete inserts, steel expansion anchors, welded
studs, C-clamps or special beam clamps. '
F. Support for Horizontal Ducts:
1. Support ducts located against structural walls and other similar adjacent
vertical surfaces, at 8'-0" spacing for ducts up to 40" horizontal dimension
and 4'-0" spacing for larger ducts. '
a. Where width is less than height, support duct with 1 - 1/2" x 16 gage
straps.
b. Where width is more than height, support duct with shelf-type _
fabricated angle brackets of the following sizes:
Up to 18" duct width; 1" x 1" x 1/8" angle brackets _
Over 18" duct width; 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" angle brackets
2. Hang other horizontal rectangular ducts from overhead structure. at 10'-0" _
spacing for duct widths up to 60" and 8'-0" spacing for larger ducts.
a. Support ducts directly with 1" x 16 gage straps for ducts up to 60" _
width, and with 1-1/2" x 12 gage straps for ducts up to 96" width.
bolted or screwed to ductwork.
b. Support ducts with trapeze-type hangers with horizontal angle
members and vertical support members of the sizes indicated for
the corresponding duct sizes (long-side dimension): --
Up to 30" size; 1" x 1" x 1/8" angle and 1" x 18 gage strap
or 1/4" diameter hanger rods. '
G. Horizontal Round Ducts:
1. Hang with encircling strap and strap hanger (of same size); except for sizes
over 50" in diameter, install a pair of strap hangers bolted to opposite sides
of angle reinforcing rings or flanged joints.
15841-6
2. Support ducts at 10'-0" spacing with hangers as follows for the
corresponding duct diameters:
Up to 30" diameter; 1" x 16 gage strap hanger
3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Cleaning:
1. Clean ductwork internally, unit-by-unit as it is installed, of dust and debris.
' 2. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive
deterioration of the metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might
interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration.
B. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or
air distribution devices at the time of ductwork installation, provide temporary
closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent the entrance of
dust and debris until the time connections are to be completed.
3.03 All duct penetrations through wails'forming air plenums shall have sheet metal flange to
seal opening. Seal gap between flange and wall with polysulphide sealant.
3.04 All horizontal ductwork exhausting warm humid air shall have the seams sealed watertight
with EC800 and imbedded glass fabric tape. Install ducts to slope toward outlets or
_ intakes for drainage.
END OF SECTION
15841-7
SECTION 15860
-- DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
' A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The extent of ductwork accessories work is shown on drawings and by the
_ requirements of this section.
B. The types of ductwork accessories required for the project include the following:
1. Extractors.
9 Turning vanes.
_ 3. Splitter dampers.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Unless otherwise indicated, comply with latest SMACNA recommendations
pertaining to construction of ductwork accessories.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
-- 2.01 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Provide ductwork accessories and ductwork materials as required by applicable
-- sections of Division 15. Except as otherwise indicated for each ductwork
accessory, provide metal type, gauge thickness, weight, construction and
reinforcing as required by size limitations, and applicable SMACNA standards,
' including fittings, supports, and appurtenances.
2.02 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Provide turning vanes in the size and type indicated with the following additional
construction features:
1. Blades: 2" galvanized steel for up to and including 18" ducts.
2. Construction: Double wall blade.
3. Types: Fixed blades for 90 degree elbows.
15860-1
B. Provide extractors in the size and type indicated, with hex-key operated adjustable
blades, with the following additional construction features:
1. Blades: Gang operated aluminum on 1" centers.
C. Provide splitlet dampers in the size and type indicated, equipped with rod type --
control with end bearings on exposed and accessible ductwork.
D. Flexible Duct Connectors: '
1. Provide sound and vibration flexible duct connectors on the inlet and outlet
of each fan and/or fan housing to which ductwork or plenum connections '
are made.
2. Material:
a. Flexible duct connectors, except those exposed to the weather, shall
be Ventfabrics "VENTGLAS" Neoprene coated glass fabric.
b. Flexible duct connectors, exposed to the weather, shall be _
Ventfabrics "VENTLON" Hypalon coated glass fabric.
3. Flexible duct connector shall be 6" wide with at least 1" of slack to insure _
that no vibration is transmitted.
4. Flexible connector shall be either folded in with the metal or attached with _
metal collar frames to provide an airtight installation capable of
withstanding the system pressures.
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS
A. Provide miscellaneous materials for ductwork accessories, including, hinges, --
refrigerator latches, sash locks, bolts and wing nuts, gaskets, and pilot tubes as
recommended by the ductwork accessories manufacturer for the application
indicated. '
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories '
are to be installed and notif.v the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental
to the proper and timely completion of the work. _
15860-2 _
3.02 INSTALLATION
-- A. Comply with the requirements of other sections of the specifications for
installation of ductwork materials. Install ductwork products in accordance with
the manufacturer' s written instructions, with applicable portions of the details of
' construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized
industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended function.
B. Install access doors so that the doors open against the system air pressure wherever
feasible, and their latches are operable from either side except where the duct is
too small to be entered.
C. Coordinate work with ductwork installer.
3.03 TESTING
_ A. Check installed ductwork accessories for required operation and leakage during the
system's operational test. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to
obtain proper operation and leakproof performance.
_ END OF SECTION
_ 15860-3
SECTION 15867
-- AIR DIFFUSERS
-- PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Titus
_ 2. Tuttle and Bailey
3. Krueger
4. Carries
_ 5. Anemostat
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Furnish and install air diffusers as indicated on the drawings and herein specified. All
units shall be constructed to have a neat, well-made appearance. Grille framework shall
-- be rigidly constructed; flange corners shall be mitered and supported for a hairline crack.
All face bars shall be of heavy gauge metal to adequately resist bending or twisting and
fit tightly and closely within the framework. The units shall have a neck to slip inside
-- ductwork for an airtight noiseless connection. Units not meeting the above specifications
shall be rejected at the jobsite.
-- 2.02 It is this Contractor's responsibility to check the architectural drawings to supply the
proper air diffusers and adapting framework for the type of construction at each outlet.
The frame shall be of the same finish as the unit and be of a configuration the
' manufacturer recommends for the construction involved. The outlets shall fit the
construction with no additional expense to the Owner. All registers and grilles shall have
a separate mounting frame in gypsum board walls and ceilings.
2.03 The manufacturer furnishing the air diffusers shall verify sizes against cfm requirements
for each device to get the intended throw and be without objectionable noise when the
device is applied to the system. He shall coordinate any approved differences from the
drawings with the Contractor. It shall be the Contractor' s responsibility to furnish proper
_ framework, boots and install the devices approved.
15867-1
2.04 All return and discharge air diffusers shall be installed in the same configuration; i.e., all
return grilles, shall be mounted to have prominent bars horizontal.
2.05 Return grilles in corridors and other areas subject to damage shall be constructed with
1/8" thick bar louvers supported on 6" center.
2.06 Supply units shall have a volume control device at locations where more than one unit is
connected to the same supply duct unless otherwise noted in the schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Units located in surfaces having a factory finish shall be painted off-white. Units without '
plating shall be coated with rust-proofing primer. Plated units shall be covered with a
thick coat of plating for a complete dense coat. Check other sections of the General and
Mechanical specifications to determine if painting of wall and ceiling units is to be done
by another Contractor.
3.02 The Contractor shall furnish the air diffusers as scheduled.
3.03 The Contractor shall install all air diffusers securely, true and plumb. All screw holes _
shall have screws in them.
END OF SECTION
15867-2
SECTION 15950
-- HVAC CONTROL SEQUENCE
-- PART 1-GENERAL
1.01 ELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Control sequence is hereby defined to mean the manner in which, and methods by
which, the temperature controls function. The requirements for each type of
operation are specified in this section.
B. The operating equipment, devices, and system components required for the
automatic temperature control system are specified by Section 15904 of these
_ specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 HEAT PUMP UNITS
-- A. Wall mounted programmable heating and cooling room thermostat shall control
the indoor and outdoor units to maintain setpoint temperature.
-- B. Thermostat feature shall allow indoor unit fan to cycle with unit operation (auto)
or to operate continuously (on).
-- C. Thermostat shall have a night override program to operate heating to maintain a
minimum temperature of 60°F.
' D. System shall have outdoor thermostat to maintain the heating load on the heat
pump as long as possible before allowing the auxiliary heat to come on.
' 2.02 EXHAUST FANS
A. Control shall be from space thermostat or from wall switch as indicated. Provide
switches with "on" pilot lights where so indicated.
15950-1
2.03 FLY FAN
A. Fan shall be coreroiled on-off from micro switch on door. --
2.04 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATER
A. Thermostat shall start and stop heater to keep temperature above setpoint
temperature.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
15950-2
SECTION 15953
-- HVAC TEST-ADJUST-BALANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 ELATED DOCUMENTS
' A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The extent of test-adjust-balance (TAB) work is indicated by the requirements of
this section, and also by drawings and schedules, and is defined to include, but is
not necessarily limited to, air distribution systems, hydronic distribution systems
and associated equipment and apparatus of HVAC work. The work consists of
_. setting speed and volume (flow) adjusting facilities provided for the systems,
recording data, conducting tests, preparing and submitting reports, and
recommending modifications to the work as required by the contract documents.
B. The component types of testing, adjusting and balancing specified in this section
include the following as applied to HVAC equipment:
1. Fans
2. Air conditioning units
-- 3. Ductwork systems
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: A firm certified by the National Environmental Balancing Bureau
(NEBB) in those testing and balancing disciplines similar to those required for this
-- project and who is also original Installer of system to be tested.
B. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE (American Society of Heating,
' Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.) recommendations pertaining
to measurements, instruments and testing, adjusting and balancing, except as
otherwise indicated.
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Readiness for TAB work:
. 1. Do not proceed with testing, adjusting and balancing work until the work
to be TAB'ed has been completed and is operable.
15953-1
2. Ensure that there is no latent residual work still to be completed.
3. Do not proceed until the work scheduled for TAB'ing is clean and free --
from debris, dirt and discarded building materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS --
2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS
A.Except as otherwise indicated, use same products as used by original Installer for
patching holes in insulation, ductwork and housing which have been cut or drilled
for test purposes, including access for test instruments, attaching jigs, and similar '
purposes.
B. At Tester's option, use plastic plugs with retainers to patch drilled holes in
ductwork and housings.
2.02 TEST INSTRUMENTS
A. Utilize test instruments and equipment for the TAB work required, of the type,
precision and capacity as recommended in the following TAB standards:
1. NEBB's Procedural Standards for Testing-Adjusting-Balancing of _
Environmental Systems.
PART 3 ~ EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine the installed work and conditions under which testing is to be done to
ensure that work has been completed, cleaned and is operable. Noti~' the
Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the
test-adjust-balance work. Do not proceed with the TAB work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Tester.
3.02 TAB PROCEDURE
A. Standards: Test, adjust and balance the environmental systems and components, '
as indicated, in accordance with the procedures outlined in the applicable
standards.
B. Seasonal TAB:
1. Test, adjust and balance system during the summer for air conditioning
systems and during winter for heating systems, including at least a period
15953-2
of operation at outside conditions within 5 degrees F. wet bulb temperature
of maximum summer design condition, and within 10 degrees F. dry bulb
-- temperature of miramum winter design condition.
2. When seasonal operation does not permit measuring the final temperatures
'~ then take the final temperature readings when the seasonal operation does
permit.
' C. Prepare report of test results, including instrumentation calibration reports, in
format recommended by the applicable standards.
' D. Patch holes in insulatic~n, ductwork and housings, which have been cut or drilled
for test purposes, in a manner recommended by the original Installer.
E. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan
speed control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings at
_. completion of TAB work. Provide markings with paint or other suitable
permanent identification materials.
END OF SECTION
15953-3
ELECTRICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
16040 General Requirements for Electrical Work 16040-1 - 4
16050 Basic Materials and Methods 16050-1 - 5
16053 Electrical Standards and Symbols 16053-1 - 3
16054 Project Closeout 16054-1 - 3
16055 Submittal Data 16055 - 1 - 3
16056 Electrical Identification 16056-1 - 4
16059 Electrical Testing and Load Balancing 16059-1 - 2
16110 Raceways, Conduits and Boxes 16110-1 - 8
16120 Cable, Wire and Connectors, 600 Volt 16120-1 - 5
16121 Electrical Connections to Equipment 16121 - 1 - 3
16140 Wiring Devices 16140-1 - 4
16164 Branch Circuit Panelboards 16164-1 - 3
16170 Motor and Circuit Disconnects 16170-1 - 2
16450 Grounding 16450-1 - 3
16510 Lighting Fixtures 16510-1 - 4
16930 Lighting Control Equipment 16930-1 - 2
SECTION 16040
-- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
.02 BASIC REQUIREMENTS
A. In accordance with the Conditions of the Contract, each Electrical Contractor
executing work in Division 16 is acting in the capacity of a sub-contractor.
However, throughout Division 16, the electrical sub-contractor is hereinafter
referred to as the Contractor.
B. The Contractor is duly bound to all applicable requirements of the prime Contractor
as stipulated in the Conditions of the Contract.
C. The Contractor shall execute all work hereinafter specified or indicated on
accompanying drawings, and provide equipment and labor as required in connection
with his work and systems.
.03 SITE INSPECTION
A. Contractor shall visit the site and verify. the following:
1. Items shown or indicated as "existing" on the drawings, including structures,
trees, utilities, obstructions, etc.
Work conditions.
-- 3. Hazards.
4. Soil grades and conditions.
B. Acceptance of a contract shall be deemed as evidence that the site visit has been
made and that the Contractor has familiarized himself with the conditions noted
' above.
16040-1
1.04 PERMITS, UTILITY CONNECTIONS AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all required utility connections, meters and
meter boxes, utility extensions and/or relocations.
B. Other miscellaneous fees related to permits and utilities shall be paid by the
Contractor and shall be included in the Bid.
1.05 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The specifications and accompanying drawings indicate plans and details showing
installations and locations of equipment, conduit, outlets, fixtures, etc. Due to the
intricacies of construction it is impractical to specify or indicate every detail; in such
cases the current rules of good construction practices and applicable specifications
shall govern.
B. If departures from the drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of
such proposed departures shall be made to the Architect/Engineer in writing. Each
request shall state reasons and recommended correction for proposed departure. No
departure shall be made without prior written approval of the Architect/Engineer.
C. The Contractor shall familiarize himself with all drawings and specifications and
properly use information found on the Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and
Electrical drawings and specifications affecting his work.
D. The electrical power circuits shown on the drawings to items of mechanical -,
equipment may or may not be the correct size to serve the equipment to be installed
by the HVAC and/or Plumbing Contractors. The Electrical Contractor shall obtain
from the HVAC and Plumbing Contractors the exact power requirements for each
item of mechanical equipment before any circuit breakers, disconnects, power
wiring, conduit, etc., have been purchased or installed. Correct power wiring to
serve the installed mechanical equipment items shall be provided at no additional
cost to the Owner.
E. Dimensional information pertaining to new work in the structure shall be taken from
the appropriate drawings. Dimensional information pertaining to existing
conditions and outside the structure shall be made by the Contractor on the site.
F. Should the drawings or specifications disagree within themselves, or with each
other, the better quality or greater quantity of work or materials shall be performed
or fumished at no additional cost to the Owner.
G.' Interrelation of the specifications and drawings and schedules is as follows:
1. Specifications determine type and installation of material.
2. Drawings establish location, quantities, dimensions and details.
3. Schedules establish performance characteristics of equipment.
16040-2
H. Dimensions indicated on drawings govern scaled measurements. Large scale details
govern small scale drawings.
1.06 SPACE AND EQUIPMENT
~' A. The size of electrical equipment indicated on the drawings is based on the
dimensions of the equipment by the manufacturer indicated on the drawings or
specifications. Other manufacturers may be acceptable in some cases if equal in
' design and function. Other manufacturers are specifically noted in each section.
B. It is the responsibili~' of the Contractor to determine if equipment proposed to be
furnished will fit in the allotted space.
C. Contractor shall prepare and famish detailed installation drawings indicating
arrangement and installation of proposed equipment, and submit to
Architect/Engineer for approval. Approval, in writing, shall be obtained before
_. ordering equipment.
1.07 SUPERINTENDENT
A. It shall be the responsibility of each superintendent to study all Contract Documents
and familiarize himself with the work to be done by other trades. The
,. superintendent shall coordinate his work with other trades and before material is
fabricated or installed, make sure that his work will not cause any interference that
cannot be resolved without major changes to the Contract Documents.
1.08 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY
-- A. Contractor shall guarantee all work. labor and materials, for a period of one year
from date of substantial completion or beneficial occupancy in accordance with the
Conditions of the Contract.
B. Refer to individual sections of the specifications for guarantees which may be
required in addition to the above-specified one-year guarantee.
1.09 PROJECT OBSERVATION
' A. Project observation by the Architect/Engineer is for the express purpose of verifying
compliance by the Contractor with the Contract Documents, and shall not be
construed as construction supervision nor indication of approval of the manner in
;" which the work is being performed.
1.10 FINAL OBSERVATION
A. The Architect/Engineer will make a final observation of the project in accordance
.... with the Conditions of the Contract.
16040-3
B. Before calling upon the Architect/Engineer to make a 'final observation, it shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor to personally make a detail observation of the
complete project assuring himself that the Work on the project is ready for final
acceptance.
C. Contractor shall comply with all requirements of Project Closeout before receiving
final acceptance of the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
160404 _
SECTION 16050
-- BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
_, A. Unless otherwise specified, materials are to be new and of current U.S. manufacture,
free from defects and of the best quality of their respective kinds.
B. Equipment and/or materials damaged in shipment or handling, or otherwise
damaged before installation, shall be replaced with new equipment and/or
materials. Damaged equipment and/or materials shall not be repaired m the jobsite.
C. Furrushing of the proper equipment and/or materials and to see that it is installed as
recommended by the manufacturer is entirely the responsibiliD, of the Contractor. If
* required for proper installation, the Contractor shall obtain advice and supervisoD'
assistance from a representative of the specific manufacturer of the equipment being
installed.
D. Materials and adhesives to conform to Federal Standard Flame-Spread Properties.
Inc., with composite fire and smoke hazard ratings, maximum 25 for flame spread
and 50 for smoke developed. Adhesives to be waterproof.
E. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of any
-- conflict between the requirements of the Contract Documents and the
manufacturer's directions and shall obtain the Architect/Engineer's instructions
before proceeding with the work. Should the Contractor perform any such work
- that does not comply with the manufacturer's directions or such instructions from
the Architect/Engineer, he shall bear all costs arising in connection with the
deficiencies.
1.03 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
A. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to provide an installation complete in
every respect. If additional work is required for Work indicated or specified, it shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide same as well as to provide material
and equipment usually famished with such systems or as required to complete the
installation.
16050-1
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for placing his material and equipment into the
building and shall carefully lay out his work in the project to conform to the
structural conditions, to avoid all obstructions, to conform to the details of the
installation supplied by the manufacturer of the equipment to be installed and
thereby provide an integrated, satisfactotily operating installation.
C. Investigate structural and finish conditions and coordinate all work with the various
trades to avoid interferences between the different phases of Work. Harmonize
work so that it may be installed in the most direct and workmanlike manner without
hindering or handicapping each other.
D. Unless specifically noted to be exposed, lay out work in finish portions of the
building so that it will be concealed.
E. Lay out work as required to avoid crippling of structural members. Inserts for
conduit hangers are to be set before concrete is poured. Provide and properly lay
out sleeves in concrete for penetrating conduits. Hold conduits as tight to structure
as possible.
F. Lay out and install equipment as required to provide convenient and safe
maintenance and access for future replacement as well as providing easy access to
removable access panels and junction boxes.
1.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Contractor shall provide the required protection of equipment and materials from
the time of delivery until the completion of the Work. Protect from damage, rest,
rain, humidity' and dust.
B. Do not receive equipment or materials on the job site until adequate space has been
provided for storage.
C. Provide adequate supports for protection from the ground and erect required shelters
for items stored in the open.
D. Items stored within the building are to be adequately protected and covered with
tarpaulins or other protective coveting.
E. Protect the building at all times during construction from damage by workmen, their
tools and/or equipment. Protect floors, steps, wall, ceilings, doors, windows and
other firash surfaces.
F. Equipment and materials found in a rusty condition at completion of the work shall
be thoroughly cleaned of rust and refinished as required to its original condition.
16050-2
1.05 PRECEDENCE OF MATERIALS
" A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of his equipment and
material into the allotted spaces in the structure so as to provide complete and
acceptable systems.
B. To prevent a conflict in space requirements, the following order of precedence, in
general, shall be observed.
]. Building lines
2. Structural members
3. Soil and drain piping
4. Vent piping
., 5. Refrigerant piping
6. Condensate piping
7. Supply ductwork
8. Exhaust ductwork
9. Domestic hot and cold water piping
10. Electrical conduit
1.06 LOCATION OF OUTLETS AND EQUIPMENT
_ A. The drawings show the locations of the various outlets and equipment. Exact
locations of these outlets and equipment shall be determined by reference to the
general construction plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings,
roughing-in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation
with the other trades.
B. At the Owner's option, devices and outlets as listed below may be relocated at no
additional cost to the Owner.
-- C. Lighting fixtures, convenience outlets, floor outlets, telephone outlets may, at the
Owner's option, be relocated to a point within 10 feet of the location indicated on
the drawings, at no additional cost to the Owner, provided the Contractor is advised
-- of this relocation before roughing-in begins.
D. The Contractor shall install his work complete and in good working order. If any of
' the requirements of the drawings and specifications are impossible to perform, or if
the installation when made in accordance with such requirements will not perform
satisfactorily, he shall report same to the Architect/Engineer for correction.
No extra compensation will be allowed for extra work or change caused by failure
to comply with the above requirements.
1.07 ROOF PENETRATIONS
A. Conduit penetrating the roof shall be installed as directed by roofing
supplier/installer and shall be compatible with roofing system.
_ 16050-3
1.08 LOCKING OF ELECTRICAL FACILITIES
A. Provide padlocks or lockable latches for electrical facilities subject to unauthorized
enu% such as panelboards, switchboards, transformers, generators, etc.
B. Furnish locks to match existing locking system. Key all locks alike.
C. Furnish Owner with two keys per lock up to a quantity of ten keys.
D. Install locks immediately upon installation of electrical facility.
1.09 ELECTRIC METERING UTILITY
A. Veri~...' all standard practices of the electric utility company and requirements for
electric metering and provide metering to conform to the requirements.
B. Furnish necessary labor to install all equipment supplied by the electric utility
company and furnish and install other materials and equipment as required.
1.10 ELECTRIC SERVICE FOR TESTING
A. Install sufficient temporary electric service to refrigeration machines, related pumps,
fans and all fan and coil units so that the refrigeration system may begin testing 30
working days before job completion date.
B. Notify the electric utility company at least 60 working days before job completion
deadline of the need for the service. If for any reason the power company indicates
that service will not be available when needed. notiS; the Architect/Engineer in
writing.
1.11 CLEANING AND PREPARATION OF ITEMS FOR PAINTING
A. Refer to Division 9 Sections for painting requirements.
B. Thoroughly clean all parts of materials and equipment of cement, plaster, and other
materials. All oil and grease spots shall be removed.
C. Thoroughly clean the finish on all parts of the materials and equipment with factor5.:
applied finishes. If the factory finish or if any job applied painted finished surface
has been damaged, the surfaces shall be repainted by this Contractor to the
satisfaction of the Owner's Designated Representative.
D. No nameplates on equipment shall be painted, and suitable protection shall be
afforded to the plates to prevent their being rendered illegible during the painting
operation.
16050-4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
_. 16050-5
SECTION 16053
-- ELECTRICAL STANDARDS AND SYMBOLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1,02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes, Associations and Standards: Local governing codes and authorities, trade
association standards and publications are an extension of the contract documents,
and are hereby imposed as applicable to the work in each instance. In general, each
~., manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, and installer of electrical work is recognized as
an expert to be completely familiar with the standards and publications applicable to
his portion of the work. Therefore, copies have not been bound with these
_ specifications.
1. Where local codes, ordinances, rules or authorities conflict with associations
!_ and standards listed hereinafter, the local ordinances, codes, rules or
authorities take precedence.
_ 2. Obtain copies of trade association standards and publications, wherever
needed for proper execution of the work.
-- 3. Comply with the issue of applicable standard or publication which is in
effect at the date shown on these contract documents.
~ 4. Where application of a trade association standard or publication appears to
be in conflict with the requirements of the contract documents, the
Architect/Engineer will determine which must be complied with, and in
- general the more stringent will be required for the performance of the
electrical work.
1.03 LISTING OF ASSOCIATIONS AND STANDARDS
A. AASHTO: American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials,
' 444 N. Capitol; Washin~on, DC 20001
_. B. AISC: American Institute of Steel Construction, One East Wacker Drive, Suite
3100; Chicago, IL 60601
16053-1
C. AISI: American Iron and Steel Institute, ll01 17th Street N.W., Suite 1300;
Washington, DC 20036
D. ANSI: American National Standards Institute (Successor to USASI and ASA), 11
West 42nd Street; New York, NY 10036
E. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials, 100 Barr Harbor Drive; West
Conshohocken, PA 19428
F. AWPA: American Wood Preservers Institute, 2750 Prosperity Avenue, Suite 550;
Fairfax, VA 22031-4312
G. AWS: American Welding Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Road; Miami, FL 33126
H. BOCA: Building Officials and Code Administrators
I. CBM: Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association, 355 Lexington Avenue, 17th
Floor; New York, NY 10017-6603
3. COE: Corps of Engineers (Army)
K. ETL: Electrical Testing Laboratories
L. FM: Factory Mutual System, 1151 Boston-Providence Tumpike; Norwood, MA
02062 -9102
M. FS: Federal Specifications
N. IEEE: Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers, 445 Hoes Lane, P. O. Box
1331; Piscataway, NJ 08855-1331
O. ICEA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, P. O. Box 440; South Yarmouth,
MA 02664
P. MIL: Military, Specifications
Q. NEC: National Electrical Code (NFPA No. 70), 1 Batterymarch Park, P. O. Box
9101; Quincy, MA 02269-9101
R. NECA: National Electrical Conlxactors Association, Inc., 3 Bethesda Metro Center,
Suite 1100; Bethesda, MD 20814
S. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association, 1300 North 17th Street,
Suite 1847; Rosslyn, VA 22209
T. NESC: National Electrical Safety Code (ANSI C2)
16053-2
U. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association, 1 Batterymarch Park, P. O. Box 9101;
Quincy, MA 02269-9101
V. OSHA: Occupational Safety & Health Administration CU.S. Dept. of Labor),
Govemment Printing Office; Washington, DC 20402
W. SBCCI: Southern Building Code Congress International, 900 Monteclair Road;
Birmingham, AL 35213-1206
X. UBC: Uniform Building Code, 900 Monteclair Road; Birmingham, AL 35213-
1206
Y. UL: Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., 333 Pfingsten Rd.; Northbrook, IL 60062
1.04 ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
A. The electrical contract drawings, and the Architect/Engineer's detail sheets if any,
are diagrammatic and show requirements by the use of graphic symbols. In general,
these are the recognized symbols of the industry and of the engineering profession.
Questions of meaning or intent will be decided by the Architect/Engineer, and shall
be consistent with system of symbols indicated or, if none is indicated, with
recognized conventions.
B. Listing of Symbols: The listing of (or key to) specific graphic symbols used to
show the electrical work on the contract documents is shown on the drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
16053-3
SECTION 16054
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. In order to close out the Electrical Work of this project, the work hereinafter noted is
required.
B. Requirements for project closeout are, but not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Tests.
3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
4. Owner's Instructions.
5. Shop Drawings.
6. Correction of Deficiencies Found on Final Observation.
7. Guarantees.
8. Final Cleaning.
.03 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain a set of Contract Drawings consisting of a complete set of blueline prints
at the jobsite.
B. Indicate on the record drawings the installed locations of:
1. Service entrance
2. Feeders
3. Outlets
4. Equipment
C. Include addenda, change orders, clarifications, and other modifications to the
Drawings.
D. Deliver Drawings to the Architect/Engineer on the completion of the work.
16054-1
E. Do not use these Drawings for reference or consl~tction, nor allow them to leave the
field office.
F. Drawings will be reviewed by the Architect/Engineer as required and prior to
approval of each month's Certificate for Payment. Certificate for Payment will not
be approved until record drawings are brought up to date.
1.04 TEST AND START-UP DATA
A. Conduct tests as specified in Section 16059 for the various systems.
B. Log pertinent data at the time of testing, including:
1. System identification
2. Date and time
3. Personnel
4. Description
5. Test conditions
6. Test results
7. Corrective measures taken
C. Log of start-up for all equipment including:
1. Equipment identification
2. Date and time
3. Personnel
4. Start-up procedures
5. Problems encountered
6. Corrective measures taken
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTEN.~,JCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. Complete written operating instructions at each item of equipment and related
systems.
B. Written instructions for preventative maintenance for each item of equipment and
related systems.
C. Release, signed by the Owner and his Authorized Representative, for demonstration
of operating and maintenance procedures.
1. List of equipment and systems
2. Dates and times
3. Personnel present for demonstrations
D. List of equipment serial numbers.
E. Systems diagrams and drawings.
16054-2
F. List of manufacturers', suppliers', and subcontractors' names, addresses, and
telephone numbers; give both locM representatives and service headquarters.
G. Spare Parts Data:
1. List of parts and supplies
Current unit prices
3. Sources of supply (local and national)
4. List of pans and supplies recommended by manufacturer for the Owner to
keep on hand
H. Provide three (3) bound copies of all data in loose-leaf, three-ring binders with
identifying tabs.
1.06 FINAL CLEANING
A. Employ experienced workmen, or professional cleaners for final cleaning.
B. In preparation for substantial completion or occupanc);, conduct final inspection of
sighbexposed interior and exterior surfaces, and of concealed spaces, and clean as
follows:
1. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign
materiMs from sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces; polish surfaces
so designated to shine finish.
2. Repair, patch and touch-up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match
adjacent surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
16054-3
SECTION 16055
SUBMITTAL DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 ELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. As soon as practical after the date of award of contract and before purchasing or
starting installation of any materials or equipment, the Contractor shall submit
complete shop drawings and/or manufacmrer's data of all materials and equipment
to be incorporated in the work.
B. Materials and equipment requiring detailed submittal data shall be submitted with
sufficient data to indicate that all requirements of the specifications have been met.
1. Where products are noted or specified by brand names, it is for the purpose
of establishing standards of qualit3', style and size.
C. Manufacturer's data shall have all non-applicable features crossed out or deleted in a
manner that will clearly indicate exactly what is to be furnished.
D. Samples shall be furnished when requested.
1.03 REVIEW OF SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall allow a minimum of two (2) weeks time frame for review of
each submission by the office of the design discipline involved after receipt of such
submissions by that design discipline.
B. The Contractor is responsible for allowing sufficient time in the construction
schedule to cover the aforementioned cycles of data processing, including time for
all resubmission cycles on non-acceptable materials, equipment, etc., covered by the
data submitted.
C. Construction delays and/or lack of timeliness in the above regards are the
responsibility of the Contractor and will not be considered in any request for
scheduled construction time extensions.
__ 16055-1
.04 ACCEPTANCE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Acceptance of materials and equipment will be based on manufacmrer's published
data and will be tentative subject to the submission of complete shop drawings
and/or manufacmrer's data indicating compliance with the conlract documents and
that adequate and acceptable clearances for entry, servicing, and maintenance will
exist.
B. Acceptance of materials and equipment under this provision shall not be construed
as authorizing any deviations from the contract documents, unless the attention of
the Architect/Engineer has been directed in writing to the specific deviation.
C. Data submitted shall not contain unrelated information unless all pertinent
information is properly identified.
.05 CERTIFICATION
A. The Contractor shall furnish manufacturer's certification where required.
.06 EQUIPMENT SERVICE
A. All equipment installed on this project shall have representation, factor3' authorized
service, and a stock of repair pans within a 200 mile radius.
.07 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall check all items of submittal data and verify, by statement and
initial that each item has been checked for the following conditions:
1. Item is equal to specified item in construction, qualit)., and function.
2. Item is of the same physical size.
a. If not of the same physical size, the dimensions have been checked
and item will fit within the allocated space shown on the plans.
b. Furrash 1/4" scale plan and 1/4" sections on tracing paper (for direct
overlay) of proposed equipment.
c. System connections to the item can be made as shown on the plans.
d. Shop drawings show' in detail all connections, etc., required to meet
the overall specifications in every detail.
e. Statement of guarantee that the proposed equipment shall operate
properly as applied to the project and will not require additional
device or changes in the installation shown on the plans.
16055-2
B. Contractor shall submit a letter stating that all equipment specified in Division 15 or
fumished by others has been verified for proper overcurrent protection, branch
circuit size, disconnect requirements and number of required service points. It is the
Contractor's responsibility to check the mechanical equipment drawings and
submittals and provide required electrical including wiring, breakers, fuses,
disconnects, etc. Conductor sizes shall not be decreased from sizes indicated on
electrical drawings.
1.08 Complete specification data shall be submitted for all electrical items including the list
below:
A. Low voltage conductor (600V and less)
B. Conduit
C. Wiring devices
D. Relays/contactors
E. Lighting fixtures
F. Ballasts/lamps
G. Photocells
H. Time clocks
I. Disconnect switches
J. Fuses
1.09 Complete minimum 3/4" scale shop drawings and specification data shall be submitted for
the following:
A. Panelboards (completed schedule and dimensions acceptable in lieu of 3/4" scale
drawing)
1.10 Complete 1/4" scale plan of each electrical room or closet indicating overall room
dimensions and all equipment drawn to scale.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
-- Not used.
END OF SECTION
16055-3
SECTION 16056
-- ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The extent of the electrical systems and equipment requiting identification is shown
on the drawings, and the extent of identification required is specified herein and in
individual sections of work requiting identification.
B. The types of electrical identification specified in this section include the following:
1. Conductor color coding.
2. Operational instructions and warnings.
3. Danger signs.
4. Equipment/system identification signs.
P.~d~T 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387.
engraved with engraver's standard letter style unless otherwise indicated. Plastic
laminate shall be 1/16" thick up to 20 sq. in. and 1/8" for larger size. Letters shall
be 1/2" high, black on white background.
B. Underground-type plastic line markers shall be permanent, bright-colored,
continuous-printed plastic tape, intended for direct-burial service; not less than 6"
wide x 4 mils thick. Provide tape with printing which most accurately indicates the
type of service of the buried cable.
2.02 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS
A. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated,
as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of the electrical
systems and equipment.
16056-1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require finish, install
identification after completion of finishing.
B. Comply with governing regulations and the requests of goveming authorities for the
identification of electrical work.
3.02 UNDERGROLrND CABLE IDENTIFICATION
A. During backfilling/top-soiling of each exterior underground electrical and
communication conduit, install a continuous underground-type plastic line marker,
located directly over the buried conduit at 6" to 8" below finished grade.
B. Install a single line marker where multiple small conduits are buried in a common
lrench and do not exceed an overall width of 16".
C. Install line marker for every buried conduit.
3.03 CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING
A. Conductors # 10 and Smaller: Insulation continuously colored throughout.
B. Conductors Larger than #10: Three continuous wraps of 1/2" wide 3M # 191 tape at
each end and at pull and junction boxes.
C. 120/240 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire system:
1. Phase A - black.
2. Phase B (power leg) - orange.
3. Phase C - blue.
4. Neutral - white.
5. Ground - green.
D. Conductors installed with color different than that indicated above are not
acceptable.
E. Control and special systems, 600 volt and less, #14 AWG and larger:
1. Any color other than green and white.
2. Include tracer color for identification.
3. Keep colors selected continuous throughout project.
4. Isolated systems, as required by NEC Sec. 517.
F. Note colors on record drawings, include switch leg and traveler colors.
16056-2
3.04 OPERATIONAL IDENTIFICATION AND WARNINGS
' A. Wherever reasonably required to ensure safe and efficient operation and
maintenance of the electrical systems, and electrically connected mechanical
systems and general systems and equipment, including the prevention of misuse of
' electrical facilities by unauthorized personnel, install engraved plastic signs bearing
identification, instruction or warnings on switches, outlets and other controls,
devices and covers of electrical enclosures. Where detailed instructions or
explanations are needed, provide engraved plastic signs with clearly written
messages adequate for the intended purposes.
3.05 DANGER SIGNS
_ A. Install danger signs required by governing regulations and authorities.
B. Install appropriate danger signs at locations of electrical work constituting similar
~ dangers for persons in or about the project.
C. Install danger signs on switches and similar controls, regardless of whether
_ concealed or locked up, where untimely or inadvertent operation (by anyone) could
result in significant danger to persons, or damage to or loss of propert3,,.
_ 3.06 EQUIPMENT/SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION SIGNS
A. Identify with engraved laminated nameplates, designating load served, on each
_ electrical item on the project. Items to be identified and location of nameplates are
as follows:
-- 1. Each main switch/fuse umt or circuit breaker-- adjacent to switch/fuse or
circuit breaker.
-. 2. Each switch/fuse unit or circuit breaker in each distribution panel -- adjacent
to switch/fuse unit or circuit breaker.
- 3. Spares shall be labeled "Spare".
4. Each lighting and appliance panel-- panel name on panel trim cover
-- immediately above panel door. Circuit numbers shall be permanently
labeled at factory. Stick-on decals for field installation are not acceptable.
' 5. Each safer37 switch -- on outside of cover.
6. Each relay cabinet -- on outside of cover.
7. Each time clock -- on outside of cover.
8. Each exhaust fan switch -- custom engraved on outside of switch cover plate
(high and low if required).
_ 16056-3
9. Outside light switches -- custom engraved on outside of switch cover plate.
10. Any switch for load that cannot be seen from the control point-- custom
engraved on outside of switch cover plate.
B. Nameplates shall be securely attached with an approved mechanical fastener.
Adhesive attachment shall not be permitted.
3.07 J-BOX AND DEVICE PLATES
A. The appropriate panel and circuit number shall be written in indelible ink on the "'
back of all switch and receptacle faceplates. J-boxes for circuiting distribution shall
also indicate panel and circuit numbers on front of coverplate where J-boxes are
above ceiling and on back for exposed J-boxes.
END OF SECTION
16056-4 _
SECTION 16059
ELECTRICAL TESTING AND LOAD BALANCING
" PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which cover the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Perform test, balance, fmal adjustment, etc., and record data for electrical work as
described herein.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit data record forms for approval before conducting any tests or making final
adjustments, torquing, balancing, etc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 TESTING
A. 600V Conductors:
-* 1. Megger test feeder conductors at 600 volts dc. Record value for each feeder
conductor. Conductors which test below' 30 megohms shall be replaced.
Retest new conductors and record data.
2. Perform continuiD, test on all feeder and branch circuit conductors.
' 3. Torque all feeder and branch circuit connections and terminations to
manufacturer's recommended values.
B. Grounding:
1. Measure and record ground resistance from system neutral connection at
service entrance to ground reference point using suitable ground testing
equipment. Resistance shall not exceed 2 ohms.
--- 16059-1
2. Record data for each test.
3.02 BUS TORQUING
A. All bolted bus connections shall be made using a torque wrench.
B. Bus and lug connections in panelboards shall be in accordance with manufacturer's
specifications.
3.03 LOAD/VOLTAGE DATA
A. Record amperage of each phase and neutral in each panelboard and switchboard.
B. Record voltage line-to-neutral and line-to-line of all phases in each panelboard and
switchboard. Record each reading.
C. Lighting only panelboards shall be arranged so that under full load all phases carry
the same load as near as possible.
3.04 PHASE ROTATION
A. Connect phases of Panelboards, Disconnects, Controllers A, B to Bus 1, 2 from left
to fight.
B. Vefify and make final connection to motor loads to provide proper rotations.
3.05 MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
A. Adjust all operating mechanisms of electrical equipment for free mechanical
movement.
END OF SECTION -
16059-2 -
SECTION 16110
-- RACEWAYS, CONDUITS AND BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
.01 ELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections in the specifications.
.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Conduit:
1. Rigid metal conduit and fittings.
2. Intermediate metal conduit and fittings.
3. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings.
4. Flexible metal conduit and fittings.
5. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit and fittings.
6. Non-metallic conduit and fittings.
7. PVC externally coated rigid galvanized metal conduit.
B. Boxes:
1. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.
2. Pull and junction boxes.
.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc-Coated.
B. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc-Coated.
C. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
D. N'EMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
E. ANSI/NEMA OS 1 -Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box
Supports.
F. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
--- 16110-1
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product data on materials to be used on project.
1.05 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Handle raceways carefully to avoid damage, breaking, denring and scoring.
Damaged equipment or materials shall not be installed.
B. Store raceways in a clean dry space and protected from the weather.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Conduit and fittings for all electrical systems on this project shall include the
following:
1. Service entrance
2. Electrical power and lighting feeders
3. Electrical power and lighting circuits
4. HVAC control system (furnished and installed under Div. 15)
5. Other electrical systems
B. For each electrical raceway system indicated, provide a complete assembly of
conduit, tubing or duct with fittings including, but not necessarily limited to,
connectors, nipples, couplings, locknuts, bushings, expansion fittings, other
components and accessories as needed to form a complete system of the type
indicated.
C. Conduit fittings shall be designed and approved for the specific use intended.
Conduit fittings, including flexible. shall have insulated throats or bushings. Rigid
conduits shall have insulated bushings, unless grounding bushings are required by
N.E.C. Article 250-72(b). Grounding bushings shall have insulated throats.
D. Rigid and intermediate metal conduit shall be hot-dipped galvanized. Fittings shall
be threaded type. Expansion firings shall be OZ Type DX.
E. Electrical metallic tubing shall be galvanized. Fittings shall be all steel compression
type. Expansion fittings shall be OZ Type TX.
F. Flexible metal conduit and fittings shall be zinc-coated steel.
G. Liquid-tight flexible conduit and fittings shall consist of single strip, continuous,
flexible, interlocked, double-wrapped steel, galvanized inside and outside, forming
smooth intemal wiring channel with liquid tight covering of flexible pol,vvinyl
chloride (PVC).
16110-2
H. Nonmetallic conduit and fittings shall be suitable for temperature rating of
conductor but not less than 90°C.
I. Crimp or set-screw type fittings are not acceptable.
J. Provide strain relief fittings as manufactured by OZ for cables in vertical raceways.
K. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2", except 3/8" flexible metallic conduit may be
used as fixture whips.
2.02 WALL AND CEILING OUTLET BOXES
A. Galvanized steel interior outlet wiring boxes of the type, shape and size, including
depth of box, to suit each respective location and installation; constructed with
stumped knockouts in back and sides, and with threaded holes with screws for
securing box covers or wiring devices.
1. Outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including mounting
brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and
metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, compatible with outlet boxes being
used and meeting requirements of individual situations.
B. Corrosion-resistant cast metal weatherproof exterior outlet wiring boxes of the type,
shape and size, including depth of box, with threaded conduit ends, cast metal face
plate with spring-hinged waterproof cap suitably configured for each application,
including face plate gasket and corrosion-proof fasteners. Outlets located where
subject to contact with rain or dripping water shall be equipped with an outlet cover
to close while in use; equal to TayMac #203 10.
C. Outlet boxes in poured concrete shall be plenum type without anv holes and with
reset knockouts. Where extension rings are used to offset conduit between wall
reinforcing steel, joint between extension ring and box shall be sealed to prevent
concrete from entering box during pour.
D. Surface mounted outlet boxes in interior locations shall be threaded cast type with
steel cover.
2.03 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Boxes shall be material specified in Paragaph D. below, welded seams, stainless
steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers.
B. Boxes larger than 12 inches in any dimension shall be panelboard code gauge with
' hinged cover.
C. Boxes shall be sized in accordance with NEC.
16110-3
D. Construction:
1. Dry Locations: --
a. NEMA 1 or 12
b. Minimum 16 gauge steel --
2. Outdoor Wet Locations:
a. NEMA 3R or 4
b. Minimum 16 gauge steel
3. Indoor Wet Locations:
a. NEMA 4
b. Minimum 16 gauge steel
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION - CONDUIT
A. Install products as indicated, in accordance with the applicable requirements.
B. Install raceway and conduit system from point of origin to outlets shown, complete
with offsets, pull boxes, junction boxes and fittings. Raceway and conduit system
shall be installed parallel and perpendicular To building lines unless indicated
otherwise on the drawings.
C. Install rigid wall hot-dipped galvanized steel conduit or hot-dipped galvanized
intermediate metal conduit. EMT may only be used as follows:
1. In sizes up to and including 3 ", EMT max, only be used above gypboard or
accessible ceilings, concealed within gypboard walls. EMT in sizes larger
th 3" is not permitted in any location.
D. Install Schedule 40 PVC conduit directly buried in earth. Provide concrete
encasement where noted on drawings or specified. Provide rigid steel conduit for
all bends and stub-ups.
E. Install liquid-fight flexible metal conduit for connections to rotating, vibrating,
moving or movable equipment, including dry-type transformers. Maximum leng-th
shall be 3'-0" minimum of 1'-6". Minimum size shall be 3/4". Do not use liquid-
tight in return air plenums.
F. Flexible metal conduit shall only be used for fixture whips. Maximum length shall
be 6'-0" minimum of 3'-0", minimum size shall be 3/8". BX OR AC TYPE
PIEFABRICATED CABLES ARE NOT PERMITTED.
16110-4 -
G. Install multiple conduit rims parallel and supported on Unistrut, or equal, trapezes
and anchored with split ring hangers, conduit straps or other devices specifically
' designed for the purpose. Wire ties are not permitted. Fasten conduit with the
following material:
" 1. Wood screws on wood
2. Toggle bolts on hollow masonry
3. Bolts and expansion anchors in concrete or brick
4. Machine screws, threaded rods and clamps on steel
5. Conduit clips on steel joists
H. Allow minimum of 6" clearance at flues, steam pipes and heat sources.
_ I. Conduits running to roo~op and exterior wall mounted equipment shall be routed
inside the building and stubbed out at equipment.
_ J. Install conduits outside of building lines at a minimum depth of 30 inches below
finished grade. Maintain twelve inches earth or two inches concrete separation
between electrical conduits and other services or utilities underground.
K. Conduit shall not be installed under building slab except for incoming service
conduits, underWound branch circuits to loads outside the building line, and circuits
_ serving floor outlets.
L. Conduits shall not be installed (horizontall>,) in floor slab, except from floor outlet
-- to floor outlet.
M. Install underWound conduits with sealing glands equal to OZ Type FSK exterior to
- the conduit and OZ Type CSB, or equal intemally at the point where conduits enter
the building to prevent water seepage into the building.
- N. Fittings shall be approved for grounding purposes or shall be jumpered with a
copper grounding conductor of appropriate ampaciD'. Leave terminations of such
jumpers exposed.
O. Install expansion fittings in metal and PVC conduit as follows:
' 1. Conduit Crossing Building Expansion Joints:
a. EMT 3" and less
b. IMC all sizes
c. RMC all sizes
d. PVC all sizes
2. Conduit Straight Runs in Excess of 100 Feet:
a. EMT 3" and less
b. IMC all sizes
- 16110-5
c. RMC all sizes
d. PVC all sizes
3. Locations subject to thermal expansion and as required by NEC.
4. Unless expansion fitting has an internal bonding braid, as in Crouse-Hinds "
Type XC, an extemal braid, approved for the purpose, shall be installed
around the fining; otherwise, a green insulated grounding conductor shall be
pulled in the conduit. Both ends of this green grounding conductor shall be '
accessible for inspection.
P. Expansion fittings are not required where offsets, expansion loops, or flexible
conduit are placed in conduit runs.
Q. Install conduit concealed in walls, partitions and above ceilings. Install conduit
exposed in ceiling area (at structure) of boiler rooms, mechanical rooms and in other
similar rooms where ceilings are not called for. Install conduit concealed in slab
when finished areas below do not have ceiling.
R. Avoid moisture traps where possible; where unavoidable, provide junction box with
drain fitting at conduit low point.
S. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of din and _
moisture.
T. Provide 200 Ib. nylon cord in empty. conduit. _
U. Install conduit seals where conduit passes through classification boundaries. fire
rated floors/walls, etc., as required by N.E.C. Fire stop materials shall be
International Protective Coatings Corp. #FSP1000 firestop pu~.' for small openings
and KSB sealbags for large openings.
V. Conduits shall not be supported from acoustic ceiling supports.
3.02 INSTALLATION - BOXES -
A. Provide electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps.
wire pulling, equipment connections, and code compliance.
B. Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including mounting
brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal
su:aps for supporting outlet boxes, compatible with outlet boxes being used and
meeting requirements of individual situations.
C. Electrical box locations shown on Contract Drawings are approximate unless
dimensioned. Verify location of outlets prior to rough-in.
D. Locate and install boxes to allow access. 16110-6
E. Allow minimum of 6" clearance at flues, steam pipes and heat sources.
F. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide minimum 6 inch separation.
Provide minimum 24 inch separation in acoustic-rated walls. If boxes are connected
' together, install flexible connection between the two and pack openings with
fiberglass.
' G. Secure boxes rigidly to the substrate upon which thev are being mounted, or solidly
imbed boxes in concrete or masonry,. Boxes shall not be permitted to move
,- laterally. Boxes shall be secured between two studs. Boxes connected to one stud
are not permitted.
H. Provide 'knockout plugs for unused openings.
I. Use multiple-gang boxes where more than one device is mounted together; do not
_ use sectional boxes. Provide barriers to separate wiring of different voltage
systems.
_ J. Install boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation.
K. Outlet boxes in plaster partitions shall be "shallow-type" set flush in wall so there is
_ at least 5/8" plaster covering back of box.
L. Switch boxes shall not be used as junction boxes.
M. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters,
benches and backsplashes.
N. In inaccessible ceiling areas, position outlets and junction boxes within 6 inches of
recessed luminaire, to be accessible through luminaire ceiling opening.
O. Outlet boxes supporting fixtures shall be securely anchored in place in an approved
manner. Support outlet boxes and fixtures in acoustic ceiling areas from building
- structures. not from acoustic ceilings. Lighting fixture outlets shall be coordinated
with mechanical and architectural equipment and elements to eliminate conflicts and
provide a workable neat installation.
P. Locate pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings or in unfinished
areas. Install boxes where required to limit bends in conduit to 3600 or where
pulling tension would exceed the maximum allowable for the cable.
Q. Support pull and junction boxes independent of conduit and not from acoustic
' ceiling supports.
16110-7
R. Surface mounted outlet boxes in interior locations shall be threaded cast type with
steel cover.
END OF SECTION --
16110-8 _
SECTION 16120
CABLE, WIRE AND CONNECTORS, 600 VOLT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Building wire.
1. Power distribution circuitry.
2. Control system circuitry (other than HVAC).
3. Lighting circuitry.
4. Appliance and equipment circuitry.
5. Motor-branch circuitry.
6. Outdoor lighting and power.
7. Other systems circuitD' as designated.
B. Cable.
C. Wiring connections and terminations.
.03 REFERENCES
A. NEMA WC 3: Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and
Distribution of Electrical Energy.
B. NEMA WC 5: Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and
Distribution of Electrical Energy.
C. Where application of local codes, trade association standards or publications appears
to be in conflict with the requirements of this section, the Architect/Engineer shall
be asked for an interpretation.
.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on cable, wire and connectors.
16120-1
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Provide factory-wrapped water-proof flexible barrier material for covering wire and
cable on wood reels, where applicable; and we~ther resistant fiberboard containers
for factory-packaging of cable, wire and connectors, to protect against physical
damage in transit. Damaged cable, wire or connectors shall be removed from
project site.
B. In their factory-fumished coverings, store cable, wire and connectors in a clean, dry
indoor space which provides protection against the weather.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Generally, cable, wire and connectors shall be of manufacturer's standard materials,
as indicated by published product information. Design and construction as required
for the instailation.
B. Provide factory-fabricated wire of the size, rating, material and type as indicated for
each service. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as required to comply
with installation requirements and with NEC standards. The miramum size wire to
be used for power or lighting circuits shall be #12 copper with insulation as noted
below. Miramum size for control shall be #14 copper.
C. If more than three phase conductors are installed in a single raceway, the conductors
shall be derated in accordance with the National Electrical Code. Increase wire size
so that resulting ampacity, after derating factor is applied, is equal to or greater than
ampacity of conductor specified.
2.02 BUILDING WIRE
A. Thermoplastic-insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 5.
B. Rubber-insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 3.
C. Feeders and Branch Circuits Larger Than 10 AWG: 98% conductivity copper,
stranded conductor, 600 volt insulation, THW, THHN/THWN.
D. Feeders and Branch Circuits 10 AWG and Smaller: 98% conductivity copper
conductor, 600 volt insulation, THW, THHN/THWN, solid conductor.
E. Control Circuits: 98% conductivity copper, stranded conductor, 600 volt insulation,
THW.
F. Underground feeder and branch circuits shall be Type RHW or THW.
16120-2 _
2.03 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS
' A. Provide factory-fabricated, metal connectors of the size, rating, material, type and
class as indicated for each service. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as
required to comply with installation requirements and with NEC standards. Select
' from only follo~xdng types, classes, kinds and styles:
1. Type: Pressure(compression).
Threaded.
Insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for 10 AWG and
smaller, 3M Scotchlok.
2. Class: Insulated.
3. Kind: Copper (for Cu to Cu connection).
_ 4. Style: Pigtail connector.
Parallel and tee connectors equal to ILSCO and GTA and GTT with
ILSCO insulating cover. Parallel and tee connections shall be used
_ only where specifically detailed. (Split bolt type connectors are not
permitted.)
_ 5. Use compression fittings with heat shrink for all connections in poles. Do
not use Scotchlok type connectors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which cable, wire and
connectors are to be installed and noti~' the Contractor in writing of conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Inspect wire and cable
for physical damage. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactoD' conditions
have been corrected.
3.02 GENERAL WIRING METHODS
' A. Install electrical cable, wire and connectors as indicated, in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions, and applicable requirements.
' B. Coordinate cable and wire installation work with electrical raceway and equipment
installation work, as necessary for proper interface.
C. Conductors shall be selected on the basis of their purpose and UL listing.
Generally, use Types THW and THWNFFHHN in building interiors and other dry
locations. Outdoors and underground in raceways, use Type R.HW or THW.
- 16120-3
D. No conductor smaller than No. 12 wire shall be used for lighting and power
purposes. In the case of "home rims" over 50' in length (100' for 277 volt) no
conductor smaller than a No. 10 wire shall be used. The sizing of all wire except
remote conu'ol wire shall be accomplished in the case of both feeder and branch
circuits by conforming to the following provisions.
1. 120/240 Volt Branch Circuits: The voltage drop in the case of 120/240 volt
circuits shall not exceed 2.0% at maximum load and 70.0% power factor.
E. Remote control wires shall be no smaller than No. 14 conductors. Control wires
shall be run in separate conduits. Departures from the sizes so determined shall be
made only in those cases in which the National Electrical Code requires the use of
larger conductors. The sizes as determined from these tables shall be regarded as
the acceptable minimum under all other circumstances. In no case, however, shall
there be a voltage drop greater than that specified in any feeder or branch circuit.
This voltage drop shall be based on the full load, 70% power factor, the total
impedance drop with 60 hertz alternating current and with the reactante drop in the
respective metal conduits duly considered. The Contractor may, if he deems it
necessary or advisable, use larger sized conductors than those shown. Under no
circumstances, however. shall the Contractor use any conductors sized in a manner
which does not conform to the above mentioned tables without having first secured
the written approval of the Owner's representative.
F. Dedicated circuits shall consist of separate phase conductor(s), separate neutral
conductor, separate equipment ~ounding conductor installed in dedicated conduit
serving equipment or device.
3.03 WIRING INSTALLATION IN KACE~TA¥S
A. Swab conduits to remove foreign material immediately prior to pulling cable.
B. Pull conductors together where more thm~ one is being installed in a raceway.
C. Use UL listed pulling compound or lubricant by Lubaduk. when necessary;
compound must not deteriorate conductor and insulation.
D. Do not use a pulling means, including fish tape, cable or rope which can damage the
raceway.
E. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from
the weather and all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed.
F. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in same raceway.
16120-4
3.04 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS
A. Install splices, taps and terminations which have equivalent-or-better mechanical
strength and insulation as the conductor. Make splices, taps and terminations to
carry full ampacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise.
B. Keep conductor splices and taps accessible and to a minimum, and in junction boxes
only. Do not splice in ground mounted pull boxes.
C. Use splice, tap and termination connectors which are compatible with the conductor
material.
D. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors.
E. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape. Spare conductors shall not be
energized or connected to protective device.
F. Conductors in vertical conduits or raceways shall be supported in the manner set
forth in the appropriate section of the latest revision of the National Electrical Code.
Lighting fixtures shall not be used for raceways for circuits other than parallel
wiring of fixtures.
END OF SECTION
16120-5
SECTION 16121
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
_ A. The extent of electrical connections to equipment is indicated on the drawings and
in schedules, in other Divisions of the specifications, and by the requirements of this
section, and is hereby defined to include (but not necessarily limited to) connections
_ for providing electrical power to equipment.
B. The types of electrical connections specified in this section include, but are not
_ necessarily limited to, the following:
1. To motors
-- 2. To electric heaters
3. To HVAC control and other control devices
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product data on materials to be used on project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. For each electrical connection indicated, provide a complete assembly of materials.
' including but not necessarily limited to the following:
1. Pressure connectors
' 2. Terminals (lugs)
3. Electrical insulating tape
4. Heat shrinkable tubing
5. Cable ties
6. Solderless wire nuts
7. Conductors
16121-1
B. Furnish materials and components in compliance with equipment manufacmrer's
recommendations for the intended application.
PART 3 ~ EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS '
A. Install electrical connections as indicated, in accordance with recognized industry
practices to ensure that products serve the intended functions.
B. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance
with other sections of the specifications and in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Wherever possible, match
conductors of the electrical connection for proper interface between the electrical
supply and the installed equipment.
1. Cover splices with electrical insulation equivalent to, or of a higher rating,
than insulation on the conductors being spliced.
2. Prepare cables and wires, by cutting and stripping covering armor, jacket,
and insulation properly to ensure a uniform and neat appearance where
cables and wires are terminated.
3. Trim cables and wires to be as short as practicable and arrange routing to
facilitate inspection, testing and maintenance.
C. Provide conduit for connections in accordance with other sections of the
specifications.
D. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to the equipment with equipment
installation work and as follows:
1. Make electrical connections to equipment furnished under other sections of
the Contract Documents.
2. Furnish wiring, conduit, outlet boxes, disconnect switches, etc., as required
for same throughout the project.
3. Check the General Construction, Plumbing, Heating and Air Conditioning
plans and specifications and detenmne the amount of required wiring for
final connections.
4. Verify locations, horsepower, voltages, etc., of all such equipment as the
work progresses.
5. Advise the Architect/Engineer immediately, for clarification, if an apparent
conflict arises in control wiring, power wiring, etc.
16121-2
E. Due to manufacturer's changes or substitutions, equipment furnished under the
mechanical and other sections of the specifications may require different rough-in
' requirements than indicated on the plans. Secure detailed drawings from the
Contractor fu_mishing the equipment, to determine actual rough-in locations, and
conduit and conductor requirements to assure a proper and workmanlike
' installation.
F. Install motor controls, safety switches, etc. for all equipment on new 3/4" thick
pl,vwood (with two coats of paint) to match surrounding area. Arrange all
equipment in each area to mount on one piece ofptywood where possible.
3.02 FINAL CONNECTIONS FROM MOTOR ST.A3%TERS TO MOTORS
A. Furnish and install conduit, wiring, disconnects, etc, as required to install final
connections from motor starters to motors. Verify number and size of conductors,
and disconnecting means requirements. Partwinding, and wye-delta starting, as well
_ as multi-speed motors may require multiple or six pole disconnects which shall be
furnished and installed under this section of the Contract Documents.
_ 3.03 FINAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OWNER OR UNDER
OTHER SECTIONS OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. HVAC AND MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT: It is the Contractor's responsibiliD~
to obtain the submittal data from the Owner or other parties furnishing HVAC and
mechanical equipment, check the data, and provide required electrical. including
conduit and conductors, circuit breakers, fuses, disconnects, etc., to accommodate
changes or variations in the drawings and/or specifications.
END OF SECTION
16121-3
SECTION 16140
-- WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections in the specifications.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
_ A. Wiring Devices:
1. Wall switches.
_ 2. Receptacles.
3. Device plates and box covers.
_ 1.03 REFERENCES
A. NEMA WD 1 - General-Purpose Wiring Devices.
B. NEMA WD 5 - Specific-Purpose Wiring Devices.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product data for wiring devices.
1.05 DELIVERY, STOtL~,GE .AND HANDLING
A. Deliver wiring devices individually wrapped in factorv-fabricated containers.
B. Handle wiring devices carefull3, to avoid damage, breaking and scoring.
C. Store in a clean dry space and protected from the weather.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide factory fabricated wiring devices in the type and electrical rating for the
service indicated. Where type and grade are not indicated, provide proper selection
to correspond with branch circuit wiring and overcurrent protection.
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WALL SWITCHES
A. Pass & Seymour.
--. 16140-1
B. Arrow Hart.
C. General Electric.
D. Hubbell.
E. Leviton.
F. Bryant.
G. Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co.
2.03 WALL SWITCHES
A. Wall switches for lighting circuits and motor loads under 1/3 hp shall be AC general
use snap switch with toggle handle, horsepower rated. Ivory', 20 amperes and
120/277 volt AC with number of poles and ways as required; Pass & Seymour
20AC Series, .Arrow Hart 1990I Series, Leviton 1221-1, Eagle 222V.
B. Pilot light type shall be equipped with red toggle handle (glow when on), Ivory, 20
amperes and 120/277 volt AC with number of poles and ways as required; Pass &
Seymour 20AC-RPL, Arrow Hart 1990PL Series, Leviton 1221-PLR, Eagle
2221PL.
C. Key operated switches shall be Gray, 20 amperes and 120/277 volt AC with number
of poles as required; Pass & Seymour 20AC-L Series, Arrow Hart 1990L Series,
Leviton 1221-L, Eagle 2221L. Furnish key; Pass & Seymour 500K, Arrow Hart
2000, Leviton 55500, Eagle 1201LK.
D. Use Pass & Seymour 20AC2-HP or Eagle 2222 for disconnect means m 120, 208
and 240 volt, single phase motor and resistance heater loads 1/3 hp through 1 hp.
Surface mounted switches indoors shall be installed in Pass & Seymour 7806
NEMA 1 enclosure with 7801 handle guard.
E. Switch terminal screws or connectors shall be designed to accommodate No. 10
solid conductor.
2.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - RECEPTACLES
A. Pass & Seymour.
B. Arrow Hart.
C. General Electric.
D. Hubbell.
E. Leviton.
F. Bryant.
G. Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co.
2.05 RECEPTACLES
A. Convenience duplex receptacles shall be Ivory, 15 amperes and 125 volt AC; Pass
& Seymour 5262-1, Arrow Hart 5262-1, Leviton 5262-1, Eagle 5262V.
16140-2
B. Dedicated circuit duplex receptacles shall be Ivory, 20 amperes, 125 volt AC; Pass
& Seymour 5362-1, Arrow Hart 5362-I, Leviton 5362-I, Eagle 5362V.
C. GFCI receptacles shall be 20 amperes, 120 volt with integral ground fault current
interrupter; Pass & Seymour 2091-SI, Arrow Hart GF5342I, Leviton 6899-I, Eagle
' 647-2V. Do not use feed through feature.
D. Heat tape receptacles shall be Pass & Seymour 6207 with Crouse Hinds WRLD-1
cover. Install round plug on heat tape cord to match weatherproof bushing on
receptacle cover for watertight installation.
E. Specific-use receptacles shall have volts, amps, poles and NEMA configuration as
noted on drawings. Provide one matching plug for each specific use receptacle.
2.06 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WALL PLATES
_ A. Pass &Seymour.
B. Hubbell.
C. General Electric.
_ D. Leviton.
E. Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co.
_ 2.07 WALL PLATES
A. Decorative wall plates shall be 0.04" Type 430 satin finished stainless steel equal to
-- Pass & Seymour Sierra "S" Series. with cutouts required for devices indicated on
drawings. Where switches or outlets are shown adjacent to each other, the3' shall be
ganged with partitions between different .type services and covered by a single
-- custom wall plate.
B. Telephone, computer and CCTV wall plates shall be horizontal split, stainless steel,
-- single 5/8" hole with vinyl grommet equal to Pass & Seymour Sierra S-753.
C. Jumbo plates are not permitted.
D. Weatherproof cover plate shall be gasketed cast aluminum with hinged gasketed
device covers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
-- 3.01 INSPECTION
A. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which wiring devices are to
be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the
proper and timely completion of the work. Inspect devices for physical damage.
_ Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
16140-3
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring devices as indicated, in accordance with applicable requirements.
B. Install wall switches 48 inches above floor, OFF position down.
C. Where wainscot occurs at the 48" level, install device in the wall above the wainscot
or as near the 48" level as possible to provide the most pleasing appearance, but in
no case partially in the wainscot and partially in the wall.
D. Where shown near doors, install switches and dimmers not less than 2" and not
more than 12" from door trim.
E. Veri~, all door swings before rough-in and locate switches and dimmers on strike
side of door.
F. Install convenience, telephone, computer, and CCTV outlets with centerline at 17
inches above floor, 6 inches above counters, or at the backsplash level.
G. Install specific-use receptacles at heights shown on drawings.
H. Install devices and wall plates flush and level.
END OF SECTION _
161404 --
SECTION 16164
BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections in the specifications.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
_ A. Lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
-- B. NE/VL~. PB 1 - Panelboards.
C. NEMA PB 1.1 -Instructions for Safe Installation. Operation and Maintenance of
-- Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product data.
-- B. Submit dimensioned drawings showing size. door-in-door construction. circuit
breaker and equipment arrangement and ratings, including but not limited
voltage, main bus ampaciD', integrated short circuit ampere rating.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
' A. Deliver panelboards in factor-fabricated water-resistant wrapping.
B. Handle panelboards carefully to avoid damage to material components, enclosure
and finish.
_ C. Store in a clean, dr>, space and protected from the weather.
-- 16164-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS --
A. Siemens
B. General Electric Company
C. Square D
D. Cutler-Hammer
2.02 PANELBOARD CONSTRUCTION
A. Series rating ofpanelboards is not permitted.
B. Provide circuit breaker type panelboards as scheduled. Branch mounted main
breakers are not acceptable.
C. Enclosure shall be NEMA Type 1.
D. Provide cabinet front with concealed trim clamps and hinged door-in-door
construction. Locks shall be of the flush cylinder type equipped with positive catch.
E. Bus shall be copper or aluminum and braced for the maximum available fault
current. Minimum bus capacity shall be 100 amp.
F. Provide ground bus in all panelboards.
G. Neutral bars shall be full capacity.
H. Exterior and interior steel surfaces, including top, bottom and sides of surface
mounted panels, shall be cleaned and finished with gray enamel over a rust
inhibiting phosphatized coating. Color shall be ANSI 49 Fay.
I. Panelboard electrical ratings and configurations as shown on the drawings.
J. Circuit directory shall be typewritten and mounted behind clear plastic, in metal
frame on inside of each panel door. Circuit directors' shall indicate room number
and type of load served. Room numbers shall be those determined for final use by
Owner and may not necessarily be same as room numbers on drawings.
K. Panelboards shall be full bussed, entire length of panel, 42 spaces.
L. Circuit breakers shall be arranged in panel same as indicated on panel schedules.
M. Circuit numbers shall be permanently labeled at factory using Micarta nameplate
material for each pole. Stick-on decas for field installation are not acceptable.
N. Split bus panelboards are not acceptable.
16164-2 -
2.03 SWITCHING AND OVERCLrRRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
' A. Provide molded case circuit breakers of manufacturer's standard industrial
construction, bolt-on type, integral inverse time delay thermal and instantaneous
magnetic trip.
B. Multipole breakers shall be two or three pole as specified. Handle ties are not
permitted.
C. Provide UL Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers as shown on drawings.
D. Interrupting capacid' shall be as noted on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXqiCUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and
applicable requirements.
B. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are
permanently and mechanicall)' secured.
-- END OF SECTION
16164-3
SECTION 16170
MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 ELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections in the specifications.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
-- A. Disconnect switches, fusible and nonfusible.
B. Enclosures.
-- 1.03 REFERENCES
A. Federal Spec. W-S-865 - Switch, Box, (Enclosed), Surface-Mounted.
-- B. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacmrer's product data.
B. Submit equipment ratings for voltage, capaciD,, horsepower, and short circuit.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
-- A. Deliver switches individually wrapped in factotw-fabricated water-resistant type
containers.
' B. Handle switches carefully to avoid damage to material components, enclosure and
finish. Damaged switches shall not be installed on project.
' C. Store switches in a clean and dry space and protected from weather.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Siemens
B. General Electric Company
_ C. Square D
D. Cutler-Hammer
-- 16170-1
2.02 FABRICATED SWITCHES
A. Use 600 volt switches, single throw, fusible, or nonfusible, horsepower rated, heavy --
duty, quick-make and break, designed for locking in "ON" or "OFF" position, in
code gauge steel cabinets.
B. Use switches which have high conductivity copper current carrying parts and
number of poles required, dependent upon phases serving equipment.
C. Switches shall be Underwriters' approved for duty shown and NEMA 3R where
exposed to weather. NEMA 3R switches shall have weatherproof threaded hubs for
all conduit entries into switch.
D. Use fuse clips which are rejecting type to accept Class J or L fuses only. _
E. Identify switches, as to equipment served, with engraved laminated plastic plates.
Refer to the "Electrical Identification" section of this specification. _
F. All disconnects shall be equipped with ground lug.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION --
A. Installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which safeD' and disconnect
switches are to be installed and notif3, the Contractor in writing of conditions --
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with
the work until unsatisfactory. conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. For equipment with motors larger than 1/8 hp, install disconnect switches within --
sight of the motor.
END OF SECTION
16170-2 --
SECTION 16450
GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections in the specifications.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
_ A. Power system grounding.
B. Communication system grounding.
C. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
-- A. Ground the electrical service system neutral at service entrance equipment to
metallic water service, building steel, and to supplementary grounding electrodes.
Refer to grounding detail on drawings.
B. Ground each separately-derived system neutral to nearest effectively grounded
building structural steel member or if not available to alternate location in
- accordance with N.E.C.
C. Provide communications system grounding conductor at point of service entrance in
-- accordance with telephone utility. company specifications.
D. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed non-current
' carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding
conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ~ound connectors, and plumbing
systems.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on materials to be used on project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Grounding system components shall be as required to comply with the design and
construction of the system indicated.
- 16450-1
B. Conductors in contact with soil shall be insulated and suitable for direct burial.
C. Ground Rods shall be stainless steel, 3/4" diameter, minimum length 10 feet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION '
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install grounding conductors continuous, without splice or connection, between
equipment or device and grounding electrodes.
B. In feeder and branch circuits, provide a separate, insulated equipment grounding
conductor. Terminate each end on a grounding lug, bus, or bushing. Equipment _
grounding conductor for receptacle circuits shall terminate at ground terminal on
device.
C. Connect grounding electrode conductors to metal water pipe using suitable ground
clamp. Make connections to ~anged piping at street side of flange. Provide
bonding jumper around water meter. _
D. Welded Connections:
1. All below grade connections, connections to rebar or structural steel
connections on grounding cables #6 AWG or larger, including ground lugs,
shall be welded with CADVqELD, or an approved exothermic welding _
process. This weld material shall:
a. Contain no phosphorus, caustic or explosive material. --
b. Utilize a minimum of 3% tin as a wetting agent.
c. Contain ingredients which screen out between 30 and 140 mesh.
2. Welded connections made in confined areas shall utilize double-filtered
EXOLON smokeless molds.
E. No strap grounding clamps shall be used, connections requiring bolting shall be
made up with Monel metal bolts, washers and nuts. Connections shall be made only
after surfaces have been cleaned, or ground to expose virgin metal.
F. Conductor connections shall be made by means of solderless connectors such as
serrated bolted clamps or split bolt and nut type connectors. Non-accessible ground
connections shall be made by exothermic weld.
G. Supplementary Grounding Electrode: Use driven ground rods on exterior of
building.
H. Provide grounding and bonding at Utility Company's metering equipment in
accordance with Utility Company's requirements.
16450-2
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tighmess and
proper installation.
END OF SECTION
-- 16450-3
SECTION 16510
LIGHTING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections in the specifications.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
_ A. Interior lighting fixtures.
B. Exterior lighting fixtures.
C. Lamps.
_ D. Ballasts.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures.
-- B. NEMA WD1 - General-Purpose Wiring Devices.
C. ANSI C82.1 - Specification for Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts.
D. ANSI C82.4 - Specifications for High-Intensir,J-Discharge Lamp Ballasts (Multiple
Supply Type).
E. NEMA LE 2 - H-I-D Lighting System Noise Criterion (LS-NC) Ratings.
- 1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's' data on lighting fixtures in booklet form, with separate sheet
' for each fixture, assembled by luminaire "type" in alphabetical order, with the
proposed fixture and accessories clearly labeled. Ballast and lamp product data
shall accompany fixture submittals.
B. Submit dimensioned drawings and performance data including coefficients of
utilization, candela distribution, spacing to mounting height ratio, efficiency and
visual comfort probabili~'.
-- 16510-1
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver lighting fixtures individually wrapped in factory-fabricated fiberboard type
containers.
B. Handle lighting fixtures carefully to prevent breakage, denting and scoring the
fixture finish. Do not install damaged lighting fixtures.
C. Store lighting fixtures in a clean, dr3' space and protected from the weather.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Lighting fixtures and accessories shall comply with the design and function
requirements of the project.
B. Provide lighting fixtures of the size, type and rating as scheduled, complete with,
but not limited to, lamps, lampholders, reflectors, ballasts, and wiring.
2.02 INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Fluorescent Fixtures: Lenses shall be .125 inch average nominal virgin acrylic.
Provide a minimum of 8 hold-down lens retaining clips for troffers utilizing framed
diffuser lenses.
B. Incandescent fixtures shall be prewired equipped with integral thermal protection.
C. Fixtures for metal-halide lamps shall have protective cover over bulb or special
protection for arc tube rupture. Arc tube ruptures must be contained by the lamp
and fixture assembly.
2.03 EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Enclosures shall be complete with gaskets to form weatherproof seal and UL
approved for wet locations.
B. Provide low temperapare ballasts with reliable starting to 0 degees F.
2.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - LAMPS
A. Phillips.
B. Sylvania.
NOTE: General Electric lamps are not acceptable.
16510-2
2.05 LAMPS
' A. Incandescent lamps shall be inside frosted type, 130 volts, 2500 hour minimum,
extended service lamps.
' B. Fluorescent lamps shall be equal to Sylvania Octron, 32 watt, FO32/735, 20,000
hours, 2800 lumens, T8 with color temperature of 3500K and a 75CKI for operation
with electronic ballasts.
C. Metal halide HID lamps shall be phosphor coated or clear as recommended by
fixture manufacturer.
D. Maintenance Stock: Furnish a stock of replacement lamps in the original cartons or
_ packing sleeves, amounting to 10% (but not less than two lamps in each case) of
each type and size lamp used in each fixture type. Deliver replacement stock as
directed to Owner's storage space.
2.06 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - BALLASTS
_ A. Valmont.
B. Motorola.
C. Magnetek.
2.07 BALLASTS
-- A. Fluorescent ballast shall be electronic, sound rating A, full light output, transient
protection, IEEE 587, maximum 10% total harmonic distortion.
-- B. HID ballast shall be of the lead-peak autotransformer l~,pe for metal halide lamps.
Ballast shall start and operate the lamp at ambient temperatures ranging from minus
20°F to 105°F. All ballasts shall be encased and potted and shall have automatic
-- thermal protection, and high power factor, minimum of 90%.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
' A. Installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which light fixtures are to be
installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper
and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. If a fixture type designation is omitted, furnish fixture of the same type as shown for
_ rooms of similar usage. Verify with Architect/Engineer before purchase and
installation.
-- 16510-3
B. Check the building electrical system requirements and architectural finishes, and
regardless of the catalog number prefixes and suffixes shown, fumish f~xtures with
the proper trim, frames, supports, hangers, ballasts, voltage rating, and other
miscellaneous appurtenances to properly coordinate with said conditions. Verify
with Architect/Engineer prior to ordering.
C. Check the type of ceilings to be installed in each room and verify that the recessed
light fixtures are proper for the type of ceiling to be installed before ordering
fixmares.
D. Fasten fixtures securely to structural support members of the building; solid pendant
fixtures shall be plumb.
E. Immediately before final observation, clean all fixtures. inside and out, including
plastics and glassware, and adjust all trim to properly fit adjacent surface, replace
broken or damaged pans, and lamp and test all fixtures for electrical as well as
mechanical operation.
F. Protect installed fixtures from damage during the remainder of the construction
period.
G. Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures, and after circuitrv has been
energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with
requirements. V~rhen possible, correct malfunctioning units at the site, then retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units. and
proceed with retesting.
H. Incandescent lamps shall be new at time of final acceptance.
I. Fluorescent lamps may be used in the final finisl~ing of the building. Those that
have exceeded more than 1/3 of their rated life (as established by Architect/Engineer
records), or that have blackened ends shall be replaced with new lamps before final
acceptance.
END OF SECTION
16510-4 --
SECTION 16930
-- LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.0l RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
_ A. Lighting contactors and enclosures.
B. Photocell.
C. Time clock.
1.03 REFERENCES
-- A. ANSI/NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.
B. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.
-- 1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data on photocells, time clocks. and contactors.
B. Include outline drawings with dimensions and equipment ratings for voltage,
capaciD, and poles.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
-- A. Deliver lighting control equipment in factory-fabricated containers.
B. Store in a clean, dry space and protected from the weather.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A. Square D.
B. Zenith.
2.02 LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A. 30 Amp contactors shall be Zenith MMC Series.
B. 75 Amp and larger contactors shall be Zenith MVP Series.
- 16930-1
C. Contactors shall be mechanically held with auxiliary relay for 2 wire control.
D. Coil Operating Voltage: 120 volts, 60 hertz ac.
E. Contacts: 600 volt, amperes as indicated on drawings.
F. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, Type 1.
G. Provide solderless pressure wire terminals.
2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - PHOTOCELLS
A. Paragon. '
B. Tork.
2.04 PHOTOCELLS
A. Photocells shall be sealed cadmium sul~de with manually adjustable level slide
equal to Paragon CW.
B. Photocell shall have minimum time delay of 15 seconds and designed so the load
will remain ON in case of cell failure.
C. Photocell shall have rating as shown on drawings.
2.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - TIME CLOCK
A. Paragon.
B. Tork.
2.06 TIME CLOCK
A. Time clock shall be 7-day with spring wound carryover equal to Paragon 7210 _
Series.
PART 3 - EXECUTION --
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install lighting control equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions, the applicable requirements of NEC.
B. Anchor enclosures fn'mly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are
permanently and mechanically secured.
END OF SECTION
16930-2